Development Guidelines and Standard Specifications Landscape … · 2014. 6. 27. · 3.14.6...

Development Guidelines and Standard SpecificationsLandscape Construction

Greater Vernon Area, Regional District of North Okanagan

July 2013

Golder Associates Ltd. and the Regional District of North Okanagan have created these Parks Guidelines and Standards based on a review and compilation of best practices in the industry. Users of these standards are advised that they are intended as guidance and should not be relied on without review by qualified professionals (landscape architects, engineers) for their applicability to a given project, site or contract arrangement. Amendments or supplements to these guideline standards may be required to suit a specific project. Neither Golder Associates Ltd. or the Regional District of North Okanagan shall accept any liability for the use of these guidelines and standards for design or construction of a specific project.

Cover Image courtesy of Outland Design Landscape Architecture, Photo: ©2013 Fred Schaad

Table of Contents

Contents INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................... i Acknowledgments .................................................................................................................................... ii Glossary & Abbreviations ........................................................................................................................ iii SECTION I - DESIGN STANDARDS ....................................................................................................... 1 1 PARKS AND OPEN SPACE CATEGORIES .................................................................................... 2

1.1 City Wide Parks ........................................................................................................................ 2 1.1.1 Major Destination Parks ....................................................................................................... 2 1.1.2 Athletic Parks ........................................................................................................................ 4 1.1.3 Urban Parks .......................................................................................................................... 6 1.1.4 Beach Parks ......................................................................................................................... 7

1.2 Local Area Parks ...................................................................................................................... 8 1.2.1 Community Parks ................................................................................................................. 8 1.2.2 Neighbourhood Parks ........................................................................................................... 8 1.2.3 Tot Lots ............................................................................................................................... 11 1.2.4 Dog Parks ........................................................................................................................... 12

1.3 Natural Areas.......................................................................................................................... 14 1.3.1 Natural Areas ...................................................................................................................... 14 1.3.2 Trails ................................................................................................................................... 14 1.3.3 Waterfront Access .............................................................................................................. 15

2 STREETSCAPE OPEN SPACE CATEGORIES ............................................................................ 18 2.1 Performance Standards – Streetscape Open Space Systems .............................................. 18

2.1.1 Minimum Required Professional Qualifications: ................................................................. 19 2.2 Prescriptive Standards – Streetscape Open Space Systems ................................................ 19

2.2.1 Boulevards .......................................................................................................................... 19 2.2.2 Medians .............................................................................................................................. 20 2.2.3 Roundabouts, Traffic Circles and Cul-De-Sac Islands ....................................................... 20

3 DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION, PERMITTING & APPROVALS PROCESS ...................................... 23 3.1 General Procedures ............................................................................................................... 23 3.2 Environmental Assessment .................................................................................................... 24 3.3 Erosion Control ....................................................................................................................... 24 3.4 Fire Management ................................................................................................................... 24 3.5 Permits ................................................................................................................................... 24 3.6 Construction and Inspection ................................................................................................... 25 3.7 Responsibilities to the Public .................................................................................................. 26 3.8 Drawing Requirements, Procedures, Permits and Inspections .............................................. 26

Table of Contents

3.8.1 Concept Design .................................................................................................................. 26 3.8.2 Detail Design ...................................................................................................................... 27 3.8.3 Tender Services ................................................................................................................. 27 3.8.4 Construction Services ........................................................................................................ 27

3.9 Approval of Consultant’s Drawings ........................................................................................ 27 3.10 Indemnity and Insurance and Guarantee .............................................................................. 28

3.10.1 Additional Terms ............................................................................................................ 29 3.10.2 WorkSafe BC ................................................................................................................. 29 3.10.3 Indemnification ............................................................................................................... 29 3.10.4 Business License ........................................................................................................... 30

3.11 Maintenance & Warranty Periods .......................................................................................... 30 3.11.1 Certificate of Final Acceptance ...................................................................................... 31 3.11.2 Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 31

3.12 Landscape Concept Plan Requirements ............................................................................... 31 3.12.1 Theme and Function ...................................................................................................... 31 3.12.2 Minimum Consultant Qualifications ................................................................................ 32

3.13 Landscape Bonding Requirements ........................................................................................ 32 3.13.1 Project and Applicant Identification ................................................................................ 33 3.13.2 Landscape Plan Checklist .............................................................................................. 33 3.13.3 Opinion of Cost Construction & Maintenance for Bonding ............................................ 33 3.13.4 Landscape Concept Plan Requirements ....................................................................... 36

3.14 Construction Plan Requirements ........................................................................................... 36 3.14.1 General Requirements ................................................................................................... 36 3.14.2 Cover Sheet ................................................................................................................... 37 3.14.3 Demolition & Removals Plan (If Required) .................................................................... 37 3.14.4 Layout & Grading Plan ................................................................................................... 37 3.14.5 Planting Plan .................................................................................................................. 38 3.14.6 Irrigation Plan ................................................................................................................. 39 3.14.7 Minimum Consultant Qualifications ................................................................................ 39 3.14.8 Typical Details ................................................................................................................ 39 3.14.9 As Built Plans ................................................................................................................. 39 3.14.10 Other Plans .................................................................................................................... 40 3.14.11 Private Utility Plans & Profiles ........................................................................................ 40

3.15 Standards for AutoCAD Drawings ......................................................................................... 40 3.16 Utility and Pipeline Location Contact Numbers ...................................................................... 40 3.17 Inspections ............................................................................................................................. 41 3.18 Example Plan Sets ................................................................................................................. 41

4 LANDSCAPE DESIGN STANDARDS ............................................................................................ 59

Table of Contents

4.1 Performance Standards – Landscape Design ....................................................................... 59 4.1.1 Related Standards .............................................................................................................. 59 4.1.2 Minimum Qualifications ...................................................................................................... 59

4.2 Prescriptive Standards – Landscape Design ......................................................................... 59 4.2.1 Subgrade and Topsoil Design Guidelines .......................................................................... 59 4.2.2 Drainage Guidelines ........................................................................................................... 60 4.2.3 Topsoil and Growing Medium Depths ................................................................................ 60 4.2.4 Minimum Setbacks for Trees .............................................................................................. 60 4.2.5 Minimum Landscape Area Dimensions and Maximum Grades ......................................... 61 4.2.6 Play Structure Plantings ..................................................................................................... 61 4.2.7 Planting Details and Procedures ........................................................................................ 61 4.2.8 Shrubs and Groundcovers ................................................................................................. 61 4.2.9 Utility Easements & Right-Of-Ways .................................................................................... 61 4.2.10 Mulch .............................................................................................................................. 61 4.2.11 Planting Timing and Establishment Watering Provisions ............................................... 61 4.2.12 Vandalism and Theft Prevention .................................................................................... 62 4.2.13 Maintenance/Pruning/Clean-Up ..................................................................................... 62 4.2.14 Pruning ........................................................................................................................... 63

4.3 Pathways and Trails ............................................................................................................... 63 4.3.1 Pathways Design Standards .............................................................................................. 63 4.3.2 Alignments .......................................................................................................................... 64 4.3.3 Pathway Easements ........................................................................................................... 64 4.3.4 Street Crossings ................................................................................................................. 64 4.3.5 Play Equipment Sites ......................................................................................................... 64 4.3.6 Parking Lots ........................................................................................................................ 64 4.3.7 Surface Materials ................................................................................................................ 67 4.3.8 Width .................................................................................................................................. 67 4.3.9 Safety Clearance and Setback Requirements ................................................................... 67 4.3.10 Pathway Safety Rail ....................................................................................................... 67 4.3.11 Pathway Junctions.......................................................................................................... 68 4.3.12 Pathway Entrances/Wheel Chair Ramps ....................................................................... 68 4.3.13 Trails Design Guidelines ................................................................................................ 71 4.3.14 Recommended References ............................................................................................ 73

4.4 Handrails and Fences ............................................................................................................ 73 4.4.1 General Performance Standards for Handrails and Wood Fences .................................... 74 4.4.2 Performance Standards for Handrails ................................................................................ 75 4.4.3 Performance Standards for Fences, .................................................................................. 76 4.4.4 Minimum Professional Qualifications ................................................................................. 76

Table of Contents

4.4.5 Prescriptive Standards for Handrails and Wood Fences ................................................... 76 4.4.6 Minimum Professional Qualifications ................................................................................. 77

4.5 SIGNAGE STANDARDS ....................................................................................................... 77 4.5.1 Performance Standards for Signage .................................................................................. 77 4.5.2 Prescriptive Standards for Signage ................................................................................... 80 4.5.3 Preferred Providers ............................................................................................................ 89

5 IRRIGATION ................................................................................................................................... 90 5.1 General Irrigation Design Requirements ............................................................................... 90 5.2 Performance Standards – Irrigation ....................................................................................... 90

5.2.1 Performance Standards For Irrigation Development Are:.................................................. 90 5.3 Prescriptive Standards – Irrigation ......................................................................................... 91

5.3.1 Minimum Consultant Qualifications .................................................................................... 91 5.3.2 Irrigation Service Connections ........................................................................................... 92

6 RECREATION FACILITIES ............................................................................................................ 93 6.1 Soccer Fields and Ball Diamonds .......................................................................................... 93 6.2 Tennis and Pickle Ball Courts ................................................................................................ 93

6.2.1 Tennis Courts ..................................................................................................................... 93 6.2.2 Pickleball ............................................................................................................................ 95

6.3 Basketball Courts ................................................................................................................... 96 7 DOG PARKS .................................................................................................................................. 96

7.1 Design Criteria ....................................................................................................................... 96 7.2 Establishment Procedure ....................................................................................................... 97 7.3 Rules and Regulations ........................................................................................................... 98 7.4 On-going Monitoring and Maintenance .................................................................................. 99 7.5 References ............................................................................................................................. 99

8 COMMUNITY GARDENS ............................................................................................................. 100 8.1 Typical Design & Construction Considerations .................................................................... 100

8.1.1 Site selection .................................................................................................................... 100 8.1.2 Garden Layout & Design .................................................................................................. 101

SECTION II - APPROVED MATERIAL SELECTION GUIDE .............................................................. 102 1 PLANT MATERIAL PERFORMANCE STANDARDS ................................................................... 102

1.1 Approved Trees Species ...................................................................................................... 103 1.2 Street tree size, spacing and location .................................................................................. 105

1.2.1 Tree Size Single Family ................................................................................................... 105 1.2.2 Urban Trees in Pavement ................................................................................................ 106 1.2.3 Trees for Parks and Open Spaces ................................................................................... 106

1.3 Shrubs & Ground Cover ....................................................................................................... 109 1.4 Vines and Ornamental Grasses: .......................................................................................... 111

Table of Contents

1.5 Annuals: ................................................................................................................................ 112 1.6 Lawn Materials ..................................................................................................................... 112

1.6.1 Sod Lawn Areas ............................................................................................................... 112 1.6.2 Seed Lawn Areas ............................................................................................................. 112

1.7 Hydro seeding, Terraseeding and Direct Drilling ................................................................. 113 2 EDGING, MULCH, AND GROUNDCOVER MATERIALS ............................................................ 113

2.1 Edging .................................................................................................................................. 113 2.2 Weed Barrier ........................................................................................................................ 113 2.3 Ground Cover Materials ....................................................................................................... 113

2.3.1 Organic Mulch Ground Cover Materials ........................................................................... 114 2.3.2 Inorganic Ground Cover Materials ................................................................................... 114

2.4 Root Barrier Protection Materials ......................................................................................... 114 3 SITE FURNISHINGS .................................................................................................................... 115

3.1 Park Benches ....................................................................................................................... 115 3.2 Bollards ................................................................................................................................. 115 3.3 Trash Receptacles ............................................................................................................... 115

4 RETAINING WALLS ..................................................................................................................... 116 4.1 Drystack Boulder .................................................................................................................. 116 4.2 Concrete & Concrete Unit Block........................................................................................... 116

5 PLAYGROUND EDGING, SURFACING, AND SUBGRADE ....................................................... 117 5.1 Safety Fencing & Hand Rails ............................................................................................... 117 5.2 Concrete Unit Pavers ........................................................................................................... 117

SECTION III - STANDARDS FOR MAINTENANCE ............................................................................ 118 1 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS – MAINTENANCE .................................................................... 118 2 PRESCRIPTIVE STANDARDS – MAINTENANCE ...................................................................... 118

2.1 Mowing ................................................................................................................................. 118 2.2 Small Mowing / Power Trim .................................................................................................. 118 2.3 Litter Control ......................................................................................................................... 119 2.4 Garbage Receptacle Emptying / Recycling .......................................................................... 119 2.5 Spring & Fall Clean-up ......................................................................................................... 120 2.6 Fertilize ................................................................................................................................. 120 2.7 Aerate ................................................................................................................................... 120 2.8 Top Dressing ........................................................................................................................ 120 2.9 Chemical Weed Control ....................................................................................................... 121 2.10 Tree Well Maintenance ........................................................................................................ 121 2.11 Shrub Bed Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 121 2.12 Flower Bed Fertilizing ........................................................................................................... 122 2.13 Irrigation Maintenance .......................................................................................................... 122

Table of Contents

2.14 Pathway / Roads / Parking Lot Maintenance ....................................................................... 123 2.15 Snow Removal ..................................................................................................................... 123 2.16 Park Features ....................................................................................................................... 123 2.17 Building Maintenance / Janitorial ......................................................................................... 123

2.17.1 Building Maintenance: .................................................................................................. 123 2.17.2 Building Janitorial: ........................................................................................................ 124

2.18 Playground Inspection / Maintenance .................................................................................. 124 2.19 Tree Pruning ........................................................................................................................ 124 2.20 Water Features (Fountains / Ponds) .................................................................................... 125

2.20.1 Summer Operation: ...................................................................................................... 125 2.20.2 Winterisation: ............................................................................................................... 125

2.21 Fence Maintenance.............................................................................................................. 125 2.22 Tennis Courts ....................................................................................................................... 125 2.23 Playfields .............................................................................................................................. 126

i Introduction

INTRODUCTION

The purpose of the Greater Vernon Parks & Recreation Development Guidelines and Standard Specifications - Landscape Construction 2013 is to provide:

• A list of appropriate development activities for each park and public open space type within the member municipalities of: The City of Vernon, District of Coldstream, and the Electoral Areas B and C Regional District of North Okanagan; collectively referred to as the Greater Vernon Parks and Recreation District (GVPRD);

• Concept Planning Requirements at the Land Use / Outline Plan stage; • Construction approval requirements; • Construction plan requirements; • Requirements for inspections during construction; • Construction Completion Certificate requirements; • Final Acceptance Certificate requirements; and • Detail specifications for landscape construction.

The Greater Vernon Parks & Recreation Landscape Standards 2013 include:

Section I Design Standards

Section II Approved Materials Selection Guide

Section III Standards for Maintenance

Section IV Construction Standards (MMCD Gold Supplementary Specifications)

Section V Standard Details

The Master Municipal Construction Specifications and Standard Detail Drawings are available from: Master Municipal Construction Documents Association, telephone (604) 681-0295.

Products and materials specified in the Approved Products List shall be used on projects governed by this standard unless an alternate is approved by the Approving Authority.

If any conflict occurs between the written specifications and standard detail drawings and/or another code or regulation enforceable in the GVPRD, the respective Approving Officer shall determine the standard to be used.

Throughout this document the words "shall" and "must" and "is required" indicate the imperative. The word "should" indicates the desired or intended result without being mandatory. The word "may", and like expressions, indicate a choice, an election, or a permitted procedure according to the context.

ii Introduction

Acknowledgments

The project team would like to thank the following people who have had input into this document:

Keith Pinkoski, Parks Planner, Landscape Architect Regional District of North Okanagan

Mark Dowhaniuk, Infrastructure Engineer, City of Vernon

Mike Pethick, Operations Superintendent, District of Coldstream

Brooke Marshall, Environmental Planner, City of Vernon

James Rice, Manager, Public Works, City of Vernon

City of Vernon Public Works Department Personnel

Consultant Team:

Golder Sustainable Communities

220 - 1755 Springfield Road Kelowna, British Columbia Canada V1Y 5V5 +1 (250) 860 8424 www.golder.com

David Reid, Project Director

Gabe Ross, Project Manager

Sarah Cloherty, Robin Purdy, Technicians

Sub Consultant: Outland Landscape Architecture

Fiona Barton, Landscape Architect

Steve Petryshyn, Irrigation Designer

http://www.golder.com/

iii Introduction

Glossary & Abbreviations

Approving Officer

The nominated GVPRD or Municipal Staff member responsible for review and approval of proposed projects including inspections and final acceptance certification

BCLS B C Landscape Standard jointly published by the BC Society of Landscape Architects and BC Landscape and Nursery Association.

Consultant The person or company contracted to the Owner to complete the design, engineering and planning for the improvements to the subject property

Contractor The person, firm or corporation identified as such in the agreement and includes the Contractor’s authorized representative as designated to the Owner in writing.

ESA Environmentally Sensitive Area

GVPRC Greater Vernon Parks, Recreation & Culture manage the parks and recreation services in the GVPRD. The GVPRC is responsible for building and maintaining parks and recreation facilities, and for running recreation programs. The GVPRC conducts some aspects of its work with its own staff; other functions are contracted to others.

GVPRD Greater Vernon Parks and Recreation District

GVPRMP Greater Vernon Parks and Recreation Master Plan

MoTI Ministry of Transportation and Infrastructure

Municipality The local municipality or municipalities with jurisdiction over the subject property

OPC Opinion of Cost for construction provided by a suitably qualified Consultant on behalf of the Owner.

Owner The owner is the person or persons representing the ownership of the subject property. The owner may in some cases also be the local Municipality.

Public Land Lands that are held in public ownership

QEP Qualified Environmental Professional as defined by the BC Ministry of Environment Riparian Areas Regulations.

This page is intentionally blank to allow for double sided printing.

Greater Vernon Parks & Recreation | Development Guidelines & Standard Specifications for Landscape Construction

1 Section I – Design Standards

SECTION I - DESIGN STANDARDS

Section 1 of this this document comprises of the following sections:

1 Parks & Open Space Categories

2 Natural Areas

3 Streetscape Open Space Categories

4 Construction Permitting and Approvals Process

5 Landscape Design

6 Irrigation

7 Recreational Facilities

8 Landscape

For each design standard, applicants may choose between one of two approaches: a ‘Performance Standard’ or a ‘Prescriptive Standard’:

Performance Standards:

Intended for large, complex, unusual and innovative developments, Performance Standards set out general guidelines that designs must meet, but allow qualified professionals to determine the methods to meet the guidelines, subject to the written approval of the Approving Officer.

Prescriptive Standards:

Intended for small or simple developments, Prescriptive Standards set out both specific rules and design details that if used with good professional practice are pre-approved by the Municipal Approving Authority.

References are made throughout to Standard Detail Drawings. These can be found in the Master Municipal Construction Documents and Standard Detail Drawings, or Greater Vernon Area Parks & Recreation District (GVPRD) Supplemental Specifications found in Section V of this document.

The headings and sub-headings are for the convenience of the reader only. The intent of each part shall be as stated in the text.

No departure from these standards shall be permitted without the prior written approval of the Approving Officer. Any questions with regard to these Design Standards should be addressed to the appropriate municipal contact below:

Regional District of North Okanagan

Keith Pinkoski

Parks Planner

9848 Aberdeen Road

Coldstream, BC V1B 2K9

Phone: (250) 550-3700

City of Vernon

Mark Dowhaniuk

Infrastructure Engineer

3400-30 Street

Vernon, BC V1T 5E6

Phone: (250) 545-1361

District of Coldstream

Mike Pethick

Operations Superintendent

9901 Kalamalka Road,

Coldstream, BC V1B 1L6

Phone: (250) 545-5304


1 PARKS AND OPEN SPACE CATEGORIES

Based on the Greater Vernon Parks and Recreation Masterplan (GVPRM) all parks and public open spaces within the GVPRD shall be designated as one of the following categories.

Section 1.1 City Wide Parks

Major Destination Parks

Athletics Parks

Urban Parks

Beach Parks

Section 1.2 Local Area Parks

Community Parks

Neighborhood Parks

Tot Lots

Dog Parks

Section 1.3 Natural Areas

Natural Areas

Trails

Waterfront Access

Each park and open space category shall accommodate programs appropriate to its size, landscape context, and intended community use. The following tables summarize the general program requirements for each class of park and should to be used by the Approval Authority as guidance to in reviewing Parks and Open Space projects.

Note program requirements for private parks will be assessed on a case by case basis by the Approving Officer.

1.1 City Wide Parks Standard: 2ha (5 acres) per 1000 population – Parks that draw visitors from across the GVPRD due to natural features or facilities and programs offered.

1.1.1 Major Destination Parks Centred around features that are unique and offer a range of facilities and activities. Features can be natural or built. Typical minimum size is 12ha (29.7 acres). Polson Park is the only existing major destination park in the GVPRD.


Table 1. Development Guidelines Requirements – Major Destination Parks

Item Quantity

Comments Minimum Maximum

Optimal Size (ha) 12 40 -

Grading/Loaming Activity zones Levels 1 – 4 as per BCLS,

Entire Site Existing topsoil to be preserved when possible. Minimize compaction of soil structure.

Turf Activity zones Levels 1 – 4 as per BCLS

Entire Site As per spec

Trees 10 trees/0.405 ha (1 acre).

Site Specific Approved species

Shrubs 50 sq.m/ha Site specific -

Habitat Planting Steep slope areas and within riparian or habitat buffer zones.

Utilize naturalized planting areas to reduce irrigation and maintenance costs.

Use locally sourced plant materials.

Irrigation Activity zones Levels 1 – 3 as per BCLS.

Entire Site Automatic, as per spec

On-site parking Site specific Site specific

20 stalls per Major/minor soccer or rugby field, 15 per ball field.

Reductions maybe possible through shared use of adjacent existing parking, and alternate public and active transportation options.

Bicycle parking

At entry points and major congregation points.

Site specific -

Washroom facility/Pavilion 1 Site specific -

Play equipment and other recreation equipment including adult fitness machines

2 playgrounds per site each to accommodate 20-50 children.

+ Spray park & adult fitness circuit.

Customize to community need or preference if desired. Integrate with natural play options and thematic elements.

Walkways As required 2.0-3.0m wide. As per spec.

Non programmed lawn space 1 area minimum size to accommodate 50m dia. circle.

Site Specific -

Sports Fields & Programmed Lawn Areas

2 Major soccer fields Site Specific To be determined in consultation with community need or preference.

Tennis Courts Double Court Quad court To be determined in consultation with community need or preference.

Security Lighting

Along major pedestrian walkways, parking lots, washrooms and concession facilities.

Site specific

Design to respond to proposed evening use programs.

Use ‘dark sky ’friendly fixtures.


Item Quantity


Amenity lighting Entry features and key focal points.

Site Specific

Prioritize energy efficient fixtures.

Solar powered lights maybe used in where safety and security is not a prime concern.

Benches & Seating Opportunities

12 benches per ha.

4 picnic table/shelters per ha.

Site specific

Respond to site views, microclimate and social patterns of use. Integrate informal seating opportunities into planter edgers and step walls.

Bleachers _ 2/ball diamond and soccer field.

Consider portable structures that can be moved to respond to seasonal use.

Trash receptacles At each entryway and bench seating area.

Additional receptacles at concessions and other gathering spots.

Set 900mm back from main path of travel.

Install bear proof receptacles where wildlife interactions may occur.

Compost & recycling receptacles

Install receptacles at key gathering nodes.

Install with each trash receptacle.

To be confirmed with parks maintenance manager.

Drinking fountains 2 at washroom buildings.

Site specific Shall be accessible models.

Fencing Along all property lines.

Customized along road boundaries and entryways.

Standard black 1.2m chain-link fence as per spec or approved alternate.

Park Identity Signage At primary entry point.

Integrated into custom furnishing and detailing throughout.

Design should celebrate local unique “sense of place” and character.

Wayfinding & Interpretive Signage

At primary entry points.

At key focal nodes and other points of interest.

-

Public Art 1 piece in central focal node.

Integrate multiple opportunities throughout park.

In consultation with local public art committee.

1.1.2 Athletic Parks Major athletic facilities that draw participants from across the GVPRD. These parks are regularly used for tournaments and other sports related events. DND, Marshall Park, and Kin Race Track fall within this category. A minimum size is 15 ha (37 acres), but 20 ha (49.4 acres) is preferred depending on the facilities included.


Table 2. Development Guidelines Requirements – Athletic Parks

Item Quantity


Optimal Size (ha) 15 20

Grading/Loaming Activity zones Levels 1 – 4 as per BCLS.

Entire Site Existing topsoil to be preserved when possible. Minimize compaction of soil structure.

Turf Activity zones Levels 1 – 4 as per BCLS.

Entire Site. As per spec.


Site Specific. Approved species.

Shrubs Site specific. Site specific.


Site Specific.

Indigenous Species sourced locally where possible. Plant materials selected under supervision of a Qualified Environmental Professional where site is within 30m of ESA.


Entire Site Automatic, as per spec.

On-site parking Site specific Site specific



Bicycle parking,


Site specific -

Washroom facility/Pavilion

1 Site specific. -

Play equipment and other recreation equipment

15-20 children. + Adult fitness circuit. Customize to community need or preference if desired.

Walkways As required 2.0-3.0m wide As per spec Sports Fields & Programmed Lawn

Site Specific Site Specific To be determined in consultation with community need or preference.

Security Lighting

Along major pedestrian walkways, car parks, washrooms and concession facilities.

Site specific


Use ‘darksky ’friendly fixtures.


6 benches per ha. Site specific. Respond to site views, microclimate and social patterns of use.

Bleachers _ 2/ball diamond or soccer field.


Drinking fountains 1 at washrooms. Site specific. Shall be accessible models.


Item Quantity


Park Identity Signage 1 per major entry. Site specific. Design should celebrate local unique “sense of place” and character.


Additional receptacles at concessions & other gathering spots.

Set 3ft back from main path of travel.


1.1.3 Urban Parks Located within the central business district, they provide seating and gathering spaces and features such as art and ornamental plantings that establish a landscape character for the core area. They are distinct from neighbourhood and community parks in that play equipment is not typically included. There are eight small urban parks in the GVPRD including the cenotaph parks. City hall, library, museum, and several boulevard areas that add character to the urban area.

Table 3. Development Guidelines Requirements – Urban parks

Item Quantity


Optimal Size (ha) NA NA -


Site Specific. Existing topsoil to be preserved when possible. Minimize compaction of soil structure.


Site Specific. As per spec.



Shrubs Site Specific. Site specific. -


Entire Site Automatic, as per spec.

Bicycle parking, Min 2 spaces. Site specific. Integrate bike racks into furniture design – e.g. bollards and tree cages.

Walkways As required. Site Specific. Majority of site maybe hard surface.

Integrate permeable paving and infiltration opportunities.

Security Lighting As required to address security and safety issues.

Site specific. Use ‘darksky ’friendly fixtures.


Site Specific.





2 benches and 1 cluster of social seating.

Site specific Integrate informal seating opportunities into planter edgers and step walls.


- Interactive play elements.

Customize to community need or preference if desired.

Trash receptacles 1 Site specific. Set 3ft back from main path of travel. Compost & recycling receptacles

1 Install with each trash receptacle.


Drinking fountains Site specific. Site specific. -

Park Identity Signage Site specific. Site specific. Design should celebrate local unique “sense of place” and character.




1.1.4 Beach Parks Major beaches that attract a regional population to the waterfront setting. Activity opportunities are varied and include swimming and boating. Existing beach parks include Kal beach, Kin Beach and Paddlewheel Park.

Table 4. Development Guidelines Requirements – Beach Parks

Item Quantity



Grading/Loaming Site specific. Site specific. Subject to RAR setback requirements.

Turf Site specific. Site specific. As per spec.


Site Specific. Subject to RAR habitat requirements.

Shrubs Site Specific. Site specific. Subject to RAR habitat requirements.


Site Specific.

Indigenous Species sourced locally where possible. Plant materials selected under supervision of a Qualified Environmental Professional

Irrigation

Activity zones Levels 1 – 3 as per BCLS.

Site specific. Automatic, as per spec.

On-site parking Site specific Site specific Based on estimated park use requirements.

Bicycle parking, Min 4 spaces. Site specific. -

Walkways Site Specific. 3.0-4.5m wide for major promenade.

As per Spec.

Security Lighting Main entry, Washroom & parking areas.

Site specific Use ‘darksky ’friendly fixtures


Item Quantity


Amenity lighting Site Specific Site specific


Solar powered lights maybe used in where safety and security is not a concern.

Washroom facility/Pavilion 1 Site specific Including change rooms

Play equipment and other recreation equipment including adult fitness machines.

15-20 children of various ages.

Site specific. Customize to community need or preference if desired.


Site specific. Site specific. Integrate informal seating opportunities into planter edgers & step walls.

Trash receptacles 1 per entry and at pavilion washroom.

Site specific but typically spaced every 100m along beachfront.

Set 3ft back from main path of travel.


1 at washroom/pavilion structure.



Drinking fountains 1 at washroom/pavilion structure.

Site specific. -

Park Identity Signage Site specific. Site specific. Design should celebrate local unique “sense of place” and character.


Site specific. Site specific. -

Fencing Along all property lines (excluding water edge).


Standard black 1.2m Chainlink fence as per spec or approved alternate.

Public Art Site specific. Integrate multiple opportunities throughout park.


1.2 Local Area Parks 1.2.1 Community Parks Standard: 1ha (2.5 acres) per 1000 population

Community Parks (optimal size 4 to 8 ha or 9.8 to 19.7 acres) generally serve the catchment area of a secondary school or about three to five neighbourhoods. They typically include sports fields, parking areas, washrooms and trails. They are meant to form the visual, physical and social focus of the community. Some examples of existing community parks are MacDonald Park, Creekside Park, and Grahame Park.

1.2.2 Neighbourhood Parks Standard: 1ha (2.5 acres) per 1000 population


Neighbourhood parks (optimal size 2 to 4 ha or 4.9 to 9.8 acres) generally serve the catchment area of an elementary school, or 2,000 to 4,000 population. They are meant to form the visual, physical, and social focus of the neighbourhood. In many cases portions of elementary school sites serve as neighbourhood parks. Some examples of existing neighbourhood parks are Alexis Park, Amory Park, Sawicki Park and N’Kwala Park.

Table 5. Development Guidelines Requirements – Community and Neighbourhood Parks

Item Quantity


Community Park Optimal Size (ha)

4 8 -

Neighborhood Park Optimal Size (ha)

2 4 -


Entire Site. Existing topsoil to be preserved when possible. Minimize compaction of soil structure.


Entire Site. As per spec.



Shrubs 50 sq.m/ha. Site specific. -



Indigenous Species sourced locally where possible. Plant materials selected under supervision of a Qualified Environmental Professional where site intersects an E.S.A.


Entire Site. Automatic, as per spec.

On-site parking Site specific. Site specific.



Bicycle parking,


Site specific. -

Washroom facility/Pavilion 1 Site specific. -

Play equipment and other recreation equipment including adult fitness machines

15-20 children of various ages.

+ Adult fitness circuit.

Customize to community need or preference if desired. Consider integrating ‘Natural Play’ opportunities.

Walkways As required. 2.0-3.0m wide Multiuse.

As per spec.


Item Quantity


Non programmed lawn space 1 area minimum size to accommodate 50m dia circle.

Site Specific. -


soccer fields or ball diamond as appropriate.

1x 76m Softball field

1x Major soccer field

To be determined in consultation with community need or preference.

Tennis Courts Double Court. Quad court. To be determined in consultation with community need or preference.

Community Gardens Site Specific. Site Specific. To be determined in consultation with community need or preference.

Security Lighting Along major pedestrian walkways.

Site specific. Design to respond to proposed evening use programs.

Use ‘dark sky’ friendly fixtures.


Site Specific.




10 benches per ha. Site specific.


Bleachers _ 2/ball diamond and soccer field.



Additional receptacles at concessions and other gathering spots.

Set 3ft back from main path of travel



Install receptacles at key gathering nodes.



Dogbag Dispensers & Signage At all entry points. Site Specific. -

Drinking fountains 3 per park. Site specific. At concession or washroom buildings.





Integrated into custom furnishing and detailing

Design should celebrate local unique “sense of place” and character.


At primary entry points.

At key focal nodes and other points of interest.

-





1.2.3 Tot Lots Tot lots are small properties (approximately one city lot) containing play equipment and other facilities for children. They service a smaller area than a neighborhood park and are often located in areas with young families. Existing tot lots will be retained and documented within the supply of neighborhood parks however no new tot lots will be obtained due to their relatively low use and high maintenance costs. Private developers are encouraged to provide common areas with play facilities within their developments. Some examples of the nine existing tot lots are Heron Glen, Hudac, and Lochaven tot lots.

Table 6. Development Guidelines Requirements – Tot lots

Item Quantity


Optimal Size (ha) 0.06 (0.15 ac) 0.2 (0.5 ac) -




Entire Site As per spec.

Trees 3 trees. Site Specific. Approved species.

Shrubs Site specific. Site specific. -



Indigenous Species sourced locally where possible. Plant materials selected under supervision of a Qualified Environmental Professional where site intersects an ESA.


Entire Site Automatic, as per spec


1 installation for 5 -10 children per site to suit ages 1- 6.

Site Specific. Customize to community need or preference if desired. “Nature Play” encouraged.

Walkways Along street frontage.

2.0m As per spec.

Non programmed lawn space 1 area minimum size to accommodate 10m dia circle.

Site Specific. -

Security Lighting Along major pedestrian walkways.

Site specific.




3 benches. Site specific.

Respond to site views, microclimate and social patterns of use. Integrate informal seating opportunities into raised planters and step walls.


Item Quantity


Trash receptacles At each entryway. - Set 3ft back from main path of travel.





Park Identity Signage - At primary entry point.

-

Public Art - Integrate multiple opportunities throughout park.


1.2.4 Dog Parks While not included in the GVPRM demand for Dog Parks are increasing within GVA communities and have been included in this section to assist in planning future off leash park facilities. Dog Parks typically must be a minimum size of 0.4 Ha (1 acre), with preference given to 0.8 – 1.2 Ha (2 - 3 acres) and must be carefully located to avoid compromising existing recreational and cultural uses or disrupting existing residents. Further information is included in Section 7.

Table 7. Development Guidelines Requirements – Dog parks

Item Quantity


Optimal Size (ha) 0.4 (1 ac). - Preference given to 0.8 – 1.2 Ha (2 - 3 ac).

Grading/Loaming Only where required to ensure user safety.

- Existing topsoil to be preserved when possible. Minimize compaction of soil structure.

Turf - Only in areas of lower traffic or outside of the designated off leash area.

Site specific.

Trees 10 trees. Site Specific. Approved species, will require protective fencing within off leash area.

Shrubs Buffer areas. Site specific. Will require protective fencing within off leash area.

Habitat Planting - Utilize naturalized planting areas to reduce irrigation and maintenance costs.

Typically dog parks will not be located in environmentally sensitive areas.

Irrigation Turf, shrub and tree plantings.

Entire Site. Automatic, as per spec.


Item Quantity



- Site Specific. Agility courses or other interactive elements can be considered.

Walkways To main entry points. - As per spec

Security Lighting - Site specific. Design to extend evening use. Use ‘darksky ’friendly fixtures.


3 benches. Site specific. Respond to site views, microclimate and social patterns of use.

Trash receptacles and doggie bag dispensers

At each entryway. - Set 3ft back from main path of travel

Fencing Along all boundaries designated off leash area.

Additional internal fences to create separate small dog area.


Designated areas within larger

Park Rules and Etiquette Signage

At all entry points Additional community notice boards useful.


1.3 Natural Areas 1.3.1 Natural Areas Natural Areas have been acquired by the GVPRC to protect environmentally significant areas and features in the form of environmental reserves as well as, where appropriate, to provide outdoor recreation opportunities. The natural areas include ponds, wetlands, riparian and forested areas, prominent slopes, and other natural features. There is no standard for acquisition of these areas. 11 parcels of land are classified as natural areas, and these are generally small for this type of land. Some examples are Becker Park, Black Rock, CEC Young, Cools Pond, McKergow Meadows, and Webster Park.

1.3.2 Trails Trails as defined in the GVPRMP include off-road trails that connect key natural features and use areas throughout the GVPRD. Trails are often located within natural areas. There is no standard for trail acquisition. Some examples of existing trails are the Gray Canal and BX Creek trails.

For walkways and trail design standards refer to section 4.3

Table 8. Development Guidelines Requirements – Trails & Natural Areas

Item Quantity



Trees & Shrubs As req. for habitat restoration & enhancement.

Site Specific. Indigenous Species only. To be sourced locally where possible. Plant materials selected under supervision of a Qualified Environmental Professional.

Grass Hydroseed Interior Grassland seed mix on disturbed areas.

Enhanced planting with additional species of native shrubs and perennials.

Irrigation - Temporary establishment irrigation only.

Surface components to be removed before final acceptance.

Walkways Site specific. Site Specific. As per spec.

On-site parking Trail head parking (can be on street).

Site specific. Minimize paved area.

Security Lighting - At trailhead entries. Use ‘darksky ’friendly fixtures. Consider Solar powered units where Hydro Services are unavailable.


Seating opportunity at trail heads.

Locate at view points and rest stops.

Low maintenance durable furniture or informal seating such as logs and boulders.

Trash receptacles At all entry points & trail heads.

- Set 3ft back from main path of travel.



Item Quantity


Fencing Black chain link on boundary when requested.



Park Identity & wayfinding Signage

At primary entry points and intersections.

Interpretive signage at key viewpoints and points of habitat or cultural value.

-



1.3.3 Waterfront Access Waterfront access points are small properties whose primary function is to provide public access to the water. Some of these serve local residents only and have steps or a path to a pocket beach. Others are boat launches that are used by residents throughout the area. There are a number of existing waterfront access points along the east shoreline of Kalamalka Lake.

Table 9. Development Guidelines Requirements – Waterfront Access

Item Quantity





Turf As Required. Entire Site. As per spec.

Trees 3 trees. Site Specific. Approved species.

Shrubs Site specific. Site specific. -



Indigenous Species only. To be sourced locally where possible. Plant materials selected under supervision of a Qualified Environmental.

Irrigation Temporary establishment irrigation

Activity zones Levels 1 – 3 as per BCLS.

Temporary surface components to be removed at before final acceptance.

Permanent systems to be automatic, as per spec.

Walkways 1.5 - 2.0m wide along street frontage.

+ provide accessible pathway to waterfront (where topography permits).

As per spec.

Non programmed lawn space Site specific. Site Specific. -


Item Quantity


Washroom facility/Pavilion - 1 Consider rentable public boat (canoe kayak) storage faculties.

Security Lighting At entry. + on any built structure.



1 bench. Site specific.


Trash receptacles At entryway. - Set 3ft back from main path of travel.


Fencing Along all property lines excluding abutting water edge.




Site Specific. -



Table 10. Parks & Open Space Program and Facilities Summary

Park Classification:

Key

Y= Required

N= Not Required

S= Project Specific

Maj

or D

estin

atio

n P

arks

Ath

letic

Par

ks

Urb

an P

arks

Bea

ch P

arks

Com

mun

ity P

arks

Nei

ghbo

rhoo

d P

arks

Tot L

ots

Nat

ural

Are

as

Trai

ls

Wat

erfro

nt A

cces

s

Optimal Size (ha) 12 15-20

NA NA 4-8 2-4 NA NA NA NA

On-site parking Y Y N Y Y Y N Y N S

Bicycle parking, Y Y Y Y Y Y N S N N

Washroom facility/Pavilion Y Y S S S N N S N N

Picnic Facilities Y Y S Y Y Y N S N S

Play Equipment Y S S Y Y Y Y N N N

Side walk (Hard surface trails Y Y Y S S S S N N N

Non programmed lawn space Y S S Y Y Y S S N S


Park Classification:

Key

Y= Required

N= Not Required

S= Project Specific

Maj

or D

estin

atio

n P

arks

Ath

letic

Par

ks

Urb

an P

arks

Bea

ch P

arks

Com

mun

ity P

arks

Nei

ghbo

rhoo

d P

arks

Tot L

ots

Nat

ural

Are

as

Trai

ls

Wat

erfro

nt A

cces

s


Y Y N S Y Y N N N N

Permanent Irrigation System Y Y Y S Y Y Y N N S

Gravel trails S S S S S S S Y Y S

Security Lighting Y Y Y S Y S N N N N

Amenity lighting Y S Y S S S N N N N


Y Y Y Y Y Y Y S S S

Trash receptacles Y Y Y Y Y Y Y S S S


Y S S S N N N N N N

Dog bag dispensers & signage N N N N N N N Y S N

Drinking fountains Y Y Y S S S N N N N

Street/Specimen Trees Y Y S Y Y Y S S S S

Amenity Planting Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N

Habitat Planting S S N S S Y Y Y Y S

Fenced Boundary Y Y N S S S S S S S

Park Identity Signage Y Y S Y Y Y S Y N S


Y S S S S S N Y Y N

Public Art Y S Y S Y Y S S S S


2 STREETSCAPE OPEN SPACE CATEGORIES

Required landscape treatments for streetscape open space categories shall be divided into the following three categories. The Consultant shall cross-reference these with other Engineering Standards in each Municipal jurisdiction, which set the overall street design standards and will supersede the standards set within this document.

Urban Streetscapes - Boulevards, Medians & Traffic Islands:

Typically with highway pavement, upright or flush curb, storm drains and storm water source controls, sanitary sewer, sidewalks, public water system, underground or overhead wiring and ornamental street lighting, street trees and landscape.

Rural Non-irrigated Streetscapes:

Typically with highway pavement, ditch or infiltration swale drainage, public water system or proven water source, sanitary sewer or approved septic disposal (where a municipal sanitary sewer extension is determined not feasible by the Approving Officer); with wiring and street lighting to rural standards. Commercial and Institutional land uses, other than home occupations, shall be developed to ‘Urban Standards’, even if situated within a ‘Rural Standard’ area.

Streetscape Detail Areas:

Typically with custom design of a neighborhood that may include a mix of urban and rural standards on a block by block basis, all designed to meet the Performance Standards set out in this document. Determination of the acceptable standard for each block in Streetscape Detail Areas shall relate to the adjacent land use, shall be consistent within a given block, and shall be decided by the Approving Officer.

2.1 Performance Standards – Streetscape Open Space Systems Intended for large, complex, unusual and innovative developments, Performance Standards set out general guidelines that designs must meet, but allow qualified professionals to determine the methods to meet the guidelines, subject to the written approval of the Approving Officer. The prescriptive standards described in the following section should be a starting point for the development of any performance standards.

Performance Standards for Streetscape Open Space Systems are:

• Accommodate motor vehicle traffic in a manner compatible with the environment in which the street is located.

• Employ traffic calming measures as appropriate to maximize road safety. • Avoid excessive road widths, which can otherwise create speeding problems and increase

stormwater runoff. • Minimize impervious area. • Allow space for stormwater infiltration and water quality treatment. • Provide emergency access for fire, police and ambulance vehicles. • Minimize crossing distances and maximize safety of pedestrians at intersections. • Minimize curb radii at intersections – while recognizing that larger radii may be required on

specific corners on bus routes and in commercial areas. • Provide for safe and efficient bicycle use – on the roadway, and optionally on off-street multi-

use pathways – and provide continuity of connection to the bicycle network. • Provide sidewalks on at least one side of local streets and both sides of arterial and collector


roads, and provide continuity of connections in the pedestrian network. • Design street, bicycle and pedestrian networks to avoid indirect and lengthy travel paths, and

to encourage walking to school, business, commercial or recreation areas. • Include street trees and street landscape as an integral part of the street design and allow for

sufficient uncompacted soil volume to support long term tree growth (see BC Landscape Standards).

• Design utility alignments and surface fixtures to avoid conflict points with vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists.

• Locate utilities in common trench where practical. • Avoid slopes that exceed 3:1 in the cross section, or provide shrub/groundcover landscape

treatments to slopes steeper than 3:1. • Minimize right of way width commensurate with meeting the above guidelines. • The proposed street system shall be ‘equivalent’ or better to the Prescriptive Standards.

2.1.1 Minimum Required Professional Qualifications: Required for applicants using the Performance Standards approach for Street Design:

• Professional Engineer with a minimum of 10 years’ experience in Transportation Engineering and desirably Professional Transportation Operations Engineer

• BC Registered Landscape Architect

2.2 Prescriptive Standards – Streetscape Open Space Systems 2.2.1 Boulevards Subject to MoTI and relevant municipal requirements and bylaws boulevards within public road rights-of-way having an urban cross-section:

• Street trees will only be required in urban streetscape and Streetscape Detail Areas. Mown turf grass surfaces are required in urban residential or low traffic commercial & industrial areas, but restricted mowing frequency (meadow) is preferred in rural areas

• In high traffic locations where hardscape accessible surfacing is required a variety of materials may be proposed. Final selection of material, colour, and finishes shall have consideration of site location and existing context (i.e. is there existing paving treatments to match) and must have approval of the Approving Officer. Material surfacing options include but are not limited to:

• concrete unit pavers;

• brushed or stamped decorative concrete;

• porous pavers or concrete; and

• natural stone paving.

Surfaces located between the back of curb or back of sidewalk and property line may be landscaped with drought tolerant shrubs and groundcovers.

In residential or low traffic commercial & industrial areas gravel mulch no more than 2.5 cm in diameter is permitted between a sidewalk and adjacent property line (except where municipal staff place gravel for drainage purposes). Finished elevations of gravel mulch to be 2.5 cm below the adjacent curb and sidewalk.

If planting is proposed biodegradable mulches permitted. Finished elevations of mulch to be 2.5 cm


below the adjacent curb and sidewalk.

Street trees may only be installed if permitted by the Approving Officer. Soil volumes to meet standards set out in the BC Landscape Standards.

Shrubs and plant materials must be drought tolerant and maintained to a height less than 0.5m above the boulevard level.

Noxious weeds or invasive plants are not permitted.

The landscaping treatment must not fill in or interfere with utilities, ditches, swales, gravel soaker strips, or drainage structures.

Permanent structures, such as retaining walls, fencing or private signs are prohibited in the boulevard.

All landscaping placed in the boulevard could be removed by the Municipality at any time and without notice, and will not be replaced, except with soil and grass.

The Municipality is not responsible for damages to boulevard landscaping due to road maintenance activities.

The adjacent property Owner is responsible for maintaining boulevard frontage to be tidy and safe.

2.2.2 Medians Medians within public road rights-of-way having an urban cross-section:

• Medians shall receive a 0.5m maintenance strip installed directly behind curb. Acceptable materials include concrete and concrete unit pavers.

• Landscaping shall be approved on a site specific basis but typically planting beds must be a minimum width of 1.5m. Use of structural soil or soil cells are encouraged to increase soil volumes.

• For landscaped medians a complete and working automatic irrigation system shall be provided.

• Where landscaping is proposed drought and salt tolerant plant species are to be used.

2.2.3 Roundabouts, Traffic Circles and Cul-De-Sac Islands The following guidelines are the minimum requirements for all Landscape Works and Services in roundabouts, traffic circles and cul-de-sac islands:

• Landscaping may only be proposed where the planted bed will be greater than 12.5 square meters in area and width is not less than 1.5m. Where roundabouts, traffic circles and Cul-de-sac islands do not meet these conditions a hard surface low maintenance material as approved by the Approving Officer shall be installed.

• The central area may, as lines of sight permit, feature a single specimen tree or a group of like trees with low groundcovers and/or shrub plantings. Alternatively, in Urban and Village Centers, the central area may feature public art in place of trees. The selection, design and placement of public art shall be made in cooperation with the respective municipal Public Arts Committee.

• For landscaped roundabouts, traffic circles and cul-de-sacs a complete and working automatic irrigation system shall be provided.

• Roundabouts, traffic circles and cul-de-sac islands shall receive a 0.5m (minimum) maintenance strip installed directly behind curb. Acceptable materials include concrete and


concrete unit pavers. • Where landscaping is proposed drought and salt tolerant plant species are to be used. • The minimum width of planter beds containing coniferous trees shall be 7.0m. • Lighting of trees or public art in a traffic circle shall be provided as required by the Approving

Officer. • All boulders, signs and other obstacles must be:

o At least 0.75m back from the curb; o A minimum of 4.5m from the bullnose or back of walk extended through the island,

whichever is greater, adjacent to the primary streets; o A minimum of 4.5m from 'any' bullnose adjacent to primary streets on irregular

shaped islands; and o A minimum of 3.0m from the bullnose inside the cul-de-sac.

Table 11. Streetscape Open Space Systems Prescriptive Requirements Summary

Component Urban Streetscapes Rural Streetscapes Streetscape Detail Areas

Street trees Both Boulevards and median where appropriate.

Site Specific. Both Boulevards and median where appropriate.

Street tree pit surface

Within hardscape pit shall be covered with metal grates, porous resin bonded aggregate, compacted aggregate or sand set pavers over structural soil.

0.6m dia. organic mulch ring.

Site specific.

Street tree growing medium volumes

Provide soil volumes as set in BC Landscape Standards. Soil cells and structural soil may be used.

Provide >/= 30 sqm of soil @ 0.9m depth.

Provide soil volumes as set in BC Landscape Standards. Soil cells and structural soil may be used.

Amenity Planting - boulevard

Irrigated turf (or approved lawn alternate), or low shrubs or perennials (less than 0.5m tall) with biodegradable mulch beds where bed is >1.5m wide.

Non-irrigated, hydroseed with interior grassland seed mix.

Irrigated turf (or approved lawn alternate), or low shrubs or perennials (less than 0.5m tall) with biodegradable mulch beds where bed is >1.5m wide.

Amenity Planting - median Planted beds where bed is >1.5m wide & irrigation is available.

NA Planted beds where bed is >1.5m wide & irrigation is available.


Component Urban Streetscapes Rural Streetscapes Streetscape Detail Areas

Amenity Planting – roundabouts, traffic islands & cul-de-sac islands

Hardscape if <12 sq.m in area or <1.5m in width. Xeriscape planted beds encouraged if size permits.

N/A

Hardscape if <12 sq.m in area or <1.5m in width. Xeriscape planted beds encouraged if size permits.

Street lights Yes – to urban standards.

Yes - to rural standards. Option for decorative poles and fixtures.

Side walk

Concrete, concrete unit pavers or approved equal. Typically located both sides of road.

One side gravel. If off road multipath is proposed this shall be asphalt or approved.

Site specific – high quality materials such as natural stone pavers maybe considered.

Boulevard & Median hard surface options

Concrete unit pavers, brushed or stamped decorative concrete, porous pavers or concrete, natural stone.

N/A Site specific.

Planted Infiltration Swales Where space and underlying soil conditions permit.

Typical, both sides. Where space and underlying soil conditions permit.


3 DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION, PERMITTING & APPROVALS PROCESS

3.1 General Procedures The Owner shall be responsible for all the legal surveys in connection with the subdivision and shall prepare all the documents necessary for the registration of the subdivision.

The Owner shall engage a Land Surveyor to carry out all the legal land surveys required for the registration and final posting of the subdivision. All legal drawings and calculations submitted by the Owner shall bear the signature of the Land Surveyor.

The Owner shall provide easements in accordance with the following:

• Utility easements that contain one main shall not be less than three meters wide and utility easements which contain two mains shall not be less than five meters wide.

• Such easements shall not be split on a property line. • Where Municipal services are installed in easements, each pipe run shall be accessible to

vehicles by an all-weather surface route. • If additional access routes are required, they shall be a minimum of three (3) meters wide,

described by a right-of-way plan and shall be registered against the title of the affected parcel or parcels.

The Owner shall provide sufficient legal land survey control during the construction of the subdivision to ensure the correct location of all works to be installed in the subdivision. Upon completion of the subdivision construction, the Owner shall cause his Land Surveyor to post each corner of each piece of property and easement contained within the subdivision and to install approved control monuments at the required locations. All new monuments shall be referenced sufficiently to the legal survey posts. Integration of the new monuments will be completed by others at the Approving Officer's request.

Owner shall retain a Consultant who shall be responsible for the design, preparation of drawings, layout, inspection and preparation of "As-Built" drawings for all services required to be installed by or on behalf of the Owner. Installations for power, telephone, gas and cable television will be designed and supervised by the appropriate authority having jurisdiction. The ultimate responsibility for compliance with all standards and specifications lies with the Consultant, and it is the Consultant's responsibility to coordinate all work involved. All contact with the Approving Officer and private utility companies regarding design and construction shall be made through the Consultant. The Owner shall not change Consultants during the course of the work without notifying the Approving Officer in advance.

The Consultant shall design and inspect the installation of services in accordance with these specifications and the rules of good engineering practice. Details of municipal practices and bench mark data may be obtained from the Municipality.

Where the Owner is acting as the Contractor, an independent Consultant may be retained by the Municipality to inspect the installation of services in accordance with these specifications and the rules of good engineering practice. The cost of the said independent engineering shall be paid to the Municipality by the Owner prior to the approval of the final subdivision plan. A one-time administrative charge will also be levied to the Owner to cover the costs of processing the independent Consultants invoices.


3.2 Environmental Assessment Land proposed as Public Land or to be maintained by the local Municipality shall, at the Approving Officers discretion be assessed by a Qualified Environmental Professional (QEP) to identify any Environmentally Sensitive Areas (ESA) within the site that should be preserved, enhanced or, if they will be unavoidably disturbed compensated for. The QEP must also consider potential offsite habitat linkages and corridors that can be integrated into the design process.

Should ESA’s be identified on the proposed project site the QEP will prepare a management and monitoring plan with bonding calculation (if required).

3.3 Erosion Control Land proposed as Public Land where there is evidence of active or historic erosion that may have maintenance or liability implications for the respective Municipality shall not be accepted by the Municipality as Public Land.

The Owner shall be responsible for undertaking erosion control and restoration works on proposed Public Land as necessary for the long-term prevention and control of erosion.

At the discretion of the Approving Officer, the Owner may be required to prepare and submit an erosion control plan covering some or all of the proposed Public Land.

The Owner is responsible for preventing and controlling erosion, and for restoring sites impacted by erosion, for the term of the Maintenance Period.

3.4 Fire Management At the discretion of the Approving Officer, the Owner may be required to prepare and submit a Fuel Management Plan covering some or all of the proposed Public Land.

The Fuel Management Plan shall be prepared by a Forester and shall follow industry standards such as the FireSmart Guidelines endorsed by the BC Ministry of Forests. The Fuel Management Plan shall include but is not limited to the following aspects:

• Map(s) showing existing and proposed vegetation, structures, trails, access points, and firebreaks on Public Lands and vegetated land adjacent to the site, including an assessment of the fuel hazard in these areas.

• Priority Zones, per the FireSmart Guidelines, around all existing or planned structures. Fuel modification prescriptions for these Zones shall be developed based upon proximity to structures and target stand conditions.

• Establishment of strategic firebreaks adjacent to structures and hazardous fuel types, which may also serve as recreational trails. Breaks shall be a minimum of 1.5m wide with a 100mm minimum gravel base.

• Deciduous trees shall be retained where possible. • Access points shall be provided between lots to provide access to Public Land containing

natural vegetation from the roadway as required for land maintenance and fire hazard management.

• Access points shall enable access for emergency and maintenance vehicles. Hydrants shall be located in the road dedication adjacent to the access point.

3.5 Permits Approval of design shall not relieve the Consultant, Owner or Contractor from obtaining such other


permits as may be required by other statute, regulation or By-Law. 3.6 Construction and Inspection The Consultant shall submit in writing to the Approving Officer a tentative time schedule for the development of the complete project showing the approximate time of commencement for each phase of the project.

Prior to commencing any work on a phase of the project development the Consultant shall submit a more detailed time schedule of the works to be constructed from land clearing to completion of surface improvements.

The Consultant shall provide a list of all the contractors and sub-contractors which will be used to construct the works and services. The list shall also include the names of key personnel and their regular and after hour’s telephone numbers.

A copy of all approved drawings and other documents shall be kept on the site at all times during active construction periods.

The Consultant shall carry out the layout, inspection and approval of material and the inspection of installation of all services that are to be provided by the Owner and must be available at all reasonable times to visit the site when construction is proceeding.

The Consultant shall notify the Approving Officer of shut-downs or start-up of work and shall provide a monthly status report by the 7th of each month outlining the work completed in the preceding month and any upcoming requirements for assistance from the Municipality.

The Approving Officer shall have access to the work at all reasonable times and may observe any part of the work or materials. Such observations shall in no way relieve the Owner from any obligation under this By-Law.

The Consultant shall submit his testing reports to the Approving Officer. The Approving Officer may from time to time order such additional tests as he may consider necessary. The costs of such testing shall be borne by the Owner.

Should the Approving Officer discover that any portion of the work and/or materials are not in accordance with these specifications, he may so advise the Consultant, who shall forthwith take remedial action. Should the Consultant not then be present at the work site, the Approving Officer may advise the Consultant in writing that the particular work and/or materials will not be accepted by the Municipality, with a copy of the notice to the Contractor . Upon receipt of such notice the Contractor shall forthwith cease the particular work, and shall not resume same until so ordered by the Consultant. Failure to provide such notice shall not constitute acceptance of such work and/or materials.

If, in the opinion of the Approving Officer the construction causes an imminent threat to public health, safety, or the environment, the Approving Officer has the right to require the contractor to stop work directly.

Underground services shall not be allowed to operate as part of the Municipal system until the installations have been inspected and tested by the Consultant and approved in writing by the Approving Officer.

Applicants and their contractors shall follow a ‘Good Neighbour’ policy:

“That contractors working on Municipal rights-of-way or on private lands where new rights-of-way are being created, be required to provide written notice to the residents in the immediate area of the works, describing what is being constructed, when the works will occur, who to contact for more information and what precautions should be taken if necessary; and that the worksite be posted for safety reasons.”


A copy of the written notice shall be submitted to the Approving Officer approval prior to distribution.

Where the Owner is to provide services in, on or to land in accordance with this standard, he shall, except to the extent the same is caused by the gross negligence of the Municipality or its servants or agents, save harmless and effectually indemnify the Municipality against:

• All actions and proceedings, costs, damages, expenses, claims and demands whatsoever and by whomsoever brought by reason of the construction and installation of all services herein described.

• All expenses and costs which may be incurred by reason of the execution of the said work resulting in damage to any property owned in whole or in part by the Municipality, or which the Municipality by duty or custom is obliged, directly or indirectly, in any way or to any degree, to construct, repair or maintain.

• All expenses and costs which may be incurred by reason of liens for non-payment of labour or materials, Workers' Compensation assessments, unemployment insurance, Federal or Provincial Tax, and for encroachments owing to mistakes in survey.

3.7 Responsibilities to the Public The Owner shall provide all such barricades, lighting and signs as are necessary to protect the public while the works are being installed. In order to maintain traffic movements with the least possible inconvenience, the Owner shall construct and maintain where necessary such detours and barriers as may be required to allow the public to pass safely around the works being installed.

The Owner shall obtain from the Municipality a road closure permit if two lanes of unimpeded traffic cannot be maintained at all times.

The Owner shall, at his own expense, provide for the protection and uninterrupted service of all water courses, sewers, water pipes, drains, conduits, gas pipes, conductors and other services encountered during the progress of the work. Pipes and structures shall be properly supported or shored to prevent settlement, and excavation in their vicinity shall be done with care. Water courses shall be protected in accordance with the Department of Fisheries and Oceans, BC Environmental Protection Act and Section 01561 Environmental Protection. The Owner shall at his own expense at once arrange for the repair through the appropriate authority and make good any injury which may occur to any of these services or to any sidewalk, structures or property, as a result of his work.

3.8 Drawing Requirements, Procedures, Permits and Inspections The typical process for a municipal park construction project is set out below. This may vary from project to project depending on location, scale and complexity. Additional permits and review processes with other agencies may be required dependent on environmental, geotechnical stability and archaeology sensitivities.

3.8.1 Concept Design • Project initiation and startup meeting with Municipal representative(s) to establish appropriate

design scope, including any required ESA assessment, permitting and monitoring requirements.

• Site survey and inventory of existing site features and characteristics. • Development of concept plan options. • Community and Stakeholder Consultation (if required). • Refinement of preferred concept plan and preparation of OPC and bonding calculation (if

required).


• Municipal review and, if required, bond security provided.

3.8.2 Detail Design • Design and contract documentation of project. • Design submittal and review meetings with Municipal representative at 50% and 95%

completion. • Submittal of refined OPC.

3.8.3 Tender Services • Issue of tender (typically by municipal purchasing office). • Tender’s Site meeting. • Tender Review and Issue of Award. • Contract signing and contractor bonding.

3.8.4 Construction Services • Start-up meeting. • Regular construction administration meetings, any required site monitoring and site

inspections. • Authorizing progress payments. • Commissioning of irrigation and any built facilities. • Substantial Completion Inspection. • Contractor addresses any deficiencies. • Substantial Completion Certificate issued. • Maintenance period • Total Performance inspection, partial release of bonding • Issuing of ‘As Built’ drawing sets within 30 days of Total Performance • End of Warranty Inspection, issuing final acceptance certificate, release of final bonding

amount and handover of project to Municipal staff.

3.9 Approval of Consultant’s Drawings The design criteria contained in the Design Standards and Master Municipal Specifications shall be considered minimum standards and shall not relieve Consultants of their professional responsibilities and from satisfying themselves as to the adequacy of their designs.

The Consultant shall submit to the Approving Officer for approval an overall development plan and a topographic plan in accordance with the requirements of the Supplemental Specifications.

The Consultant shall submit to the Municipality for approval detailed design drawings of the various works to be constructed together with:

• Such calculations of sewer, storm drain and water system capacity and pipe loading as may be required to support the design.

• A plan prepared by a Land Surveyor showing locations of sufficient survey markers to enable utilities to be installed accurately, together with proposed locations for control monuments.

• Supporting documents to show the required rights-of-way for the installation of services, and such other supporting documents as may be required.


• Mapping and proposed monitoring of any ESA’s within 30m of the proposed works.

The Municipality may waive any or all of these requirements under certain conditions.

One set of detailed design drawings bearing the approval of the Approving Authority will be returned to the Consultant. No work shall be undertaken on the site prior to receipt of these approved drawings. No major departure shall be made from the approved design without the written approval of the Approving Authority in the form of a letter or as a signature on revised drawings. Early consultation with the respective Municipal officers is encouraged. The Owner or Consultant may confirm the appropriate approval process for a specific project by calling the local Municipal office. The following review timeframes generally apply to the various submittals:

Table 12. Municipal Review Timeframes

Review Type: Requirements For Approval Time for review and Comments

Concept Plan Review. Full size PDF. 10 Working Days.

Landscape Concept Plan. 2 full size sets of drawings collated into sets and PDF set suitable for printing at full size and half scale (11x17).

Typically 10-15 working days dependent on Council and Committee schedules.

Utilities and Roadwork. 2 full scale sets of drawings collated into sets and PDF set suitable for printing at full size and half scale (11x17).

10 working days.

Landscape Construction (Grading, loaming, seeding,

Irrigation, planting, hard surface treatments, play structures, site structures, etc.).

2 full scale sets of drawings collated into sets and PDF set suitable for printing at full size and half scale (11x17).

10 working days.

Landscape Construction on roadways, public utility lots and easements.

2 full scale sets of drawings collated into sets and PDF set suitable for printing at full size and half scale (11x17)

10 Working Days.

3.10 Indemnity and Insurance and Guarantee The Owner shall at his sole expense throughout the course of the work carry comprehensive liability insurance in the amount of at least Three Million Dollars ($3,000,000) with insurance companies licensed to carry on business in the Province of British Columbia. In every such policy of insurance the Municipality shall be named as an additional insured with proceeds payable as the interests of the Municipality and Owner may appear. Prior to commencement of the work the Owner shall furnish the Municipality with a certified copy of every policy of insurance herein required.

Contractors and Consultants working on Municipal projects within the GVPRD shall provide the following evidence of insurance:


Table 13. Insurance Requirements summary

Supplier Type of Insurance Limit of Liability

Consultants Errors and Omissions Insurance (Professional Liability)

$1,000,000 per claim $2,000,000 aggregate

Consultants & Contractors

Comprehensive General Liability which includes:

Products/Completed Operations;

Blanket contractual;

Contractor 's Protective;

Personal Injury;

Contingent Employer's Liability;

Broad Form Property Damage

Bodily Injury & Property Damage

$3,000,000 event/aggregate

Consultants & Contractors Automobile Liability - Please submit APV47

Bodily Injury & Property Damage $2,000,000 inclusive

3.10.1 Additional Terms Any Deductible or Reimbursable Clause contained in the policy shall not apply to the Approving Authority and shall be the sole responsibility of the Supplier.

The Approving Authority is named as an Additional Insured (on CGL Insurance). 30 Days prior written notice of material change and/or cancellation will be given to the Municipality.

3.10.2 WorkSafe BC Any Supplier providing services to a Municipality within the GVPRD will strictly comply with all rules and regulations under the Worker's Compensation Act or any successor legislation and will provide a letter of good standing from WorkSafeBC prior to commencement of Work at the designated site(s).

The Supplier agrees that it is the "Prime Contractor” for the purposes of the Worker's Compensation Act and Regulations, unless otherwise advised and accepted in writing by an authorized officer, employee or agent of the Approving Authority.

3.10.3 Indemnification The Owner shall indemnify and save harmless the Municipality or Municipalities that has jurisdiction over the project against all expenses and costs which may be incurred by the Municipality as a result of faulty workmanship and defective material in any of the works installed by the Owner provided that such fault or defect is called to the attention of the Owner in writing within one year of the date of the Approving Officer's Certificate of Completion.

The Owner shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Indemnities from and against all claims, demands, actions, proceedings, and liabilities whatsoever and all costs and expenses incurred in connection therewith and resulting from the performance, purported performances, or non-performance of this Contract, excepting only where such claim, demand, action, proceeding or liability is based on the sole negligence of the Indemnities.


3.10.4 Business License All Consultants and Contractor’s working on a GVPRD park or open space project shall have a valid municipal business license or multi-region business license if required.

3.11 Maintenance & Warranty Periods Without limitation to any additional warranties provided by the Suppliers, the Owner warrants that:

• all goods shall be of merchantable quality and free from defects in workmanship and materials;

• all goods shall strictly conform to applicable samples, specifications and drawings; • all goods and services shall be fit for the purpose intended by the Municipality; • all goods shall be free and clear of all liens, charges and encumbrances; • the goods and services shall comply with the standards set forth by applicable federal,

provincial, municipal and industry regulatory agencies; • the shipping and handling of any hazardous material will be made in accordance with all

applicable laws and regulations; and • the goods and services shall comply with all applicable environmental protection laws and

regulations.

The maintenance period shall commence upon the date of the issuing of the Certificate of Substantial Performance, and shall terminate upon the date of issuing of the Certificate of Acceptance. The maintenance period shall be 12 months unless otherwise required by the Approving Authority.

The Owner shall maintain the works in good operating condition for a period of 12 months following the issuance of a "Certificate of Substantial Performance". Where deemed necessary the Approving Officer retains the right to extend the maintenance period From time to time during the maintenance period, the Approving Officer may give notice to the Consultant of any deficiencies and damage not resulting from normal wear and tear of the operation. The Owner shall forthwith correct the deficiencies and repair the damage. If the damage or deficiencies are not repaired or corrected forthwith upon written notice of the same the Approving Officer may carry out the repairs and corrections at the Owner's expense.

All landscaping work shall be maintained in good condition by the Owner until the guarantee has expired. During this time the Owner is responsible for all work and maintenance, repairs and plant replacements. Plantings that do not survive shall be replaced to the size and value as specified in the approved Landscape Plan.

The Approving Officer may, at his option, any time within the maintenance period, carry out such repairs and correct such deficiencies, without notice to the Owner if, in the opinion of the Approving Officer, the work must be done immediately because of a hazard of any kind to the public or to ensure the proper operation of the works considered defective or damaged. The Municipality shall invoice the Owner for such emergency works undertaken and the Owner shall pay the cost of the Municipality within thirty days of receipt of an account.

less than one month prior to the scheduled expiration of the maintenance period, the Consultant shall undertake a final inspection and provide a letter to the Municipality confirming that the construction meets Municipality standards and specifications, and that no deficiencies need rectified prior to release of the maintenance bonding. Should there be deficiencies, the Consultant shall state when they will be corrected and notify the Municipality upon their rectification.

In the event that all deficiencies and work are not complete one week before the expiration of the Maintenance period, the Letter of Credit will be drawn after notice has been given to the Owner or his agent, if other arrangements have not been made.


3.11.1 Certificate of Final Acceptance At the end of the maintenance period, provided that all the deficiencies have been corrected and all monies due to the Municipality have been paid, the Approving Officer may issue a "Certificate of Final Acceptance". Upon the issuance of such certificate the Municipality assumes all responsibility for the works and services.

3.11.2 Abbreviations References made to abbreviations and capitalized abbreviations for standard specifications for testing materials, manufacturing and installation procedures shall be as in MMCD Section 02000.

Table 14. Warranty and Maintenance Requirements

Project Component Warranty Period Maintenance Period

Buildings, structures and general furnishing and fixtures.

One year from Substantial Performance. Nil

Amenity Planting, Trees, Shrubs, groundcovers and turf including irrigation system.

One year from Substantial Performance.

One year from Substantial Performance.

Naturalised non-irrigated Planting.

3 years from Substantial Performance. 3 years from Substantial Performance.

Multi Phased Irrigation & Planting (if irrigation is an interconnected common system across phases).

1 year from Substantial Performance of final phase of work.

1 year from Substantial Performance of final phase of work.

3.12 Landscape Concept Plan Requirements 3.12.1 Theme and Function Each concept plan should reflect the type of Park and Open Space area and its associated theme/function. The following are a few examples:

• Neighbourhood Park: Child oriented, active recreation area with manicured turf and specimen trees.

• Trail: Pathway linkage within a natural area with new and enhanced native habitat plantings.

The Consultant shall consider, at minimum, the following criteria:

• The functional relationship of the landscape design to existing and proposed land uses, utilities, flood patterns, drainage facilities, roads, driveways and pedestrian facilities.

• Accessibility as it relates to pedestrians, cyclists and people with limited physical or visual abilities.

• Horticultural use of plant material, including plant suitability, survival rate, growth habit, size, disease resistance and water demand.

• Appearance of the proposed plant material and site landscape, including habitat value appropriateness, aesthetics, visual screening and site lines.

• Protection of existing trees and their soil resource.


• Protection of the existing natural environment and restoration or enhancement of natural habitat.

• Site drainage, water levels, ponding and overland flow. • Minimization of the opportunity for crime and undesirable behaviour. • Weed control. • Erosion control. • Fire hazard reduction. • Designing to suit anticipated level of future maintenance • The estimated costs and efficiency of maintenance practices that will be required for the Public

Land. • Priorities any development on already of disturbed areas. • Group planting into ‘hydrozones’ of high, medium and low water-use plants or non-

irrigated/unwatered areas. • Minimize mown turf areas that are high water use areas – ideally to 50% of the landscape

area or less – substitute with areas of lower water use treatments like unwatered native woods or meadow, mulch, spaced wood deck, pervious paving.

3.12.2 Minimum Consultant Qualifications Required Professional Qualifications for preparation of a Landscape Concept Plan are:

• Over $10,000 in construction value: Registered Landscape Architect (BCSLA), • Under $10,000 in construction value: Certified Horticultural Technician (BCLNA) or Registered

Landscape Architect (BCSLA) • QEP for Environmental assessment and monitoring (if required).

3.13 Landscape Bonding Requirements For all parks and open space projects a detailed opinion of cost of both soft and hard landscaping costs for construction, inspections, monitoring and maintenance during the maintenance period shall be provided by the Consultant. The following instructions and template (Tables 13) sets out this process in detail.

Where an Owner is developing a park or open space that will be vested or maintained by the local Municipality as part of an overall Development or Environmental Permit the application must be accompanied by a security bond in favour of the Approving Authority. This bond shall to the value of 125% of the opinion of cost for construction, inspections, monitoring and maintenance as per submitted Cost Estimate Templates. Upon Municipal approval of the completed landscape works, the securities will be released less 10%. The 10% shall secure the guarantee of all materials and the planting performance for the warranty and maintenance period.

At the time of applying for a Development Permit applicants must submit the Landscape Concept Plan and the following completed pages from this template:

1. Project and Applicant Identification and Landscape Plan Checklist

2. Opinion of Cost for Construction & Maintenance for Bonding

The Templates must be completed and signed by a qualified professional:

• Over $10,000 in construction value: Registered Landscape Architect (BCSLA),

• Under $10,000 in construction value: Certified Horticultural Technician (BCLNA) or Registered Landscape Architect


3.13.1 Project and Applicant Identification Applicants shall provide a project name that clearly distinguishes the project from others in the Municipality. Municipal staff may assign an application number in addition to this project name.

Applicants may be the Property owner or an agent appointed by the Property owner with authority to commit the Owner to meet the requirements of the bylaw. Applicants shall provide their contact information and be available to liaise with the Municipality throughout the design and landscape construction period.

3.13.2 Landscape Plan Checklist Applicants shall submit the completed templates in Table 15 and Table 16 and confirm that the project will conform to the requirements as set out in the 2013 Greater Vernon Parks & Recreation Standards for Landscape Construction.

Applicants should attach notes on a separate page to explain unchecked clauses, if any. The Municipality may require additional information or refuse permit approval based on its review of the application checklist completion and comments.

3.13.3 Opinion of Cost Construction & Maintenance for Bonding Applicants may choose from one of two methods: the Spreadsheet Method or the Manual Method.

• Spreadsheet Method: A Landscape Calculation Spreadsheet will be made available from Municipal staff to allow the applicant to enter project information which will enable the spreadsheet to calculate the total estimated construction cost and required bonding and estimated maintenance costs.

• Manual Method: Applicants may manually fill in and calculate the estimated costs.

In both cases the applicant needs to identify areas and quantities the areas of various landscape treatments and the cumulative total landscape area of the project.

To provide a standardized, consistent basis for estimates the typical unit costs based on recent contracts within the Okanagan Region have been provided. These will be revised annually. These unit costs are provided only for purposes of determining bonding and security value for the Municipality, and are not warranted for any other purpose, including estimating the likely construction cost of any given project or component.


Table 15. Applicant Identification and Checklist

Project Name _____________________________________________________________

Ref. Number: _____________________________________________________________

Applicant: ________________________________________________________________

Date ____________________________________________________________________

1. Applicant Identification

Owner (print):

Subject Address:

Agent if applicable (print): Telephone No. Fax No.

Title Email Address Company Mailing Address City Province Postal Code

2. Concept Landscape Plan Checklist (all boxes to be checked - see instructions)

� Show north point, graphic scale bar and date. � Name of project, municipal address and Consultant contact details. � Proposed contour lines at minimum 1.0m intervals. � Property lines, front, rear and side yards and any relevant environmental or other setback lines. � The locations of any watercourses, including the high water mark or top of bank, and riparian zone. � Group planting into ‘hydrozones’ of high, medium and low water-use plants or non-irrigated areas. � Minimize mown turf areas that are high water use areas – ideally to 50% of the landscape area or less – substitute

with areas of lower water use treatments like unwatered native woods or meadow, mulch, spaced wood deck, pervious paving.

� Identify any existing features or vegetation to be retained. � Locate any onsite utilities, water, or sewer mains. � The locations of any existing easements or rights-of-way. � Locate, identify proposed major functions / spaces / constructed features. � Identify composition of all hard surfaces. � Storm water management landscape features. � Heights of any walls, screens and retaining walls etc. � Show the relationship of the site to its surrounding land uses. � Include annotations or a key identifying the following plant types:

Deciduous trees, Coniferous trees, Shrubs and perennials, Groundcovers, Lawn & Naturalised areas. � Confirm water availability for intended area of irrigation.

Owner Signature: Date:

Agent Signature: Date:


Table 16. Opinion of Cost for Construction & Maintenance for Bonding

Project Name _____________________________________________________________

Ref. Number: _____________________________________________________________

Applicant: ________________________________________________________________

Date ____________________________________________________________________

ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT PRICE TOTAL

1.0 Hardsurfaces

1.1 100mm depth, compacted gravel fines trails and plaza areas sq. m $20.00

1.2 100mm depth concrete sidewalk and plaza as per specifications sq. m $75.00

1.3 Unit paving w/ granular base and bedding sand sq. m $110.00

1.4 50mm depth asphalt surface w/ granular base sq. m $25.00

2.0 Structures & Misc.

2.1 Black chainlink perimeter fence L. m $147.00

2.2 Timber Riser w/handrails (staircase) each $200.00

2.3 Drystack 2ft tall rock walls L. m $250.00

2.4 Park Bench each $2,000.00

2.5 Trash Receptacle each $1,500.00

2.6 Bollard each $1,000.00

4.0 Planting

4.1 Shrubs, grasses & perennials - irrigated w/450mm topsoil & 100mm depth mulch sq. m

$65.00

4.2 Dryland grass mixs - native topsoil hydroseeded as per spec sq. m $7.50

4.3 Dryland grass mix -irrigated w/200mm topsoil hyrdoseeded as per spec sq. m $30.00

4.4 Irrigated turf from sod w/ 200mm topsoil sq. m $40.00

4.5 Deciduous Trees - 60cm CAL w/ stakes, topsoil, root barrier & mulch each $500.00

4.6 Conifers - 2.0m tall w/ stakes, topsoil, root barrier & mulch each $450.00

5.0 Maintenance Period (1 year)

5.1 Irrigated Turf Lawn - mowing, weed control, fertilising sq. m $0.45

5.2 Planted Beds - weed control, fertilising sq. m $1.25

5.2 Dryland - weed control, fertilising sq. m $1.25

TOTAL

125% BONDING TOTAL


3.13.4 Landscape Concept Plan Requirements The Consultant shall include, at minimum, the following:

• Colored concept plan to on 24x36 (Arch D) format at an appropriate scale (1:100 to 1:200 typically)

• Show north point, graphic scale bar and date • Name of project, municipal address and Consultant contact details • Proposed contour lines at minimum 1.0m intervals • Property lines, front, rear and side yards and any relevant environmental or other setback lines • The locations of any watercourses, including the high water mark or top of bank, and riparian

zone. • Identify any existing features or vegetation to be retained • Locate any onsite utilities, water, or sewer mains • The locations of any existing easements or rights-of-way. • Locate, identify proposed major functions / spaces / constructed features • Identify composition of all hard surfaces • Storm water management landscape features • Heights of any walls, screens and retaining walls etc. • Show the relationship of the site to its surrounding land uses • Include annotations or a key identifying the following main plant types:

o Deciduous trees, o Coniferous trees, o Shrubs, perennials & groundcovers, o Lawn o Naturalised areas

• Confirm water availability for intended area of irrigation.

Complete the OPC Opinion of Cost Schedule and, if the project is part of a DP or EP application, provide a 125% performance bond.

3.14 Construction Plan Requirements 3.14.1 General Requirements The Consultant shall include, at minimum, the following:

• All drawings shall be completed using CAD software, the preferred format is the current release of AutoCAD used by the Approving Officer’s Engineering Department.

• The title and revision block shall be located in the lower right corner of the drawing and shall contain a space where the Municipality reference number may be entered.

• North arrow & metric scale bar. • Project name and Consultants contact details • Legal description and zoning of site and property lines. If the site has a municipal address,

include it on the plan. • Land uses of surrounding parcels (residential, commercial, industrial etc.) • Utility locations and legal easements, right-of-way etc. • Show front, side and rear yard or environmental setback lines


• Curb lines, sidewalk, utility poles, fences and any other boundary condition • Elevations shall be relative to geodetic datum. Bench mark locations and elevations may be

obtained from the Municipality. A minimum of 2 monuments shall be shown on each set of drawings.

• All drawings shall be in metric measurement; all dimensions shall be shown to the nearest 10 mm. All elevations shall be shown to the nearest 10 mm except critical sewer elevations which shall be shown to the nearest 5 mm.

• Drawings shall bear the seal of a required qualified Professional licensed to practice in British Columbia.

The Consultant shall submit such plans as may be required by Provincial and Federal Agencies having jurisdiction over the subject improvements. Copies of required approvals and/or permits and a print of each approved drawing shall be submitted to the Municipality. Copies of drawings prepared by private utility companies and associate Consultants shall be reviewed and certified by the Consultant as having been coordinated with all other works and services to be constructed.

3.14.2 Cover Sheet • Location Plan showing the location of the project relative to the surrounding district; it shall

show a north arrow and major road names • Project Name, Location legal description and zoning. Municipal address (if available) • Client or Municipal project number reference • Consultant team company contact details • Sheet index

3.14.3 Demolition & Removals Plan (If Required) • Labeled as “Demolition & Removals Plan” • Identify existing above and below grade features to be protected and/or to be removed. • Identify existing vegetation to be removed or retained including tree protection measures. • Locate any existing irrigation components to be retained (e.g. point of connection etc.). • Note any site furnishings or elements to be removed and delivered to appropriate municipal

yards.

3.14.4 Layout & Grading Plan • Labeled as “Layout & Grading Plan”. Note layout and grading may be separated onto different

plans for legibility reasons on a complex project. • Existing features to be retained shown in grey line colour. • Location of proposed structures and features. • Layout of playground as per CSA guidelines. • Location of Dog Bylaw signs, restoration/ reclamation signs, pathway signs, and trail signs. • Major items associated with layout but not including dimensions, i.e. walkways, play fields,

roads, curbs, other structures, and natural areas. • Existing and proposed contours at ½ meter contour intervals (existing shown as solid,

proposed as dashed) • Location of retaining walls and slopes that exceed 3:1 vertical. • All grades must be Geodetic measure and tied to the nearest A.S.C.M benchmark; A.S.C.M.

benchmark number to be indicated on plan.


• Additional benchmark features to be identified on the plan to assist with contractor layout. • Elevations to be shown at each break point (top and toe of slope). • Label property lines and show existing spot elevations at corners. • Catch basin rim and invert elevations where required. • Manhole rim elevations. • Locations of all proposed utility kiosks and junction boxes. • Erosion, siltation and Stormwater control plans (can be on separate plan for improved

legibility). • Top and bottom of wall, curbs and other structures, finish floor elevations as required. • Surrounding grade information affecting site development. • Label all concrete gutters. • Label and callouts with detail references (as required). • Legend with all symbols for site elements, hatches and symbols. Include specifications and

suppliers for all furniture and furnishings not covered in typical details or supplementary specifications.

• Show the post-development ground elevation at each corner of the lots and at any breakpoints, the elevations of centre-line or roadways, and the locations of storm drain inlets.

• For any buildings on site show the minimum base of footing elevation, and the minimum underside of floor joist elevation of the building to be constructed thereon and, where necessary, details of the grading around it to direct surface water away from the building and any other necessary grading or drainage features. Where such building is adjacent to or liable to be affected by a major flow flood path, the highest elevation of the major hydraulic grade line opposite such building shall be shown.

• Where any design ground elevations are below top of curb, the plan shall show the method of disposition of surface water.

3.14.5 Planting Plan • Labeled as “Planting Plan” • Major items associated with “Layout” and existing feature to be retained to be shown in grey

line colour but not including dimensions, i.e. walkways, roads, curbs, hard surface areas, fountains other structures, existing vegetation and natural areas

• Plant material shown with crowns at 2/3 mature size to be consistent with the current British Columbia Landscape Standard or The Manual of Woody Landscape Plants, M. A Dirr, 1998. Callouts for each plant or cluster of plant with code referencing back to schedule and quantity.

• Outline of Planting Beds. • Proposed contours at ½ meter intervals. • Utility easements and ROW. • Plant list identifying species (botanical and common name), quantities, sizes, spacing and

specific materials as required. • Root barrier. • Extent of structural soil or soil cells (if utilised).


3.14.6 Irrigation Plan • Labeled as “Irrigation Plan” • Major items associated with “Layout” but not including dimensions, i.e. walkways, structures,

fences, playfields, roads, curbs, and natural areas. • Screened back major items of “Planting” and “Grading” plans • Proposed ½ meter contour interval. • Schematic layout showing locations of all lines, pipes sprinkler heads, valves, drains, sleeves,

electrical drop-offs, electrical controllers, point of connection, meter (if required), backflow prevention device, pressure regulators, filters, winterization facilities and other elements critical to construction and maintenance of the irrigation system.

• Use standardised symbols to depict irrigation elements, list and describe these in an irrigation schedule or legend along with cross referenced irrigation details where appropriate.

• Design the irrigation system so that sprinkler heads do not spray into playgrounds. • Set back park water services a minimum of 2.5 meters from pathways, hard surfaces and

trees, and set back lateral irrigation lines a maximum of 0.5 meters from property lines. • Schedule of materials/products describing sizes, manufactures and model numbers, pipe

fitting method, performance standards and sources of said materials/products. Approval of the list of materials/products is required prior to the placing of formal orders for them.

• Utility and Pipeline Locates. • Location of all proposed trees, shrubs, ground cover and lawn areas (may be light tone). • Indication of which areas will be automatic vs. manual watering systems. • Planting hydrozones – areas of similar water requirement e.g. high, medium, low. • Notes to indicate the operating pressure of design precipitation rate of each circuit. • Notes to indicate recommended time clock settings for each circuit – with separate settings for

spring, summer, and fall.

3.14.7 Minimum Consultant Qualifications Required Professional Qualifications for preparation of an Irrigation Plan are:

• Over $10,000 in construction value: Registered Landscape Architect (BCSLA), or certified Irrigation Designer (IIABC)

3.14.8 Typical Details Where a GVPR or MMCD standard detail exists it shall be sufficient to refer to the appropriate plan by reference number and date of issue. Where a standard detail does not exist, or is unsuitable for a particular case, detail drawings shall be prepared to conform generally to these specifications and so as to portray accurately the variance elements of the installation.

3.14.9 As Built Plans Prior to issuance of certificate completion the Contractor shall provide two (2) bound full size copies of as built layout plans for all hardscape and built elements including utilities and irrigation. Collated PDF and complete CAD files in AutoCAD and GIS (in format of the Approving Authorities choice) also to be provided on CD for Municipal records.

The As-Built drawings shall be certified by the Consultant to be a true record of the installation and shall be sealed by the Consultant.


3.14.10 Other Plans Dependent on the project requirements additional plans may include:

• Topographic and Existing Structures showing the locations of all buildings and structures to be retained, all natural boundaries such as steep banks, watercourses and areas of unstable soil on and adjacent to the subdivision. Where the slope of the existing ground is in excess of fifteen (15) percent contour lines at two (2) meters or less spacing shall be shown, with major contours (every 10 meters) in bold.

• Catchment Area and Storm Water Control Plan showing the whole of the drainage catchment area to the point of discharge to a trunk storm sewer or natural watercourse. The plan shall show the design runoff coefficient, area and flow. Required upgrades to downstream drainage structures shall be shown as far as the receiving trunk storm sewer or watercourse. This plan shall show the location of the major storm-flow route(s).

• Roadworks and Waterworks Plans and Profiles • Sanitary and Storm Sewer Plans and Profiles • Electrical Plans

3.14.11 Private Utility Plans & Profiles BC Hydro, Telus and/or Shaw, and Fortis plans shall be prepared by the each utility company.

These plans area to be completed and sealed by a Professional Engineer utilizing the local Municipal Development Standards

3.15 Standards for AutoCAD Drawings Drawings should normally be prepared on standard sheet with 841 mm x 594 mm outside dimensions. The Municipality's standard legend shall be utilized and is available upon request.

All drawings to be provide to the Approving Authority in the AutoCad format of their choice.

The Consultant shall submit additional design drawings in AutoCad and/or GIS format as requested by the Approving Officer where other specialized engineered structures are required

3.16 Utility and Pipeline Location Contact Numbers • BC1 "CALL BEFORE YOU DIG" Contact Numbers Tel: 1-800-474-6886 *6886 (Telus & Rogers Cell Networks) • Regional District of North Okanagan: Facilities/Operations Department Tel: (250) 550 3700 • City of Vernon Utility Operations Tel: 250-54-WORKS (549-6757) • District of Coldstream Operational Services Phone: (250) 550-1505


3.17 Inspections The following checklists set out on the following page lists the inspection requirements for each of the following phases of work:

• Inspection 1 – Construction Start Up (Table 17) • Inspection 2 – Subgrade (Table 18) • Inspection 3 – Final Grade (Table 19) • Inspection 4 – Irrigation (Table 20) • Inspection 5 – Grass, Tree and Shrub Planting (Table 21) • Inspection 5 – Substantial Performance (Table 22) • Inspection 5 – Total Performance (Table 23) • Inspection 6 – Final Acceptance (Table 24)

3.18 Example Plan Sets The following figures are provided as reference examples only:

Example Concept Plan For Permitting (Figure 1)

Example Construction Drawing Set - Title Sheet (Figure 2)

Example Construction Drawing Set – Demo Plan (Figure 3)

Construction Drawing Set - Layout and Grading (Figure 4)

Construction Drawing Set - Irrigation Plan (Figure 5)

Construction Drawing Set - Planting Plan (Figure 6)

Construction Drawing Set - Detail Sheet (Figure 7)

Example as Built Irrigation Plan (Figure 8)


Table 17. INSPECTION CHECKLIST 1: CONSTRUCTION START UP

Project Name: _________________________________________________________________

Notes:

• Issued for construction drawings must be provided to the Approving Office prior to the start-up meeting.

• Minutes to be recorded and circulated by Contract Administrator (CA) within 24hrs of the start-up meeting

• This checklist is to be completed by the CA and filed as part of the project record

Item Action Check When Completed

Provide Project Contact List including but not limited to: PC/CA

Role Company Name Phone Email

Prime Contractor (PC)

Sub Contactor(s)

Construction Administrator (CA)

Site Inspector

Client Representative /Approving Officer (AO)

Confirm project communication including any public communication strategy, forms for requests for information, change orders and site instructions

PC/CA

Project schedule including regular meetings and reporting requirements PC/CA

Review site safety & traffic management procedures PC

Demolitions & removals including any salvage & protection requirements CA Confirm utility locates – BC One Call PC

Review erosion, storm water and sediment control measures PC

Review any other required environmental monitoring and hazard mitigation PC

Contract Administrator

____________________________________________ _____

Name

__________________________________________________

Date

__________________________________________________

Signature


Table 18. INSPECTION CHECKLIST 2: SUBGRADE

Project Name: _________________________________________________________________

Notes:

• This checklist is to be completed and signed by the Prime Contractor (PC) and forwarded to the CA before the inspection. CA and Owners Agent to review and initial each item on site.

• This checklist is to be completed by the CA and filed as part of the project record.

Item Check when completed

PC CA Verify design grades have been achieved with smooth transitions between existing and proposed surfaces within elevation tolerances and min/ max slopes as per BC Landscape Standards unless otherwise directed by Landscape Architect or Engineer.

Finished subgrades or transitions of subgrade surfaces free of, rocks, roots, foreign materials and other debris over 4cm in diameter

Sufficient depths provided for minimum growing medium depths and mulch as per specifications

Any areas showing excessive compaction scarified to a min depth of 15cm and compacted to specified proctor density unless otherwise directed by Geotechnical Engineer.

Subgrades shall be such that pooling or ponding of water does not occur

Subgrade compaction in 15cm lifts with each layer compacted to specified Procter Density. Inspect areas to receive growing medium to be checked for over compaction or glazing that may impede drainage

Layout pathways, trees, furniture, sports fields, playgrounds etc.

Prime Contractor

__________________________________________________

Name

__________________________________________________

Date

__________________________________________________

Signature

Contract Administrator

__________________________________________________

Name

__________________________________________________

Date

__________________________________________________

Signature

Owners Agent

__________________________________________________ Name __________________________________________________ Date __________________________________________________ Signature __________________________________________________

Name


Table 19. INSPECTION CHECKLIST 3: FINAL GRADE

Project Name: _________________________________________________________________

Notes:




PC CA Depths of growing medium as per specifications and allow for specified mulch depths

Finished grades confirm to finished grade elevations and contours shown on the approved layout and grading plan(s)

Rough spots and low areas eliminated and positive drainage away from all buildings and structures and hardscape areas.

Finished surface smooth and uniform, firm against deep foot printing and free of any debris that would be detrimental to healthy plant growth.

Finished grades correct in relation to existing buildings, utility boxes and other structures

No over compaction of growing medium or topsoil

Tree & Shrub pits

Approved soil test

Asphalt /Concrete compaction/density reports (where required)

Prime Contractor _________________________________________________ Name __________________________________________________ Date __________________________________________________ Signature

Contract Administrator __________________________________________________ Name __________________________________________________ Date __________________________________________________ Signature Owners Agent __________________________________________________ Name __________________________________________________ Date __________________________________________________ Signature


Table 20. INSPECTION CHECKLIST 4: IRRIGATION

Project Name: _________________________________________________________________

Notes:

• Irrigation inspection will require multiple inspection visits as pipes are trenched in and backfilled. Inspection must be completed with Municipal Irrigation Dept. representative present.



Item Note date when completed

PC CA Water utility account set-up

Water meter

Backflow prevention device

P.O.C. per approved plans & specs

System per approved plans & specs

Sprinkler coverage & adjustment

Pipe burial depth & bedding

Wire/conduit burial depth & bedding

Sleeve markers

Protruding heads/sprinklers

Evidence of trenching/settling

Confirm communication with central controller (when applicable)

Cycle through irrigation program

Prime Contractor _______________________________________________ Name _______________________________________________ Date _______________________________________________ Signature _______________________________________________ Municipal Irrigation Dept. Representative _______________________________________________ Name _______________________________________________ Date _______________________________________________ Signature

Contract Administrator __________________________________________________ Name __________________________________________________ Date __________________________________________________ Signature __________________________________________________ Owners Agent __________________________________________________ Name __________________________________________________ Date __________________________________________________ Signature


Table 21. INSPECTION CHECKLIST 5: GRASS, TREE & SHRUB PLANTING

Project Name: _________________________________________________________________

Notes:




PC CA Species, sizes, numbers and placement of plants as per approved plan

Plants free of damage, disease or defects and set plum and straight and orientated to show foliage to best advantage

Rootballs set at the correct level relative to finished grade. Root flare for woody plants to be 2.5-5cm above finished grade with mulch tapered to leave a minimum 10cm clear zone around rootball.

Wire baskets cut minimum 4in below finished grade and any visible portion folded down and buried. All string, rope and burlap removed and disposed of.

Shallow watering dish is formed around each plant and plant is watered as per specifications

Trees are correctly staked where specified

Pruning is completed where required to specifications

Planted areas are free of visible weeds invasive and noxious plant species and substantially free of underground weed parts.

Soil amendment and mulch is of the type specified and placed correctly

Growing medium is cultivated to a loose friable water-permeable surface

Prime Contractor _______________________________________________ Name _______________________________________________ Date _______________________________________________ Signature _______________________________________________

Contract Administrator _________________________________________________ Name _________________________________________________ Date _________________________________________________ Signature _________________________________________________ Owners Agent _________________________________________________ Name _________________________________________________ Date _________________________________________________ Signature


Table 22. INSPECTION CHECKLIST: SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE

Project Name: _________________________________________________________________

Notes:




PC CA Unit paving set at correct elevations with no exposed edges greater than 6mm

All mulch and growing medium set at minimum 2.5cm below adjacent hard surfaces

No visible weeds, construction debris or rubbish

Correct number and all plants healthy with root balls set at correct heights

Irrigation system operating as per specification or where temporary or no irrigation installed, plants receiving sufficient water.

All furnishings, signage, fences and furniture installed as per specifications


Any offsite areas, structures, planting or related irrigation systems disturbed during construction have been made good

Lawn areas established with no bare or dead spots

All furnishings, signage, fences and furniture installed as per specifications

Noted Deficiencies:

Prime Contractor __________________________________________________ Name __________________________________________________ Date __________________________________________________ Signature


Substantial Performance Achieved

(CA to circle and initial) Y N


Table 23. INSPECTION CHECKLIST: TOTAL PERFORMANCE

Project Name: _________________________________________________________________

Notes:




PC CA

All deficiencies noted at substantial performance has been corrected

Unit paving set at correct elevations with no exposed edges

All mulch and growing medium set at minimum 2.5cm below adjacent hard surfaces

No visible weeds

Correct number and all plants healthy with root balls set at correct heights

Irrigation system operating as per specification or where temporary or no irrigation installed plants


Any offsite areas disturbed during construction have been made good

Lawn areas established with no bare or dead spots

All deficiencies noted at substantial performance has been corrected

Noted Deficiencies:

Prime Contractor __________________________________________________ Name __________________________________________________ Date __________________________________________________ Signature


Total Performance Achieved



Table 24. INSPECTION CHECKLIST: FINAL ACCEPTANCE

Notes:


• This checklist is to be completed by the CA and filed as part of the project record. • Final acceptance inspection occurs at completion of warranty and maintenance period.

Project Name: Developer:

Address: Municipal Ref Number

Consultant/CA: Ph. E.

Prime Contractor (PC): Ph. E.

F.A.C Application Received Yes No Date

WORK INSPECTED PC INSPECTOR

Deficiency Notes

A. SURFACE CONDITION:

Settlement

Ponding drainage

Repair Needed

B. TURF:

Turf quality acceptable

Bare spots requiring topdressing and over seeding

Weed problems

Others

C. TREES:

Any required tree replacements

Pruning required

Strapping, stakes and guys removed

Burlap removed/wire baskets cut and buried

Tree well cultivated/mulched

Rootballs at correct height and trunk flare exposed

Others

D. SHRUBS:

Any required shrub replacement

Pruning required

Bed cultivated

Weed free bed

Mulch at correct depths

Others

pg. 1 of 2


E. FENCING:

G. PATHWAYS:

H. AMENITIES:

Benches

Trash Receptacles

Signage

Others

I. GENERAL COMMENTS

J. IRRIGATION SYSTEM:

Maintenance manuals received

System operation as per spec

Others

K: MAINTENANCE LOG SUBMITTED

L. AS BUILT DRAWINGS RECEIVED (PDF & CAD)

Note: Contract Documents and the Standard Specifications override the Inspection Checklist and Report.

Municipal Inspector

Notes:

Consultant

Prime Contractor

Inspection Date

Final Acceptance Recommended


pg. 2 of 2


Figure 1. Example Concept Plan For Permitting


Figure 2. Example Construction Drawing Set - Title Sheet


Figure 3. Example Construction Drawing Set - Demo Plan


Figure 4. Example Construction Drawing Set - Layout and Grading


Figure 5. Example Construction Drawing Set - Irrigation Plan


Figure 6. Example Construction Drawing Set - Planting Plan


Figure 7. Example Construction Drawing Set - Detail Sheet


Figure 8. Example As Built Irrigation Plan


4 LANDSCAPE DESIGN STANDARDS 4.1 Performance Standards – Landscape Design

Intended for large, complex, unusual and innovative developments, Performance Standards set out general guidelines that designs must meet, but allow qualified professionals to determine the methods to meet the guidelines, subject to the written approval of the Approving Officer. The prescriptive standards described in the following section should be a starting point for the development of any performance standards.

Performance Standards for Landscape Design are:

• Proposed designs must be ‘equivalent’ in performance to the prescriptive requirements. • When alternates to standard tree planting details are proposed, the drawings shall include

project-specific tree planting details showing, by plan and cross section: • Typical view of surrounding pavements, curbs, above and below ground utilities, light

standards, and adjacent buildings and structures. • Typical details of proposed rooting environment including tree pit dimensions, subgrade

scarification, drainage structure if required, topsoil mix layers or ‘horizons’, root deflecting structure location and type if required, location and type of irrigation device and pipe, and soil surface treatment such as tree grate, porous pavement or other; and

• Typical above ground details such as staking, special appurtenances, pruning for headroom etc.

4.1.1 Related Standards • MMCD Gold • BC Landscape Standard, Current Edition • Irrigation Association - Turf and Landscape Best management Practices

4.1.2 Minimum Qualifications Required Professional Qualifications for applicants using the Performance Standards approach for Landscape Design:

Registered Landscape Architect (BCSLA)

• Qualified Environmental Professional (QEP) where the project includes or intersects an Environmentally Sensitive Area (ESA).

4.2 Prescriptive Standards – Landscape Design Intended for small or simple developments, Prescriptive Standards set out both specific rules and design details that if used with good professional practice are pre-approved by the Approving Officer. Prescriptive Standards for Landscape Development are as follows:

4.2.1 Subgrade and Topsoil Design Guidelines Provide a minimum 2% gradient across all reserve parcels, medians, traffic islands, boulevards, public utility lots/ROW’s.


Excessive fill that compromises the site design will not be acceptable. Geotechnical testing may be required where questionable subgrade exist.

4.2.2 Drainage Guidelines Where possible drainage is to be picked up within the reserve parcels, public utility lots/ROW’s and storm-water dry ponds in grass or vegetated swales.

Grass or vegetated swales are to drain at a minimum 2% gradient.

Grass swales exceeding sixty (60) meter runs are to have a minimum gradient of 4.0%. If the swale is to drain at less than 4.0%, it shall have weeping tile along the entire length of the swale tied into a catch basin or water drainage along a concrete swale or an approved equal.

The Approving Authority reserves the right to limit the amount of offsite drainage onto a reserve parcel and public utility lot/ROW when, in their opinion, such drainage will compromise the integrity of the site.

All trapped lows must be approved by the Approving Authority prior to construction. Trapped lows must not compromise the use of the site and must be an integral part of the design.

4.2.3 Topsoil and Growing Medium Depths Topsoil and growing medium specification and depths to follow BC Landscape Standards based on proposed application.

4.2.4 Minimum Setbacks for Trees Setbacks for trees to objects shall be as follows. Alternate setbacks maybe used with written approval of the Approving Officer. If other deciduous trees and coniferous trees are less than 3.5m from vertical elements and hard surfaces or private property lines the trees must be placed in mulched beds.

Table 25. Tree Setbacks

Setback Trees From: Distance

Underground street light conduit or irrigation main 0.6m

Other underground utilities 1.2m

Lamp standards 6.0m

Steel and wooden utility poles 3.0m

Driveways 1.5m

Catch basins 1.5m

Manholes, valve boxes, services 1.2m

Sewer service boxes 1.5m

Fire hydrants 2.0m

Road intersection 7.0m

Curb face 1.0m

Sidewalk 0.85m

Buildings - fastigiate (columnar) tree 2.0m

Buildings - regular crown tree 3.0-5.0m

Sports fields 4m buffer + ½ maximum spread (min)

Shale areas on Ball fields & Tennis Courts 15.0m

Tree Spacing ½ maximum spread (min)


4.2.5 Minimum Landscape Area Dimensions and Maximum Grades The minimum width for grass boulevard shall be 1m, 1.5m or greater preferable. Maximum slope for lawns to be 3:1.

The minimum width for shrub or ground cover beds shall be 0.6 meters, 1.0m or greater preferred. Maximum slope for shrub or ground cover beds to be 2:1.

The minimum width of boulevards for tree planting shall be 2.0 m measured from face of curb.

Root barrier must be installed where tree trunk is located within 3.0m of a hard surface as per details L-24 to 27.

4.2.6 Play Structure Plantings Shrub beds should be set back from areas designed for play structures 3.5m from the outside edge of the play area; or the width of a local pathway where the pathway abuts a play area.

Type and spacing of plantings shall ensure clear sight-lines into the play structure area.

4.2.7 Planting Details and Procedures Landscape Drawings shall specify the appropriate planting detail standard from the Greater Vernon Parks & Recreation Development Guidelines and Standard Specifications - Landscape Construction 2013 (GVPR Specifications). All planting shall meet the GVPR Specifications.

4.2.8 Shrubs and Groundcovers Plantings to be approved on a site by site basis.

Shrubs or groundcovers proposed in boulevards, medians or traffic islands are approved on a site by site basis but must satisfy the following conditions:

• are utilitarian; • do not cause excess maintenance requirements; • do not restrict the visibility between pedestrians and vehicles; • are not in conflict with utilities; and • are of a suitable species and growth habit.

4.2.9 Utility Easements & Right-Of-Ways No shrub planting permitted unless otherwise approved by the Approving Authority.

4.2.10 Mulch Unless an alternate is approved by the Approving Authority an organic mulch is to be installed as per current BC Landscape Standards.

A sample is to be submitted for approval prior to installation.

Application: 75mm deep. Keep material 50mm away from trunks and stems to prevent rotting of bark.

Note: Woven fabric weed barrier is not permitted unless approved in writing by the Approving Officer.

4.2.11 Planting Timing and Establishment Watering Provisions


Planting in the hot dry summer period of June, July and August is discouraged, due to the risk of failure of the planting caused by heat and drought.

Watering provisions are required for establishment of all street tree planting. A preferred solution is for automatic irrigation systems to be provided to the boulevard area as an extension of privately held irrigation systems on the adjacent lot. The sidewalk and driveway design and installation shall provide irrigation sleeves at the lot centerline and across the driveway as necessary to accommodate the irrigation extension from the adjacent lot.

If arrangements are not made with adjacent lot holders (builders or residents) to provide the extension of on-lot irrigation system to the boulevard, then a deep root watering system on public property shall be provided that meets the requirements of Section 5 Irrigation. Water supply and irrigation controller shall be provided in central location(s) in the site, with valves and distribution piping designed in accordance with Section 5.

Irrigation sleeves shall be provided under all driveways or other paved areas to provide pipe access to all landscape areas in the right of way.

For planting in normal planting seasons, install a deep root bubbler system at each tree in accordance with Standard Drawing SS-I-15 or 16. If summer planting is necessary, the irrigation timer should be adjusted to ensure adequate soil moisture during establishment and re-adjusted in the fall to prevent over watering.

Non-irrigated naturalised planting and seeding operations should be completed in the spring before May 15th or between September 30th and November 15th to optimise survival rates.

4.2.12 Vandalism and Theft Prevention All light fixtures and electrical boxes shall have vandal proof access points to prevent damage and wire theft. Openings may be wielded where maintenance or code requirements permit.

Finishing’s and furniture shall be securely fastened to the ground with vandal resistant bolts or spot wielded to prevent easy removal.

All irrigation boxes to be lockable.

4.2.13 Maintenance/Pruning/Clean-Up Maintain all plant material from the time of planting until the date of issue of Final Acceptance Certificate at the end of the warranty period.

Maintenance shall include all measures necessary to establish and maintain all plants in a vigorous and healthy growing condition, as specified in Landscape Maintenance, page 169.

At the time of acceptance, all material must be in a healthy, vigorous growing condition. Unmulched beds and tree pits must be freshly cultivated and free of weeds, rubbish, and debris.

Mulched beds should be free of weeds, rubbish and debris.

Remove all dead branches. If there is a double leader, shorten one by about ½, back to a live branch that points away from the trees that is about 1/3 the diameter of the leader cut. Prune broken portions of branches back to live lateral. Retain the rest of the spec.

Ensure that all damage to surrounding work is repaired before leaving site.

Each day ensure that all debris is cleaned up and disposed off site and that the project site is left in a tidy, organized condition.


4.2.14 Pruning Acceptable reasons for tree pruning:

• Overhead utility clearance • Public Safety • Tree health • Tree structure

Prohibited reasons for tree pruning

• Mitigation of minor nuisances such as fruit, seeds, fluff, pollen, • Sticky bud caps, leaves, minor pest infestation, etc. • Mitigation of landscape damage • Creation of views and clearance of advertising signs.

Tree pruning is to be in accordance with the best practices as published by the International Society of Arboriculture.

Branch removal should be limited to necessary clearance pruning for public and electrical safety, the removal of dead, diseased and defective wood to improve tree health and/or structure.

Trees are to be pruned and maintained in accordance with Illuminating Engineering Society of North America standards for Roadway Lighting.

Public trees interfering with overhead power lines will be pruned or removed as appropriate.

4.3 Pathways and Trails The objective of the Pathway and Trails Design standards is to establish a hierarchy of path and trail types and a consistent standard for design and construction.

This standard interprets Pathways to include urban, typically hard surfaced multi-paths, and paths within and around parks. Sidewalk specifications are covered in MMCD documentation and local Municipal Engineering Standards.

This standard interprets Trails to be paths located within natural or rural areas with typically a loose or granular material surface.

Table 26 (below) sets out a summary of the seven classifications of Pathways and Trails. Additional design and construction guidelines follow.

4.3.1 Pathways Design Standards Located primarily in urban setting the Pathway standards seek to produce a safe and enjoyable pathway incorporating the needs of multiple users (i.e. walkers, children’s strollers, runners/joggers, people with disabilities, cyclists, in-line skaters and skateboarders), and therefore, stringent attention must be given to design details. Where location and design considerations prevent transportation and recreation functions from being accommodated together, the recreation function should be given a higher priority.

Regional System The regional pathway system is a community-wide linear network that facilitates non-motorized movements for recreation and transportation purposes. The regional pathway is hard-surfaced, typically asphalt and located off-street. It is a multi-use facility and no one user or type of user is to be given preference.

It should be designed as a continuous facility that connects individual communities to:


• City-wide Parks and recreation facilities; • Natural features, including water courses, escarpments, ravines, river valley parks and

associated open space; • Schools, commercial districts, employment centres, adjacent communities and key cultural

attractions; • Local pathways, bikeways and trail systems; and • Public transit interchanges and routes.

Local System A local pathway is a pathway that provides secondary routes within communities, linking residential areas to facilities such as neighbourhood parks, schools and other local community designations. Local pathways may also serve as links to the regional pathway system.

4.3.2 Alignments • Pathways, where desirable, should be routed along the edges of environmentally significant

areas or into locations with less sensitivity in natural environment parks in order to minimize the impact on the park and reduce future damage and desire lines.

• Avoid routing pathways along boulevards in front of residential properties. • Avoid routing pathways along boulevards where spacing of driveways and cross-streets is

less than 200m. • Provide either an asphalt multi-use pathway or parallel asphalt bicycle pathway and concrete

sidewalk.

4.3.3 Pathway Easements Where an easement has been required for a pathway, ensure it is of an adequate width to facilitate the design and safe function of the pathway.

4.3.4 Street Crossings • Route pathways to street intersections where possible. • Mid-block crossings are discouraged and permitted on local streets only. If mid-block

crossings occur appropriate signage is to be installed by the Municipality. • Line up pathway entrances to ensure visual continuity.

4.3.5 Play Equipment Sites • Regional pathways should not be within a minimum of 5.0m from play area surfaces. • Provide a minimum 2.0m wide asphalt link from the play equipment site to a local or regional

pathway.

4.3.6 Parking Lots • Route pathways around; avoid through. • Provide asphalt links from parking lots to pathways. • Locate pathway entrance at street.

Table 26. Pathway & Trail Classes C

lass

Reg

iona

l Sys

tem

Loc

al S

yste

m Name Location

AD

A

Design Features

Det

ail R

ef:

Users

Wid

th &

Hei

ght

Cle

aran

ces

(m)

Sur

face

Cro

ss S

lope

Lon

g S

lope

Wal

ker

Run

ner

Dog

wal

ker

Equ

estri

an

Mob

ility

scoo

ter o

r w

heel

chai

r

Ska

tebo

arde

r or

rolle

rbla

der

Mtn

. Bik

er

Em

erge

ncy

vehi

cles

Pathways Major Use Minor use

A ✔ Major Multi-use path

Town centers, key urban road & waterfront corridors

3.5 - 4.5 wide &

3 high

Concrete / Asphalt

w/200x300mm

conc. flush curbs

0-3% (5%

as req. 8%

max)

8% max with 12%

in short sections L-41

B ✔ ✔ Minor Multi-use Pathway

Road corridors 2.4 - 2.5 wide &

3.0 high

Concrete / Gravel

/Asphalt 2-4%

8% max with 12%


C ✔ Local Pathway

Parks and open space

2.4 - 2.5 wide &

3.0 high Concrete / Gravel 2-4%

8% max with 12%


Trails

D ✔ Multiuse Trail Major rural road or riparian corridors to regional destinations

2.0 - 3.0 wide &

2.5 – 3.0 high Soil / gravel 2-4%

0 -15%(short

segments steeper) L-44

✔ ✔

Hiking & Equestrian Trail

Natural area parks and open space, rural road corridors

1.2-1.8 wide (3.0

double track),

2.5 – 3.0 high

Soil / gravel 2% 0 -12% prefer 5%

max L-45

F ✔ ✔ Accessible Trail

Natural area parks and open space

1.5- 2.4 wide &

2.5 – 3.0 high

Soil / gravel / eng.

wood fibre or chips 2-4%

0-5% (8% for max

15 m L-46

G ✔ ✔ Hiking Trail (Mod. to High Challenge)


0.5 -1.2 wide 2.4

high Native soil / stairs 2-4%

0 -15% (short

segments steeper) L-47

H ✔ Hiking & Single Track Mtn. Bike Trail


0.5-1.2 2.4 Soil / gravel 2-5% varies

on curves 0-12% L-48

This page is intentionally blank to allow for double sided printing.


4.3.7 Surface Materials Regional pathways are hard-surfaced typically of asphalt pavement to accommodate multiple users.

Local pathways and pathways oriented to pedestrian traffic can be made up of a variety of materials depending on use and context. Materials may include:

• Broom finished concrete. • Asphalt (concrete flush curbs required on regional pathways) • Concrete unit pavers.

Alternate innovative products may be used with written approval of the Approving Officer where they will have benefits relating to:

• sustainable storm water management, • avoiding excessive disturbance of soil around existing trees, • minimize potential contamination of streams and watercourses, or • reduced embodied energy and related greenhouse gas emissions.

4.3.8 Width Recommended width ranges are set out in table 30. Some variation to these are permissible to respond to existing site features with written authorization of the Approving Officer.

4.3.9 Safety Clearance and Setback Requirements • Provide 1.0m clear of all obstacles on both sides.

• Provide 2.4m (2.1m min) clear of all obstacles overhead.

• Avoid locating pathways over manholes and other utility boxes.

• Ensure a 2.5m minimum clearance from park water services.

• Set back pathways a minimum of 1.0m from face of curb.

4.3.10 Pathway Safety Rail Safety rails shall be installed when a pathway is within two (2) meters of the top of a 2:1 slope or steeper, and the slope is greater than or equal to one (1) meter in depth.

Under exceptional circumstances and subject to approval by the GVPRD after an appropriate risk assessment, a safety railing may not be required. If a risk assessment is required it shall be provided by the GVPRD at no cost to the Developer.

Minimum railing height and design to be as per Detail Sheet #35, 36, 37, or 38 or to be an equivalent as approved by the Approving Officer.

In areas of high visibility such as along road frontage or waterfront promenades Details #36 or 38 are preferred.

Chain-link fence is only acceptable when the fabric is attached to, but not protruding above, the top rail.

Wooden fences are not generally desired though use of new wood preservation technologies such as Thermally Modified Wood can be considered on a project by project basis.

68 Section I - Design Standards

4.3.11 Pathway Junctions Where possible, ensure pathways join at right angles.

Provide widening of pathways with radius of 4.0m where pathways join other pathways.

4.3.12 Pathway Entrances/Wheel Chair Ramps Extend pathway to street curb in all cases.

Ensure pathway joins street at right angles.

Provide a standard steel bollard (Detail Sheet #40) where the entrance to a pathway is on a street. If access for maintenance and emergency vehicles is required install removable bollards (Detail Sheet #39)

Provide a concrete wheelchair ramp (as per MMCD specifications), as required, where the entrance to a pathway is on a street and there is an existing concrete sidewalk.

Provide an asphalt wheelchair ramp complete with depressed concrete curb as required, where the entrance to a pathway is on a street and there is no existing concrete sidewalk.

Line up entrances for visual continuity where pathway route crosses street.

Ensure no catch basins are located at the entrance.

4.3.12.1 Urban Braille

The use of urban braille principles are encouraged throughout the high traffic urban pathway network and in special public spaces or character areas. The following are the minimum recommended features based on the City of Hamilton Urban Braille System.

• Establish a minimum 1.5m clear zone free of all obstructions such as signage, light poles, furniture or planning. The distance between the shoreline and building faces may vary.

• Install a ‘shoreline’ on each side of the clear zone to visually defining each edge. This is a surface material treatment that contrasts in colour and texture with the clear zone surface paving. Typically these are 6-9” wide dark coloured unit pavers or stamped coloured concrete.

• Install tactile warning strips at all pedestrian crossing points. Typically this is a high contrast yellow ADA tile with raised tactile bumps approved that are cast in place immediately behind the roadway curb. When crossing a larger radius curved curb a continuous radius warning strip is recommended.

• Install street name sidewalk plates located at all corners to indicate intersecting streets; • for each location indicate name of street perpendicular to path of travel, lettering oriented

to be read while facing intersecting street. • Approximate size 0.61m (2') wide (grey colour), with a 0.25m (9") textured band (white

concrete) on two sides. 0.20m (8") high letters recessed and highlighted with black; font style to be Arial or approved equivalent.

• Score lines to lead from name plates to ramp; refer to MMCD specifications for wheelchair ramps.

4.3.12.2 Sight-lines

Where possible, ensure no obstructions to visibility within 5.0m of junction with other pathways


and streets (trees, shrubs, utility boxes, fences, etc.).


4.3.12.3 Criteria for Bicycles

Maximum grades:

• over 8%: re-route or provide stairs. • 5% to 8%: not longer than 50m (keep bicycles and pedestrians separate and avoid curves

and constrictions). • 3% to 5%: not longer than 200m under 3%: acceptable.

Design Speed - flat terrain: do not exceed 35km/hr; downgrades: do not exceed 50km/hr.

Super-elevation - on curves: 2%; maximum 5%.

Stopping Sight Distances - stopping sight distance is described below:

• Minimum SSD = v2/[255 (f+g)] + 0.695v • Where: SSD = stopping sight distance • v = bicycle design speed (typically 30km/hr) • f = coefficient of friction = 0.25 • g = grade m/m (rise or descent/run)

The following table may also be used to obtain appropriate stopping sight distances.

NOTE: A stopping sight distance of 35.0m is considered a standard guideline:

Table 27. Sightline requirements for bicycles

Gradient

Level Ascending Descending

0% 2.5% 5% 2.5% 5%

Stopping Sight Distance 35m 33.5m 32.5m 36.5m 38m

Minimum Design Curve Radii - the minimum design curve radii is as follows: • Minimum r = v2/[127 (e+f)] • Where: r = minimum radius • f = coefficient of friction = 0.25 • e = super elevation • v = bicycle design speed (typically 30km/hr)

The following Table may also be used to obtain the appropriate minimum radius for asphalt pathways with 2% banking.

NOTE: A minimum design curve radii of 5.0m is considered a standard guideline:

Table 28. Radius requirements for bicycles

Speed 10km/hr 15 km/hr 20 km/hr

Radius 2m 5m 9.5m

4.3.12.4 Stairs

Where possible, avoid use within a pathway network.

Install bicycle ramp along one side where stairs are unavoidable.


4.3.12.5 Pedestrian Bridges and Overpasses

Railing height as per building code.

Minimum deck width 3.0m (between railings).

Submit concept drawings to The Municipality; ensure all drawings are stamped by a professional Engineer.

4.3.12.6 Pedestrian Underpasses

Minimum height 3.0m and minimum width 3.0m.

Ensure drainage is kept in concrete swale along one side.

Ensure well lighted.

4.3.12.7 Signage

Provide standard identification signs with pathway name at pathway entrances.

Provide standard hazard warning signs (see Traffic Operations Sign Manual) where appropriate.

Provide centre line pavement marking on regional pathways and on separated bicycle pathways (75mm wide, yellow paint).

Provide double centre line pavement marking at hazardous locations (50+ 50mm wide, yellow paint).

4.3.13 Trails Design Guidelines The objective of these design guidelines is to produce safe and enjoyable trails incorporating the needs of pedestrians, cyclists and the disabled where possible, while respecting the surrounding environment.

4.3.13.1 Alignments

Use trails to give low impact and low cost pedestrian access to parks, natural areas, riverbanks, and sensitive or steep areas where pathways are not appropriate.

Use trails as a secondary system to pathways.

Ensure trail alignments correspond to Natural Areas Management Policy, Area Structure Plans, Outline Plans and other Council-approved policy documents.

Locate crossings of major roads at overpasses or signalized intersections.

An environmental assessment by a QEP is required where trails intersect with or pass within 30m of an identified ESA.

4.3.13.2 Natural Areas

Align trails around significant areas and sites; never through.

Avoid damage to natural features, vegetation and wildlife habitat.

Increase back sloping gradient to 2:1 to minimize fill coverage.


4.3.13.3 Surface Materials

Native soil for informal trails.

Wooden chips, engineered wood fibre or crushed gravel (crusher fines) for formal, designed trails.

A soil stabilisation product may be used to reduce maintenance in erosion prone sections. See materials section of standards document.

4.3.13.4 Width

0.3m to 0.5m for informal trails.

0.5m to 1.5m for formal designed trails.

4.3.13.5 Slope Grades

Less than 3% is required if to be wheelchair accessible.

Less than 5% is ideal.

5% to 10% is acceptable.

More than 10%: provide switchbacks or stairs.

4.3.13.6 Safety Clearance

Provide minimum 0.75m clear of all obstacles on both sides (i.e. trees, signs, light poles etc.).

Provide minimum 2.1m, maximum 2.4m clear of all obstacles overhead (i.e. tree branches, bridges, etc.).

4.3.13.7 Pathway Handrail

Minimum railing height and design to be as per Detail Sheet #35 or 38 or to be an equivalent as approved by The Approving Authority.

Usually of galvanized steel or wood.

Install where a trail is within 1m of the top of a 2:1 slope or steeper, and the slope is greater than or equal to 1m in depth.

Under exceptional circumstances and subject to approval by Parks after an appropriate risk assessment, a pathway handrail may not be required. If a risk assessment is required it shall be provided by The City at no cost to the Developer.

Note: Chain link fence is less desirable and is only acceptable when the fabric is attached to but not protruding above, the top rail.

4.3.13.8 Stairs

Avoid if the trail is to be accessible to skiers and wheelchairs.

1m to 2m wide; of wood or rock; handrails as required for safety.


4.3.13.9 Amenities

In general, provide one trail entrance every 150m or as needed.

One park bench every 250m; one picnic table every 500m.

Environmentally sensitive areas should be assessed on a site by site basis.

4.3.13.10 Bridges

Railing height as per building code.

Minimum deck width: 1.5m between railings.

Material examples: log stringers, laminated wooden beams, prefabricated steel and pre-cast concrete.

Submit concept drawings to Approving Authority; ensure all drawings are stamped by a Professional Engineer.

4.3.13.11 Pedestrian Underpasses

Minimum height 3.0m and minimum width 3.0m.

Ensure drainage is kept in a swale along one side.

Ensure the underpass is adequately lighted.

4.3.13.12 Accessible Use

Primarily includes people in wheelchairs or without sight.

The needs of these users are more stringent than for other walkers. Project requirements to be confirmed on a site by site basis.

4.3.13.13 Signage

Provide standard signs with trail name at trail entrances and important junctions to ensure continuity and legibility of trail routes where appropriate.

Provide standard hazard warning signs where appropriate.

4.3.14 Recommended References • “Trail Design Guidelines for Portland’s Park System May, 2009 • “Whistler Trail Standards” Resort Municipality of Whistler, • "Trail Design, Construction and Maintenance Manual,” Ontario • "Trail Building & Maintenance,” Appalachian Mountain Club. • "Disabled Access Design Guidelines,” The City of Calgary, 1988. • "Trail Manual" Parks Canada, 1978.

4.4 Handrails and Fences GVPRD Specifications for handrails, furniture and fences shall apply to all street developments, park sites and other public lands within the GVPRD boundary.

https://www.google.ca/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=1&cad=rja&ved=0CDAQFjAA&url=http%3A%2F%2Fatfiles.org%2Ffiles%2Fpdf%2FPortlandTrailDesign.pdf&ei=5ZhMUYr3AYix0QGMu4GIBw&usg=AFQjCNGQcSAqVbORpwP5LmuQuq6lEIAv6w&sig2=kAFXcraqEL7cYClbkiwl_w&bvm=bv.44158598,d.dmQ

https://www.google.ca/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=1&cad=rja&ved=0CDMQFjAA&url=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.mbta.ca%2Fassets%2Fpdfs%2Ftrail_standards_first_edition.pdf&ei=DJlMUbfgL-m10AH3ioGgDQ&usg=AFQjCNGZfTjsYS_PiXVBX3T1JKIeqan3Pg&sig2=RZy--R_BI-lBt3KPHWF6_g&bvm=bv.44158598,d.dmQ


The standard is separated into sections for each of performance standards and prescriptive standards. Table 29 indicates when each method is permitted.

Table 29. Handrail and Fence Design Method

Prescriptive Performance

Basic Safety Handrail Required Optional

Appearance Safety Handrail Not Permitted (1) Required

Basic Fence Required Optional

Appearance Fence Not Permitted (1) Required

Note: The GVPR may introduce, in a future edition, a prescriptive design standard as an option.

Intended for large, complex, unusual and innovative developments, Performance Standards set out general guidelines that designs must meet, but allow qualified professionals to determine the methods to meet the guidelines, subject to the written approval of the Municipal Approving Authority. The prescriptive standards described in the following section should be a starting point for the development of any performance standards.

4.4.1 General Performance Standards for Handrails and Wood Fences Handrails, fences and the like shall be installed plum and with the top level. Where slope is to be taken up, preference shall be given for either leveling the grade at the base of the fixture, or stepping the top of handrails or fences.

In urban settings a concrete pad or other method to reduce landscape trimming requirements shall be installed at all fixtures that are adjacent to fine or rough grass areas, to avoid an overgrown appearance.

If pre-manufactured products are used, they shall be selected from the GVPR Specifications approved product list, or shall be approved by the Approving Authority as an addition to that list. Preference shall be given to products that incorporate local, reused or recycled materials.

Metals shall be selected for corrosion and vandalism resistance. In general, aluminum with a powder coat textured finish is the preferred material for appearance items. Hot dipped galvanized is the preferred treatment for non-appearance items. Use of unfinished metals or metals subject to corrosion is not acceptable (exception being use of metals intended to develop a patina of corrosion as a decorative feature).

Wood elements shall be above both grade and the ‘splash zone’ for resistance to rot. Below grade, preference will be given for use of concrete, with suitable galvanized metal brackets to provide stability. Preference in wood elements shall be given to local (BC) materials and those that can be readily replaced or repaired if vandalized.

Plastics shall be resistant to breakage, scratching and UV degradation. Layered plastics shall be designed to avoid condensation issues.

Vertical concrete faces larger than 3 sq.m that are exposed to public view shall be provided with an appearance finish: one of sandblast, bush hammer, exposed aggregate, stone, brick or other masonry veneer, to the satisfaction of the Approving Officer.

All finishes shall be designed for attractive colour, texture and low maintenance. All finishes shall be capable of having ‘tag’ paint removed, and shall be scratch resistant. Colours shall be black or earth tones in general. Use of primary colours as an accent is subject to the approval of the


Approving Officer.

The Approving Officer may require the following:

• anti-skate devices, • mid-bench handrails, • bench backs, and • provision of repair parts for non-local items.

4.4.2 Performance Standards for Handrails In addition to the general performance standards handrail away from buildings are sometimes installed when not warranted. Installation of handrail shall be limited to that considered absolutely necessary by the design professional, in accordance with the BC Building Code. In general, use of handrail away from buildings shall be questioned by the Approving Officer if it is proposed in areas where:

• Vertical drops are less than 600mm; • Structures are not in close proximity to sidewalks or other pedestrian areas, such that they

are reached only by maintenance personnel. • Design alternatives exist to reduce the vertical drop to less than 600mm, or to otherwise

introduce terracing or other barriers such as culvert inlet and outlet safety grills that will provide public safety without the installation of a vertical handrail.

Handrail may be one of two types:

• Basic Safety Handrail, that is designed primarily for function and low maintenance; • Appearance Safety Handrail, which is designed to add aesthetic and character appeal to

its safety function, but also with low maintenance.

When a handrail is warranted on public property, Appearance Safety Handrail design standards are required under the following circumstances:

• When handrail is necessary within the foreground (e.g. within 5m) of the view from a public road, trail or sidewalk.

• In other highly visible locations as determined by the Approving Officer.

Appearance Safety Handrail shall be custom designed to meet the following guidelines:

• Materials shall be highly durable, e.g. metals and composites, with preference for aluminum.

• Finish shall be to a high standard of colour and texture, e.g. powder coated textured finish. • Design shall be customized in plan and elevation to fit the site and context, regarding

height, number of bars, graphic elements, post spacing, stepping of the top rail, etc. • Designs which graphically or creatively reflect the natural or cultural environment of the

GVPRD are encouraged.

When handrail is warranted on public property other than the circumstances identified above, Basic Safety Handrail shall be used, unless the use of Appearance Grade Handrail is proposed by the Applicant and approved by the Approving Officer.


4.4.3 Performance Standards for Fences, In addition to the general performance standards fences may be one of two types:

• Basic Fence, that is designed primarily for function and low maintenance; • Appearance Fence, which is designed to add aesthetic and character appeal to its

function, but also with low maintenance.

When a fence is warranted on public property, Appearance Fence design standards are required under the following circumstances:

• When fence is necessary within the foreground (e.g. within 5m) of the view from a public road, trail or sidewalk.

• In other highly visible locations as determined by the Approving Officer.

Appearance Fence shall be custom designed to meet the following guidelines:

• Above-grade materials shall be wood, brick or stone masonry or veneer of like materials.

• Use of ‘replica’ materials like fencecrete shall be subject to approval of the Approving Officer.

• Foundation materials shall be concrete, with suitable structural connections to the posts or fence materials.

• Finish shall be to a high standard of colour and texture, e.g. stained wood or natural masonry.

• Design shall be customized in plan and elevation to fit the site and context, regarding height, material and shadow patterns, post spacing, stepping of the top rail, etc.

• Designs which graphically or creatively reflect the natural or cultural environment GVPRD are encouraged.

When a fence is warranted on public property other than the circumstances identified above, the Basic Fence shall be used, unless the use of Appearance Fence is proposed by the Applicant and approved by the Approving Officer. The Basic Fence may also be used at public parks where play structures or playing fields require separation from adjacent roadways.

4.4.4 Minimum Professional Qualifications Required Professional Qualifications for applicants using the Performance Standards approach for Signage, Handrail, Fences:

• Landscape Architect (BCSLA) • or Architect (RAIBC)

4.4.5 Prescriptive Standards for Handrails and Wood Fences Intended for small or simple developments, Prescriptive Standards set out both specific rules and design details that if used with good professional practice are pre-approved by the Approving Officer.

Basic Safety Handrail shall be galvanized pipe rail in accordance with Detail L-35. Basic Fence shall be chain link fence in accordance with MMCD 2000 Drawing C13.


4.4.6 Minimum Professional Qualifications Required Professional Qualifications for applicants using the Prescriptive Standards approach for Signage, Handrail, Furniture, and Fences.

• Registered Landscape Architect (BCSLA) • or Architect (MRAIC) • or Professional Engineer (P.Eng.) • or Graphic or Industrial Designer with Professional Draftsperson

4.5 SIGNAGE STANDARDS The signage standards are based on the 2009 GVPRC Parklands Signage Plan and covers the following types of signage:

• Primary Name signs - that will assist the user in way finding and provide park identification.

• Informational Naming signs - that can be used to provide the user with the park name and relevant information about the facilities or attractions of the park

• Directional and Regulatory signs – that can be positioned throughout the parks to provide local directional information to advise of safety, park regulations plus services and facilities in and around the parklands.

• Interpretive signs – that can be used to provide information about the history or ecology of a park or trail, particularly when the area contains significant natural features and / or a unique historical background.

4.5.1 Performance Standards for Signage Intended for large, complex, unusual and innovative developments, Performance Standards set out general guidelines that designs must meet, but allow qualified professionals to determine the methods to meet the guidelines, subject to the written approval of the Approving Officer. The prescriptive standards described in the following section should be a starting point for the development of any performance standards.

Performance Standards for Signage are:

4.5.1.1 Locations and Placement

The system of parklands signs will need to fulfill a range of functions in order to effectively assist people in finding and using parklands:

4.5.1.2 Design

The design of the different signage types require that a range of design criteria be considered. These criteria are important in ensuring the consistency and the development of an effective suite of signs that are suitable for the range of landscape environments throughout the parks and trails.

The designs must be:

• Simple and attractive • Suitable scale for the landscape • Coloured to be clearly legible while being in harmony with the landscape setting • Robust and low in maintenance • Appropriate for the range of landscape environments


Consideration must be given to the appropriate use of a signage system and to identifying the possible opportunities for unique signs possibly designed by artist/designers.

4.5.1.3 Construction

All of the signs are at risk from vandalism and graffiti as well as the usual weathering effects experienced by all outdoor signage; therefore, the designs must consider the use of robust materials for support structures and sign surfaces.

The construction should be:

• Robust enough to withstand a reasonable level of abuse as can be expected in an unsupervised public space.

• Safe from sharp or dangerous edges and protuberances. • Permanently fixed in its location and theft proof. • Weather resistant. • Modular in design for ease of maintenance.

4.5.1.4 Lifecycle Cost

The designs must consider the lifecycle cost of the sign design and construction to ensure that low cost options are not proposed that will eventually result in unrealistic costs in later maintenance.

Lifecycle cost issues to be considered include:

• Viable unit cost while utilizing good design and robust materials • Life expectancy of 7-10 years • Low maintenance costs • The paint or surface treatment should be hardy and long lasting • The surface treatment should be able to be retouched in the event of damage or graffiti

4.5.1.5 Placement

In identifying a suitable location for each sign there are a range of criteria that must be considered to ensure that the sign is located in a logical position for the user as well as ensuring that there is minimal impact on the environment. Identifying the most appropriate signage locations should also assist in minimizing the number of signs required in any one park.

Placement strategies should consider:

Visibility: • The signs should be sited according to their role within the hierarchy of signs and in

locations that ensure maximum exposure to the park user

Road Users:

• Naming signs should be located in a clearly visible location on approach roads and main arrival points.

• The signage text be of sufficient size to be clearly visible from a passing vehicle.

Pedestrians and Cyclists:

• Naming signs are located at suitable pedestrian arrival points. • Naming signs are sited close to footpaths and the pedestrian path network.


Cultural and environmental context: It is important that signs are designed with sensitivity to the different environments that they will be placed in:

• To be sensitive to relevant cultural and historic landscape considerations. • To be sensitive to relevant environmental considerations.

Accessibility: Signs should meet the needs of a wide range of park users addressing issues such as:

• being readable by people with disabilities, • and being understandable by people from non-English speaking backgrounds through the

use of clear concise text and, where possible, international symbols.

The signs should be sited close to pathways where closer inspection of interpretative material is required, and hard surfaces should be considered to surround any sign that has information on both sides. Consideration should be given to ensure persons with disabilities are able to access the signs which, in some cases, may include some paving to improve access.

Orientation: The signs need to be located with care to ensure their maximum impact without dominating the landscape.

Depressions that would result in deep shadows or aspects that would result in strong back lighting from late afternoon sun should be avoided since they might hinder the legibility of the sign.

Public Risk: The signs should be designed and positioned to ensure they do not present a safety hazard by providing a hiding place. Locations should, wherever possible, allow all round visibility and clear sightlines for an approaching pedestrian. Where signs are of a scale that might potentially provide a hiding place there should wherever possible be clearance above the ground to the signage panel to ensure the sign cannot hide an individual.

Climate: The signs should be located in positions that will not be adversely effected by extreme climatic conditions. Signs should be displayed at a northerly aspect, when possible, in order to help decrease UV damage.

Maintenance: The signs should be sited with consideration of ongoing maintenance requirements such as the following:

• Position signs for easy access by maintenance personnel

• Avoid locations and forms that will encourage litter build up

• Ensure appropriate drainage and run off are considered during installation

• Design should utilize standard components

• Design should allow for easy removal and replacement of main signage panels for changes, repainting, or revisions.


4.5.1.6 Minimum Qualifications

Required Professional Qualifications for applicants using the Performance Standards approach for Landscape Design:

Registered Landscape Architect (BCSLA)

• or Architect (MRAIC) • or Graphic or Industrial Designer with Professional Draftsperson

4.5.2 Prescriptive Standards for Signage Prescriptive Standards set out both specific rules and design details that if used with good professional practice are pre-approved by the Approving Officer. Prescriptive Standards for Signage are as follows:

4.5.2.1 Simple Naming Signs

The first level of the signage hierarchy is the Naming sign for the individual parks. The simple Naming Signs will primarily be used for way-finding and basic park identification.

Simple Naming Signs will be used in parks that:

• do not require additional facility information due to their small size, • have an entrance set away from the actual park, and • are located in an area of common vandalism activity.

All other parks will not have an independent simple naming sign but, rather, the name will be included in the Information Sign.

The only exceptions will be in cases where pre-existing or potential opportunities for unique signs are identified, possibly designed by local artists / designers. Some examples of parks with existing unique naming signs are in the table below:

Table 30. Parks with unique naming signs.

Name of Park Type of Park

BX Ranch Park Neighbourhood Park

Ranger Park City-Wide, Athletic

Polson Park City-Wide, Major Destination

These signs do not require additional park signs at this point, and an effort should be made to maintain these unique signs into the future.

Design:

The design of the Simple Naming Signs will incorporate a consistent graphic style and a colour palette that will sit well within all the various parkland environments, and will align with the Greater Vernon Parks, Recreation and Culture brand. They will be consistent so that they are instantly recognizable.


Figure 9. Sample of the simple naming sign, with mounting structure.

Each Simple Naming sign will be uncomplicated in nature, with only necessary logos (to be determined) and the park name. The mounting style will be dependent on the site, utilizing existing mounting structures when available (such as the fencing in the case of MacDonald Park), or adding a mounting structure where there is none available.

Construction:

Although the final construction is not determined for the simple signs, it is suggested that

construction will be as follows:

• 2 (8 X 8) timbers (height varying by sign) if mounting structure is needed, otherwise sign will be mounted to existing structure, such as fencing.

• High quality wood for sign plate, painted

Lifecycle Cost

The selection of materials should consider the lifecycle implications; • Utilize readily available materials and components to minimize cost • Minimize the number of components that would need to be stocked for maintenance • Select materials with a ten to fifteen year life

Placement Strategies

Visibility The signs should be positioned to act as way-finding devices, whenever possible. In major destination parks, the simple name sign will be a photo opportunity and should therefore be positioned as such.

Orientation The signs need to be located with care to ensure their maximum impact without unduly dominating the landscape or adding to the roadside clutter


Climate The signs should be located in positions that will not be unduly effected by extreme climatic conditions such as being in deep shadows or strong back lighting from late afternoon sun that might hinder the legibility of the sign. Whenever possible, the signs should be erected to face north to reduce the UV impacts.

Maintenance The signs should be sited with consideration of ongoing maintenance requirements such as the following:

• Position signs for easy access by maintenance personnel. • Avoid locations and forms that will encourage litter build up. • Ensure appropriate drainage and run off are considered.

4.5.2.2 Informational Naming Signs In addition to way finding and naming individual parks and trails, there is a need for a range of information and interpretative material that provides park users with information to ensure their park visit is enjoyable, informative and safe.

The Informational Naming signs form part of the overall signage system, providing a secondary level of information in the case of those parks with Park Name signs, or a primary level of information for those parks without independent Naming Signs.

Information and Naming signs will include the name of the park, and may include details such as:

Park Features and Facilities Signs should provide details such as the location of park features and facilities such as; playgrounds, barbecues, kiosks and toilets.

Interpretative material Signs, where relevant, should display information relating historic, cultural or environmental points of interest to park users. In cases where a natural feature or unique historical background exists, an independent interpretive sign will be erected to allow for adequate information to be conveyed.

Regulatory / Advisory information Signs will be needed that inform park users of the relevant regulations governing and advising on activities and behavior in the Park Lands such as alcohol use, dog regulations, rubbish, golfing and cycle use.

The decision around what information is included on the Informational Naming signs will be made on a case by case basis, based on the size and facilities of the park. In some cases the park may require a site map to due to its size and numerous facilities.

Design

The design incorporates a modular structure with a consistent graphic style. The signage panel provides a large surface area to cater for detailed information such as park facilities, attractions and regulations, also maps and interpretative material where required and the placement allows for pedestrian access. The colour palette will be selected as a sophisticated solution that will sit well within all the various parkland environments, and align with the RDNO GVPRC brand.


Figure 10. Sample of what a complete Informational Naming sign may look like.

Park Name

Logos

Park Features, Facilities & location

Regulations


Construction

Construction for the signs will be as follows:

• 2 (10 X 10) timbers (height varying by sign). • 2 sheets (front and back) of crezone plywood (3/4”) with size varying based on sign

content. • Ready-rod with bolts to affix plywood to timbers. • High-quality vinyl printing (lifespan 8-9 years).


Visibility The signs should be positioned in locations that ensure maximum exposure to the park user. When possible, they should be at the entrance and within sight of the main roadway.

Accessibility The signs should be positioned close to pathways where closer inspection of interpretative material is required, and hard surfaces should be considered to increase accessibility.


Public Risk The signs should be designed and positioned to ensure they do not present a safety hazard by providing a hiding place. Locations should wherever possible allow all round visibility and clear sightlines for an approaching pedestrian. Where signs are of a scale that might potentially provide a hiding place there should wherever possible be clearance above the ground to the signage panel to ensure the sign cannot hide an individual

Climate The signs should be located in positions that will not be unduly effected by extreme climatic conditions such as being in deep shadows or strong back lighting from late afternoon sun that might hinder the legibility of the sign. Whenever possible, the signs should be north facing to reduce UV damage.

Maintenance The signs should be positioned with consideration of ongoing maintenance requirements such as the following:

• Position signs for easy access by maintenance personnel. • Avoid locations and forms that will encourage litter build up • Ensure appropriate drainage and run off are considered


4.5.2.3 Trail Head Signs

In addition to way finding and naming trails, there is a need for a range of information and interpretative material that provides trail users with information to ensure their visit is enjoyable, informative and safe.

Design

The design incorporates a modular structure with a bold graphic style. The signage panel provides a large surface area on the reverse side to cater for detailed information such as park facilities, attractions and regulations, also maps and interpretative material where required and the placement allows for pedestrian access to both sides. The colour palette has been selected as a sophisticated solution that will sit well within all the various parkland environments, and aligns with the Greater Vernon Parks, Recreation and Culture brand and will be consistent with all trail signs to make the sign instantly recognizable . Each trail head sign will have on the front panel the following information: Figure 11. Sample of what a complete Trail Head sign may look like

Trail Name

Logos

Regulations

Trail Map, Features and Facilities (& location)


Construction


• 2 (8 X 8) timbers (height varying by sign) • 2 sheets (28X40) (front and back) of crezone plywood (3/4”) • Requires printing of 32X46 for wrapping room • Ready-rod with bolts to affix plywood to timbers • High-quality vinyl printing (lifespan 8-9 years) • 1 vinyl square affixed to front for the trail map, features and facilities to provide ease of

updates.


Visibility The signs should be sited according to their role within the hierarchy of signs and in locations that ensure maximum exposure to the park user

Accessibility The signs should be sited close to pathways where closer inspection of interpretative material is required and hard surfaces should be considered to surround any sign that has information on both sides


Public Risk The signs should be designed and sited to ensure they do not present a safety hazard by providing a hiding place. Locations should wherever possible allow all round visibility and clear sightlines for an approaching pedestrian. Where signs are of a scale that might potentially provide a hiding place there should wherever possible be clearance above the ground to the signage panel to ensure the sign cannot hide an individual

Climate The signs should be located in positions that will not be unduly effected by extreme climatic conditions such as being in deep shadows or strong back lighting from late afternoon sun that might hinder the legibility of the sign. Whenever possible, signs should be positioned to face north to minimize UV damage.

Maintenance The signs should be sited with consideration of ongoing maintenance requirements such as the following:

• Position signs for easy access by maintenance personnel • Avoid locations and forms that will encourage litter build up • Ensure appropriate drainage and run off are considered


4.5.2.4 Interpretive Signs Where special natural features or history is present at a site, specific interpretive signs will be erected to adequately convey the information.

Design

The design for each interpretive sign will vary by content and environment. The only necessary information for each sign will be the relevant logos, which will be located on the bottom of the sign.

Figure 12. Sample of what a complete Interpretive Sign may look like.

Construction


• 2 timber supports (height varying by sign) • 0.08” metal pan sign (20 X 28 face, 4” deep) • Ready-rod with bolts to affix to timbers • High-quality vinyl printing (lifespan 8-9 years) • Print required in high resolution pdf and needs to be 24 X 32 so that vinyl can wrap around

the metal pan.


4.5.2.5 Trail Directional Signs / Markers Where a trail has a junction or unclear section a directional sign will be erected to clarify.

Any interpretive brochure created for a trail will have simple signs erected to cross-reference with the brochure. These signs will be the same construction and similar design to the simple directional signs

Design

There will be two variations of directional signs. The first will be a simple marker showing the trail logo with an arrow on a short post. This will allow for additional plaques to be added as necessary, below the wrapper as shown in Figure 13.

Figure 13. Trail Marker Directional Sign with and without additional plaque


The second is a more elaborate option for a significant junction (junction directional sign).

Figure 14. Elaborate Directional Sign

Construction

Construction for the simple post signs will be as follows:

• 8 X 8 timber (height varying by sign). • 1 stainless steel wrap sign with trail logo printed on it (all sides). • Bolts to affix to the post or appropriate glue.

Construction for the more elaborate junction signs will be as follows:

• 2 (5 X 5) timbers (height varying by sign). • 2 sheets (front and back) of crezone plywood (3/4”). • Ready-rod with bolts to affix plywood to timbers. • High-quality vinyl printing (lifespan 8-9 years). • Print required in high resolution pdf and needs to have 2” of spare on each side so that

vinyl can wrap around the wood.

4.5.3 Preferred Providers Wilde Imagination Signs

Nancy and Stan Wilde - [email protected]

250-558-8277

250-545-9178

mailto:[email protected]


5 IRRIGATION 5.1 General Irrigation Design Requirements Irrigation designs shall be coordinated as part of the overall landscape design using a hydrozone planning approach to efficiently deliver water based on the need of each plant community.

For Public Land that will be maintained by the Owner(s), an irrigation system shall be designed, installed, operated and maintained to provide sufficient application of water to maintain the plants and grass of the landscape works and services in a healthy and growing condition.

If an irrigation system is not required at the time of construction, but will be required in the future, sufficient design, servicing and construction shall be performed to enable the irrigation system to be readily installed, connected and operated in future.

Where Public Land is to be maintained by the Municipality, an irrigation system shall be designed, operated and maintained until the end of the Maintenance Period.

A metered water service and metered electrical service (120 volts, 60 amps) irrigation points of connections hall be provided sufficient to service each park, open space, drainage facility, boulevard, median, roundabout, traffic circle and cul-de-sac island at a location acceptable to the Approving Officer. Schematic layout of irrigation mainline piping, sizing and sleeving shall be completed to prove out the number of irrigation points of connection needed to supply the proposed landscape areas, to the satisfaction of the Approving Officer.

The service shall include the establishment of water and electrical service accounts, testing and certification of the backflow prevention device, a plumbing permit, an electrical permit, and all materials, labour, fees and utility costs necessary to provide the service until the end of the Maintenance Period.

5.2 Performance Standards – Irrigation Intended for large, complex, unusual and innovative developments, Performance Standards set out general guidelines that designs must meet, but allow qualified professionals to determine the methods to meet the guidelines, subject to the written approval of the Approving Officer. The prescriptive standards described in the following section should be a starting point for the development of any performance standards.

5.2.1 Performance Standards For Irrigation Development Are: a) Performance Irrigation designs shall include a complete, professionally drafted,

package showing the following:

b) Site plan showing all buildings, paving, walls, fences, contours or spot elevations, and general hydrozone planting layout allowing differentiation between areas of rough grass, fine grass, shrub or groundcover area, and trees.

c) Irrigation plan, typical details and specifications coordinated with the site plan to show location of water supply, electrical supply and controller(s), point of connection and cross connection control, winterization provisions, water conservation provisions, all valves, pipes with sizing and grade, all heads and emitters.

d) Calculation of precipitation rate and watering times per circuit type and by season (spring, summer, fall), coordinated with GVPRD ET rate data and the Municipal watering restrictions. Provide timeclock settings for spring, summer and fall to show that all required watering shall be possible between the hours of 11:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m.

e) Maintenance guidelines – including guidance on how systems can be readily monitored and repaired by maintenance staff – in particular for drip systems.


f) Performance Irrigation Designs shall be ‘equivalent’ or better to the Prescriptive standards.

5.3 Prescriptive Standards – Irrigation Intended for small or simple developments, Prescriptive Standards set out both specific rules and design details that if used with good professional practice are pre-approved by the Approving Officer.

5.3.1 Minimum Consultant Qualifications Required professional qualifications for applicants using the Prescriptive Standards approach for Irrigation Design and Supervision:

For irrigation installations of $10,000 value or more: Member of Irrigation Industry Association of BC, plus Certified Irrigation Designer

• For irrigation installations of under $10.000 value: Member of Irrigation Industry Association of BC, plus Certified Irrigation Technician I or II.

Irrigation Systems shall be designed and installed in accordance with: • GVPRD standard details SS-I-01 to 19.

• GVPRD supplementary specifications for irrigation.

As-constructed irrigation plans shall be provided acceptable to the Approving Officer prior to award of substantial performance.

Provisions for watering of planted trees, shrubs, groundcover and fine grass areas shall be made by the developer on all lands to be dedicated as park or road right of way to Municipalities in the GVPRD.

All Irrigation Design shall follow these guidelines:

a) Landscape medians in urban settings shall be irrigated unless an alternative proposal is approved by the Approving Authority.

b) In grassed boulevards fronting institutional, commercial and multifamily residential uses with potential for heavy pedestrian traffic between the curb and sidewalk, grass areas shall be irrigated. Low traffic grassed boulevards in single family neighbourhoods may be installed without irrigation, but manual watering for establishment and maintenance is required. The Approving Authorities decision on irrigation requirements for grass areas shall be final.

c) Boulevard trees, shrubs and ground covers shall be watered from an automatic irrigation system unless an alternative proposal is approved by the Approving Officer.

d) Urban trees in pavement shall be irrigated with an automatic irrigation system that may include bubblers or drip elements.

e) Irrigation systems shall be designed to provide water conservation by employing a soil moisture probe, weather station, or other devices to override the controller during periods of adequate soil moisture or rainfall.

f) Point source drip irrigation (no grid layouts) or high efficiency irrigation heads shall be used on all shrub beds.


g) Underground drip line grids may be used on turf areas where planted area is less than 2m wide.

h) Sleeves shall be provided under sidewalks and driveways, and to medians / islands, as required for installation and maintenance of the irrigation system without removing surface paving.

i) Maximum design flow velocity to be 1.5 m/sec.

j) Size pipes and valves for minimum friction loss.

k) Specify all irrigation components from a coordinated manufacturer’s line listed in the Approved Products List.

l) Provide an isolation gate valve upstream of all automatic sprinkler valves.

m) Design head-to-head coverage for turf and shrub areas.

n) Design to water plant materials with different watering requirements (e.g. grass vs. shrub areas) on different valve circuits.

o) Design sprinkler circuits with matched precipitation heads. Do not mix heads with varied precipitation rates on the same circuit.

p) Specify low flow heads for sloping areas. Design sprinkler circuits to minimize elevation changes within the circuit.

q) Where surface sprinklers are used, ensure unobstructed sprinkler coverage to tree bases from at least two sides.

r) Every drip circuit shall be designed with a filter, pressure regulator, flush valve and air relief valve. The drip component manufacturer’s instructions for installation and maintenance shall be included in the project specifications.

s) Tracer wire should be installed on all mains.

t) Minimize overspray on paved surfaces. Do not overspray building walls or unvegetated rooftops.

u) Maintain and repair irrigation systems for the duration of the maintenance period. Provide winterization and spring startup as required in the maintenance period.

5.3.2 Irrigation Service Connections Design service connections from Municipal water mains to, and including, water meter chamber, to be in accordance with Standard Detail SS-1-01.

Required backflow prevention in accordance with Standard Detail SS-1-01 or 02.

Measure static water pressure at or near the point of connection and include with irrigation system design.


6 RECREATION FACILITIES 6.1 Soccer Fields and Ball Diamonds Refer to Detail Sheets L-01 to L-04 for soccer field and goalpost dimensions.

Subject to approval by the Approving Officer, portable goalposts may be installed. If portable goalposts are to be installed they must be securely anchored to the ground.

Refer to Detail Sheets L-05 to L-10 for ball diamond & backstop dimensions.

All sports fields, and a buffer zone of 3m, are to be graded to achieve a level, playable surface without ponding areas. The fields are to be graded to a maximum of 2% in all directions with a preference towards the “Optimal Drainage Patterns for Sports fields” as per Detail L-00.

The Approving Officer will consider solutions other than the preferred sports field grading options if site conditions do not permit their execution.

Goal end to goal end grading will only be permitted subject to demonstration that no other alternate is available. Only the 3m adjacent to the sports field of the total 10m buffer is required to be graded level and free of obstacles.

The 7m balance of the buffer may include plant material, amenities and back-sloping.

Ball diamonds and soccer fields shall be devoid of all obstacles including catch basins, and they shall be set back a minimum of:

a) 10m from all Property Lines

b) Tree setbacks as per Table 25

c) 20m from playgrounds;

d) 10m behind soccer goal posts; and

e) 3m around the perimeter of ball diamonds and along the sides of soccer fields.

Backstop canopies are required when the back of the backstop faces roadways; residences; other backstops; playgrounds; pathways; and other sports fields.

Note: Where possible, oversize the soccer field width by 4m on both sides to allow for movement of the goal to avoid formation of wear areas.

6.2 Tennis and Pickle Ball Courts 6.2.1 Tennis Courts Tennis Courts will be permitted if developed minimally as double courts.

The following guidelines and specifications should be used in conjunction with Details L-11 to 20.

a) A geotechnical analysis on a maximum ten (10) meter grid and to a two (2) meter depth shall be conducted.

b) Any organic or otherwise unsuitable material as determined by the geotechnical analysis, shall be removed to a minimum depth of one (1) meter below existing grade and replaced with one (1) meter of 75mm minus pit run base gravel conforming to the MMCD Aggregates and Granular Materials specification.

c) If no organic or otherwise unsuitable material is present, then the subgrade shall be excavated to a minimum depth of 500mm and back filled with 500mm of 75mm minus pit run base gravel conforming to the MMCD Aggregates and Granular Materials


specification. The subgrade and base gravel shall be compacted to a minimum average of 98% with no single test showing less than 95% of standard Proctor.

d) 100mm of 20mm crushed gravel conforming to the current Standard Specifications Roads Construction shall be placed and compacted to a minimum average of 98% with no single test showing less than 95% of standard Proctor.

e) A 60mm lift of Mix 'B' asphaltic concrete conforming to the current standard Specifications Roads Construction shall be placed and compacted to a minimum average of 98% with no single test showing less than 95% of standard Proctor.

f) A 40mm lift of mix 'M' asphaltic concrete conforming to the current Standard Specifications Roads Construction shall be placed and compacted to a minimum average of 98% with no single test showing less than 95% of standard Proctor.

g) The entire court surface area will be power washed with a minimum 3000 P.S.I. Power washer to ensure the surface is clean and free of all dirt, oil, and deteriorated coatings. The contractor is required to remove all debris from the site prior to the commencement of court patching and surfacing.

h) Prior to the application of the “Asphalt Resurfacer” (Asphalt Emulsion Filler Coarse), the contractor shall flood the court surface area with clean potable water in the presence of the Development Inspector or designated representative. Any depressions thereupon holding water deeper than 1.25 mm after 45 minutes shall be marked out. These depressions shall then be filled with “Court Patch Binder” (High Strength Acrylic Bonding Liquid Patching Mixture). After appropriate curing time the court surface area will again be flooded as described above to ensure that all reasonable depressions have been filled. If it is determined that more filling is required, filling will be done as described above. The use of asphaltic type emulsions or hot sand mix asphalt to fill depressions is prohibited. Note: It is expected on new construction that no depressions will be evident after the final lift of asphalt is laid. On new construction, the asphalt must cure for a minimum of 14 days prior to the application of any surface coating.

i) Upon completion of all depression patching, the contractor shall fill in all surface divots and cracks with “Plexipave Tennis Court Crack Filler” or approved equivalent (highly flexible filler and/or a high strength acrylic bonding liquid patching mixture) as per manufacturers specifications. The entire surface will then be scraped and/or ground to remove all ridges and then be blown clean to remove all loose debris.

j) The contractor shall apply one coat of SS1 Asphaltic binder to the entire court surface immediately prior to the first application of asphaltic emulsion filler. (Note: This step is not required for new construction)

k) The contractor shall apply two coats of “Asphalt Resurfacer” (Asphalt Emulsion Filler Course) to the entire court surface as per manufacturers’ specifications. The second coat will be applied at a 90 degree angle to the first coat. When the second coat has cured, the surface will be scraped to remove any ridges and then the entire surface will be blown clean to remove all debris. The surface will then be rolled with a double drum mechanical roller.

l) The contractor shall apply two coats of “Coloured Fortified Plexipave” or approved equivalent (Fortified Acrylic Coloured Filler Emulsion – utilizing 80-100 mesh rounded sand) – as per manufacturer’s specifications. The surface will be scraped and blown between coats as previously described. A final coat of Coloured Plexichrome (Fortified Acrylic Coloured Finish Emulsion) or approved equivalent –as per manufacturer’s specifications shall be applied to the entire surface. Colour scheme is to be Green playing pads and Red perimeter – unless otherwise agreed by The City. For multi-use court, colour will be green.


m) For multi-use courts, in lieu of “Coloured Fortified Plexipave”, the contractor shall apply two coats of “Acrylotex” (Specialized Fortified Acrylic Coloured Filler Emulsion) or approved equivalent, as per manufacturer’s specifications. Note: this step only to multi-use surface installations (i.e. basketball/inline hockey surfaces).

n) The contractor will layout, mask and roll court lines as per official dimensions. Two coats of “Plexicolor Textured White Line Paint” or approved equivalent (100% Acrylic Emulsion Line Paint) will be brush applied. All lines shall be straight and true and provide sharp edges. The use of traffic oil, alkyd, or solvent vehicle type paints is prohibited.

o) The contractor will paint the tennis posts with two coats of black epoxy enamel paint (Tremclad or equivalent). New posts will be treated with a light acid wash (acetone, vinegar, etc.) Previously painted posts will have old flaking paint removed prior to painting.

NOTE: The resulting surface shall be completely true (flat) with water ponding to a maximum depth of 1.25mm. Any deviation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no expense to The Municipality.

FENCING: A 3.66m high chain link fence (38mm mesh - No. 9 gauge steel) is required and shall be constructed as per Greater Vernon Parks & Recreation Development Guidelines and Standard Specifications - Landscape Construction 2013.

6.2.2 Pickleball Pickleball courts as per Detail L-11a in accordance to USAPA standards following the following standards.

a) The court shall be a rectangle 20 feet wide (6.10 m) and 44 feet long (13.41 m) for both singles and doubles matches.

b) A total playing area 30 feet wide (9.14 m) and 60 feet long (18.28 m) is the minimum size that is recommended. A total size of 34 feet by 64 feet is preferred.

c) Court measurements shall be made to the outside of the lines. The lines should be 2 inches (5.1 cm) in width and the same color, clearly contrasting with the color of the court surface.

d) Pickelball nets to be removable either prefabricated units or built to comply with the following:

e) The net may be made of any netted material.

f) The net length shall be at least 20 feet (6.1 m) extending from one sideline to the other. The net width shall be at least 2.6 feet (.8 m).

g) The net mesh size must be sufficiently small to prevent a ball from passing through it.

h) The net shall be suspended over the center of the court and shall be 36 inches (.914 m) high at the sidelines and 34 inches (.86 m) high at the center of the court.

i) A center strap may be placed at the center of the net to enable easy adjustment to the 34 in. (.86 cm) requirement at center.

j) The top of the net should be edged with a 2 inch (5 cm) white binding over a cord or cable running through the binding. This binding must rest upon the cord or cable.

k) Net posts should be placed outside the sidelines. Recommended height of the post is 36 inches (.914 m) and recommended placement is 12 inches (30.48cm) from the sideline.

http://usapa.org/construction/court_dimensions.html

https://usapa.org/store/index.php?route=product/product&product_id=52


6.3 Basketball Courts Detail Sheets 21 to 23 are to be used in conjunction with the following specifications:

Prior to construction of the surfacing a pavement design shall be submitted to Calgary Parks. The pavement design shall be prepared by a qualified geo-technical professional Engineer. The design should be gravel based and shall include a review of existing subsoils and subgrade drainage conditions. Subgrade preparation along with placing and compaction of gravel and asphaltic concrete is to be carried out in accordance with the current MMCD specifications unless otherwise specified in the design.

A final asphalt emulsion of two coats should be applied. The application shall include a filling, sealing and texturing process. Then the colouring and lining of courts shall occur with an acrylic emulsion coating. This coating shall be highly pigmented with prime colour and reinforcing pigments that will provide a long and lasting finish for basketball courts.

NOTE: The resulting surface shall be completely true (flat) with water ponding to a maximum depth of 1.25mm. Any deviation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no expense to The Municipality.

7 DOG PARKS Design of a new of leash dog parks must be undertaken in consultation with the surrounding community and interested stakeholders. These design standards are provided as a general resource and are expected to be customised on a site specific basis.

7.1 Design Criteria • Minimum size of 0.4 Ha (1 acre), with preference given to 0.8 – 1.2 Ha (2 - 3 acres) • Provision of buffer planting and berms or other landforms to separate off leash areas from

adjacent incompatible landuses. • When fencing, use a 4-feet tall black chain-link perimeter fence with minimum double

gated entrances plus two 10-feet wide maintenance gates. • ADA accessible paved entrance path. • Minimum of 4 doggie clean up stations (bag dispenser and trash barrels). • Shade trees or shade structure with bench seating. • Rules and regulations signage posted outside the entry gate. • Consider multiple entry points to reduce congestion and potential conflict around entries. • Park entries should not be located in corners of the off leash area, so as to reduce the

chance of dogs and owners becoming “cornered” upon entry. • Provide durable surface materials (e.g. sand, wood chips or pea gravel) with suitable

drainage at park entries, as these are areas of concentrated use. • Parking (this may be on site or a combination of on-site and on street depending on the

site). • Off-leash areas within parks 0.8 Ha (2 acres) and under must be fenced. • Off-leash areas to be located within the vicinity of the identified exclusions below must be

fenced.

• For all other off-leash areas, fencing or physical delineation compatible with the site is required around off-leash areas.

The following amenities are optional and may be provided at some but not all sites. • Fresh water; • Community bulletin board


• Shaded areas or shelters • Plastic bags • Lights • Washrooms • Separate areas for small and large dogs

The following design criteria will be used to review the suitability of a proposed site: • Neighbourhood characteristics (adjacent land uses, population density, housing types,

licensed dog population, proximity of existing and other potential off-leash areas located within a 15 minute walk or 1 kilometre).

• Compatibility with the park’s design, established uses, features and components • Potential impacts on the park’s functionality, condition and natural environment • Proportion of park to be taken up by the proposed off-leash area • Proximity to residences and off-leash area exclusions • Off-leash areas shall not be established within 30m (100 feet) meters of the following

areas: o Playgrounds, splash pads and wading pools. o Horticultural display areas or ornamental gardens. o Skateboard bowls, tennis courts and other sports pads. o Sportsfields and stadiums. o Artificial or natural ice rinks, toboggan hills o Animal display areas.

• Off-leash areas shall generally not be established in the following areas: o Regional and highly tourist areas or parks that accommodate special/cultural

events and which attracts residents and tourists. o Next to hospitals, schools and nursing homes. o Next to high density campgrounds. o Designated heritage, memorial, commemorative and ceremonial areas. o Culturally significant grounds. o Areas posted prohibiting dogs. o Swimming beaches (noting that off season use maybe appropriate in some

areas). o Environmentally Significant Areas. o Groundwater and recharge / discharge zones. o Areas that have undergone tree / shrub / wildflower planting or where plans exist

for such planting to occur. o Natural shorelines with natural vegetation that would be disturbed by compaction

and foot / paw traffic o Areas containing species of concern, including local or regionally uncommon,

rare, threatened or endangered species. o No arterial streets within 60m (200 feet) unless the area is fully fenced.

7.2 Establishment Procedure a) New off-leash areas will be considered in conjunction with capital redevelopment of

existing parks or new park development.

b) A request for an off-leash area will be reviewed by Municipal staff

c) Residents interested in establishing an off-leash area are encouraged to establish a local dog owners’ association (DOA).


d) If Municipal staff deem a site suitable for an offleash area where no dog owners’ association (DOA) exists the Approving Officer may waive the DOA provisions.

e) Requests shall not be accepted in relation to property that is not owned or managed by a GVA Municipality.

f) If the request does not meet the criteria for an off-leash area, the Approving Officer shall advise the applicant(s) in writing of the reasons why the location is not appropriate.

g) Where Staff has determined that the request meets the offleash policy criteria and a suitable location within the neighbourhood has been identified, the request will submitted to Council along with assessment of capital and maintenance budget requirements.

h) Should Council be in favor of proceeding notice of a neighbourhood meeting shall be provided to the local community, as part of the consultation process when the existing park redevelopment or new park development is occurring.

i) Members of the public are encouraged to attend the meeting and provide comments on the park project, including proposed off-leash areas. Staff will take the public’s input into account in finalizing the design of the park development.

j) At the meeting, park project staff shall review the proposed off leash area with the attendees:

• overall project • request for an off-leash area • neighbourhood and park characteristics • size and location of area • slopes and their sustainability • hours of operation • rules and regulations fencing requirements or use of natural barriers where

deemed appropriate • signage • tree or forest protection required • amenities (lighting, seating, access to water for people and dogs, waste and

recycling programs) • other landscape components.

k) A follow-up meeting will be held with the community to present the design and

timeline for implementation of the park project if necessary.

l) Once the off-leash area is established the site information will be posted on the applicable Municipal website and at the site.

m) There are neither fees associated with the request for an off-leash area nor any fees for off-leash area users.

7.3 Rules and Regulations The intent of the rules and regulations are to provide clear guidelines for off-leash dog areas users. Rules and regulations do not include off-leash areas etiquette which shall be developed in collaboration with the users of off-leash areas. Rules and regulations signage with hours of operations and emergency contact numbers shall be posted at the entrance of each off-leash area:

• Handlers must dispose of the dog feces properly and immediately • Dogs must be leashed when entering and leaving the enclosure • Handlers assume full responsibility for their dogs


• Individuals who choose to use off-leash areas do so at their own risk. • Owners must have a current and valid dog licence tag • Dogs must be removed by owner or handler from the off-leash dog area if dogs are in heat • (female), sick or aggressive. • No more than two dogs may be brought into the off-leash dog area by an individual at the • same time. • No toys, chairs water dishes or trash left behind. • All children under 12 years of age must be supervised by an adult attendant while inside

the off-leash dog area. • No food (this applies to both the human and canine variety), is permitted in the off-leash

dog area. • Off-leash areas are smoke free areas. • Choke, spike, chain or pinch collars are not allowed in off-leash area. • Dogs must be under control. • Professional dog trainers are not permitted to use the off-leash areas to conduct their

business. • Dog owners and handlers are subject RDNO Dog Control Bylaw No. 2466, 2010 and any

dog that has been deemed to be an ‘Aggressive Dog’ under RDNO Dog Control Bylaw No. 2466, 2010 must be muzzled.

7.4 On-going Monitoring and Maintenance City staff, shall formally evaluate the performance of the off-leash dog areas once per year for the first year of operation and once every second year for the following years. In the evaluation process, staff will review comments received from off-leash park users and the general public and will also consider the following:

a) public health concerns;

b) number and severity of complaints;

c) risk management issues;

d) impact on turf and shrub;

e) non-compliance with municipal by-laws.

Where one or more of the above indicators have been identified which could have an impact on public safety or quality of life, Municipal staff will determine if further actions are required to eliminate the concerns or if the off-leash area or if that particular site should be removed. Permanent closures of off-leash area are at the discretion of the Municipality who has jurisdiction over the facility. Off leash areas shall be regularly inspected and maintained by maintenance staff. Should vandalism or general wear and tear warrant maintenance staff may temporarily close the off leash area. If excessive littering or dog faeces are accumulating in the off leash areas maintenance staff may post a warning of closure if conditions do not improve. If the situation does not improve within a week the area maybe temporarily closed. 7.5 References

• Portland Off-Leash Program Evaluation & Recommendations • City Of Surrey 2012 - 2021 Dog Off Leash Area Strategy

http://www.portlandonline.com/parks/index.cfm?c=40212&a=97472

http://www.surrey.ca/files/Dog_Off-Leash_Master_Plan_2012.pdf


• Toronto People, Dogs and Parks – Off-Leash Policy • Kingston Off-Leash Dog Areas Policy

8 COMMUNITY GARDENS Community gardens are becoming common sights in urban centers around the Okanagan as communities increasingly recognize the value in promoting the production of local, healthy and fresh food in an urban setting with attendant benefits such as:

• Enhance local food security; • Provide gardening and other environmental education activities to encourage the

involvement of schools, youth groups and senior citizens in gardening activities; • Host harvest festivals and other family-oriented activities that encourage positive social

interactions among all community members; • Encourage partnerships with other community organizations; • Donate surplus food to local food banks or other organizations.

The Regional District and local community garden champions the Food Action Society currently administer the community garden program for Greater Vernon Parks, Recreation and Culture.

Detailed information for establishment of new gardens is available at this link:

http://www.greatervernonrecreation.ca/pdf/new_garden_application_guide.pdf

For more information about the program contact:

Tannis Nelson, Community Development Coordinator Regional District of North Okanagan Phone: 250-550-3689 Email: [email protected]

8.1 Typical Design & Construction Considerations In addition to the criteria set out in the GVPRC Application Guide the following design criteria are provided to assist in the design and construction of new community gardens.

8.1.1 Site selection • Look for sites that do not require extensive site clearing (if required the community garden

group is responsible for site clearing). • Site shall be of sufficient size with flat ground to accommodate enough plots to

accommodate current demand with room for future growth and allow truck and maintenance vehicle truck access.

• While typically raised bed construction is recommended the existing soil quality and drainage characteristics should be considered.

• If past land uses may have led to contamination soil tests are recommended. • Site should have a minimum of six hours of sunlight per day in the winter solstice • A close proximity to urban neighbourhoods and areas of higher population density and

compatible with adjacent landuses is recommended. • Site should be visible from public roads and pedestrian areas to both promote the garden

and help ensure public safety. Neighboring residents who are willing to be keep an eye on the site is ideal.

• Site should be publically accessible during the gardening season with provision of both vehicular and bicycle parking areas. Ideally gardeners should be able to walk to drive a

http://www.toronto.ca/parks/pdf/policy/Parks/dogs/dogs_off-leash_policy.pdf

http://www.toronto.ca/parks/pdf/policy/Parks/dogs/dogs_off-leash_policy.pdf

http://www.cityofkingston.ca/documents/10180/20847/Off-Leash+Dog+Park+Policy/7b6caa7d-e19c-4d95-b42e-181e84178467

http://www.greatervernonrecreation.ca/pdf/new_garden_application_guide.pdf


short distance to the gardens. • Site must have access to an existing municipal water service. • Existing wind breaks to protect the garden area are desirable.

8.1.2 Garden Layout & Design • The number of plots should be calculated to ensure the allotment fees cover water and

any ongoing maintenance for garden facilities. • A sketch plan should be provided showing plot layouts, dimensions, fill materials and

quantities and construction materials. • Wood or timber material used to construct the community garden must be untreated.

Should budget permit wood alternates such as recycled plastic, composite lumber, or steel may be used to provide greater longevity with approval from the Approving Officer.

• The garden should not include structures or barriers preventing access to the general public unless there are specific security concerns.

• Where possible the layout should accommodate a 5.5m set back from the edge of plots to allow for maintenance vehicle access.

• Recommended area for each garden plot is a minimum of 2.9m2 with a minimum depth of 450 mm of growing medium that meets the BC Landscape Standards growing medium specification for shrub beds. See detail sheets 57 and 58.

• The designated space between garden plots will be site specific however 0.9m width between plots and 2.0m width on main access is recommended. Where accessible plots are being provided allow minimum 1.5m width access on all sides and be surfaced with an accessible surface such as gravel or wood chips.

• Sufficient hose bibs should be provided to ensure each plot is within a maximum 20m radius of a hose bib.

• A lockable tool shed is recommended, 8x10 ft. kitsets from one of the major home hardware stores is typically sufficient.

• Onsite compost bins located in close proximity to the toolshed is recommended however can prove to be a maintenance issue if in appropriate ratios of high nitrogen vs. high carbon materials are added. Typical dimension is 0.9 x 0.9x 0.9 with two to three bays to allow rotations.

• If provided potting benches should be located in proximity of the tool shed and with a minimum height of 75 cm and minimum width of 1.8 m.

102 Section II - Approved Materials

SECTION II - APPROVED MATERIAL SELECTION GUIDE

1 PLANT MATERIAL PERFORMANCE STANDARDS All landscape designs are encouraged to utilize the principles of water efficient landscaping or xeriscape landscaping throughout landscape areas and follow the seven principles as provided by the Greater Vernon Garden City Society and the Water Stewardship Committee through their booklet ‘Water Efficient Plants for the North Okanagan’.

• Planning and Design – Take into consideration the regional and microclimatic conditions, existing vegetation and topographical conditions, grouping of plants by water needs.

• Soil Analysis – Proper selection of plants for soil type. When appropriate, enhance soil by improving drainage or water holding capacity.

• Appropriate Plant Selection – Based on the plants adaptability to the landscape, desired effect, colour, texture, and plant size.

• Practical Turf Areas – Turf provides many practical benefits in a landscape. How and where it is used can significantly reduce water use.

• Efficient Irrigation – Watering only when plants need water. Watering deeper encourages deeper root growth, resulting in a healthier drought tolerant landscape.

• Use of Mulches – Mulches applied and maintained at appropriate depths in planting beds will assist soils to retain moisture, reduce weed growth, and prevent erosion.

• Appropriate Maintenance – Proper landscape and irrigation maintenance will preserve and enhance a quality water efficient landscape.

In addition landscape materials must be selected according to the requirements of the specific site and the unique set of characteristics for the landscape area

Unless included in the approved materials Selection Guide All plant materials shall meet the following criteria:

• Plants shall have the ability to withstand adverse conditions such as airborne pollutants, maximum sun exposure and reflected heat from pavements, high winds and abrasive forces, occasional snow loading and exposure to salt from road clearing operations, and limited root zone soil volumes.

• Plants shall be hardy to Zone 5b or colder. • Plants shall be capable of reduced water demand following a one year establishment

period. • Unless alternates are approved by the Approving Officer, plants shall have relatively low

maintenance attributes including:

f) fine to medium leaf size and canopy density,

g) non-fruit bearing or having only berry-sized non-staining and non-toxic fruits,

h) low susceptibility to disfiguring or fatal diseases and infestations, and

i) infrequent demands for pruning, fertilizing and other cultural requirements.

Note: on site specific basis the Approving Officer may vary these requirements to allow community garden and urban agriculture initiatives.

103 Section II – Approved Materials

1.1 Approved Trees Species Boulevard or ‘street’ trees shall be of a single specie/cultivar on either side of the street within a given block. Median tree species may vary.

Street trees species shall vary between intersecting streets. Street tree selection will be made with consideration of maintaining a diverse and varied street tree distribution across a neighbourhood, to minimize disease risks.

All street trees shall meet the following criteria:

a) Compact or upward branching structure.

b) Ability to withstand pruning for pedestrian, vehicle and/or building clearance without compromise to tree health or form.

c) Absence of species/varietal characteristics of structural weakness, susceptibility to wind damage, or thin, easily damaged bark.

Select street trees according to proposed site conditions either from the Tables set out below, or

An alternative source provided that the proposed trees meet the site criteria contained within the relevant parts of Table 31 to Table 35 and all other criteria contained in this section.

Obtain written approval from the Municipal Engineer for tree selections not taken from Table 31 to Table 35

Table 31. Trees For Directly Under Hydro Lines

SCIENTIFIC NAME COMMON NAME

Acer griseum Paperbark Maple

Acer ginnala Amur Maple (tree form)

Acer platinoides ‘Globosom’ Globe Norway Maple

Acer tataricum Tatarian Maple

Crataegus Phaenopyrom Washington Hawthorn

Maackia amurensis Amur Maackia

Prunus Cerasifera 'Thundercloud' Thundercloud Plum

Prunus serrulata ‘Amanagawa’ Amanagawa Cherry

Prunus serrulata ‘Kwanzan’ Kwanzan Cherry

Prunus serrulata ‘Pink Perfection’ Pink Perfection Cherry

Pyrus Calleryana ‘Chanticleer’ Callery pear

Note: Minimum allowable soil volume per tree 4 cu.m. with 1 m depth pit.

Selection criterion for alternative trees not listed in Table 31: Mature height not greater than 7.62m.

Table 32. Trees For Beside Hydro Lines



Acer platinoides ‘Columnare’ Columnar Norway Maple

Acer platinoides ‘Crimson Sentry’ Crimson Sentry Norway maple

Acer rubrum ‘Bowhall’ Bowhall Red Maple

Carpinus betulus ‘Fastigiata’ Fastigiate Hornbeam

Ginkgo biloba ‘Princeton Sentinel’ Princeton Sentinel Ginkgo

Fagus sylvatica ‘Fastigiata’ (‘Dawyckii’) Fastigiate Beech

Prunus sargentii “Columnaris’ Columnar Sargent’s Cherry

Quercus robur ‘Fastigiata’ Fastigiate English Oak

Sorbus aucuparia ‘Rosedale’ Rosedale Mountain Ash

Tilia cordata ‘Corzam’ Corinthian Linden

Notes: Min. 2.75m Lateral Distance from Nearest Line

Minimum allowable soil volume per tree 4 cu.m. with 1 m depth pit. Trees listed in Table 29 may also be used.

Selection criterion for alternative trees not listed in Table 32: Mature spread not greater than 5m.

Table 33. Trees For Limited Available Soil Volume (Min. 4 cu.m. per Tree, 1m pit Depth)


Acer campestre (tree form) Hedge Maple

Acer circinatum (tree form) Vine Maple

Acer platinoides x truncatum cv. Norweigian and Pacific Sunset Maples

Fraxinus oxycarpa ‘Raywood’ Raywood Ash

Pyrus calleryana ‘Redspire’ Redspire Callery Pear

Sorbus aucuparia ‘ Cardinal Royal’ Cardinal Royal Mountain Ash

Notes: Trees listed in Table 31 or Table 32 may also be used.

Selection criterion for alternative trees not listed in Table 31: Mature height not greater than 10m.


Table 34. Trees For Available Soil Volumes of 9 cu.m. per Tree or More, 1m pit Depth


Acer rubrum cvs. Red Maple cultivars

Gleditsia triacanthos ‘Shademaster’ Shademaster Honeylocust

Gleditsia triacanthos ‘Skyline’ Skyline Honeylocust

Quercus coccinea Scarlet oak

Quercus rubra Red oak

Tilia x euchlora Crimean Linden

Notes: Trees listed in Tables 31-33 may also be used.

Selection criterion for alternative trees not listed in Table 34: Mature height not greater than 20m.

Table 35. Trees For Wide Boulevard or Wide Median Use Only

.SCIENTIFIC NAME COMMON NAME

All non-dwarf coniferous spp.

Fagus sylvatica (sp., & full size cultivars) European beech

Liquidambar styracaflua Sweetgum

Liriodendron tulipifera Tulip tree

Platanus acerifolia London Planetree

Quercus palustrus Pin Oak

Zelkova serrata cv. Japanese Zelkova

Notes: Trees listed in Tables 31-34 may also be used.

Trees in this Part require a minimum available root zone of 20 cu.m. per tree with a minimum width of 3.5m.

1.2 Street tree size, spacing and location Trees shall be minimum 5 cm caliper measured at 300mm above the rootball at the time of planting, and of uniform size if planted in a boulevard row.

Minimum number of boulevard trees shall be calculated as follows:

1.2.1 Tree Size Single Family Medium Trees (± 10 - 20m ht.) Greater of 1 per lot or 15m

Small Trees (Under 10m ht.) Greater of 1 per lot or 10m

Plantings of trees closer than 6m on center shall require the written approval of the Municipal Engineer.


Locate trees at least 1m offset from the curb face.

Locate trees fronting on single family lots in locations that avoid all utility service alignments and driveways. Generally this will lead to tree placement in the half of the lot frontage away from the driveway side, and not at either the lot centerline or at a lot line.

1.2.2 Urban Trees in Pavement Select urban trees in pavement in accordance with Table 31 to Table 36. Trees not on these lists may be used subject to approval from the Approving Officer.

Select and site urban trees in pavement to eliminate long term above-ground and below ground conflicts with utilities, buildings and structures, and pedestrian and vehicular traffic.

1.2.3 Trees for Parks and Open Spaces Trees within Parks and Open Space maybe selected from Table 31 to Table 37. Trees not on these lists may be used subject to approval from the Approving Officer.

Natural Areas to utilize locally sourced indigenous species as recommended by a Qualified Environmental Professional.

Table 36. Recommended Tree Species for Specific Neighbourhoods (City of Vernon)

Area Common Name Scientific Name

East Hill

Autumn Blaze Maple Acer X freemanii Jeffersred

Maidenhair Tree Ginko biloba

Crataegus mordensis'Toba'

Flowering Dogwood Cornus florida

Red Oak Quercus rubra

Showy Mtn Ash Sorbus decora

Black Hills Spruce Picea glauca var.Densata

Tronson or Middleton

Kentucky Coffee Tree Gymnocladusdioicus

Patmore Green Ash Fraxinus pennsylvanica Patmore

Tulip Tree Liriodendron tulipifera

Newport Plum Prunus cerasifera Newport

Burr Oak Quercus macrocarpa

Japanese Lilac Tree Syringa reticulate

Red Horsechestnut AesculusXcarnea Fort McnNair

Austrian Pine Pinus nigra

Mission Hill/ East side Rd

Sunburst Honey locust Gleditsia triacanthos Sunburst

Star Magnolia Magnollia stellata

Shubert Chokecherry Prunus virginiana Shubert

Purple Ash Fraxinus Americana Autumn Purple

Maidenhair Tree Ginkgo biloba

Kousa Dogwood Cornus kousa

Colorado Spruce Picea Pungens


Downtown

Goldenrain Tree Koelreuteria panniculata

Litle Leaf Linden Tilia cordata

Pissardii Plum Prunus cerasifera Pissardii

Ivory Silk Syringa reticulata

Shademaster Honeylocust Gleditsia triacanthos Shademaster

Eastern Redbud Cercis canadencis

Scots Pine Pinus sylvestris

Foothills

Common Hackberry Celtis Occidentalis

Amur Maple Acer ginnala

Amur Chokecherry Prunus maacki

European Mt Ash Sorbus aucuparia

Foothills Green Ash Faxinus pennsylvanica Heuver

European Hornbeam Caprinus betulus Fastigata

Austrian Pine Pinus nigra

Table 37. Approved Trees List – General Use

DECIDUOUS TREES

Latin Name Common Name

Aesulus Glabra Ohio Buckeye

Acer freeman Sienica Sienna Glen Maple

Acer freeman Jeffersred Autumn Blaze Maple

Acer freeman Morgan Morgan Maple

Acer ginnala Amur Maple

Acer platanoides Norway Maple

Acer platanoides Columnare Columnar Norway Maple

Acer platanoides ‘Emerald Queen’ Emerald Queen Maple

Acer rubrum ‘Autumn Spire’ Autumn Spire Maple

Acer rubrum ‘Red Sunset’ Red Sunset Maple

Betula papyrifera Paper Birch

Betula pendula Weeping Birch

Carpinus betulus Hornbeam

Celtris occidentalis Hackberry

Crataegus crus-galli Inermis Thornless Cockspur Hawthorn


Crataegus laevigata ‘Crimson Cloud’ Crimson Cloud Hawthorn

Crataegus mordenensis‘Toba’ Toba Hawthorne

Crataegus oxyacantha ‘Paul’s Scarlet’ Paul’s Scarlet Hawthorne

Elaeagnus angustifolia Russian Olive Tree

Euonymus europaea European Spindle Tree

Fraxinus ‘Northern Treasure’ Northern Treasure Ash

Fraxinus mandshurica Manchurian Ash

Fraxinus pennsylvanica Heuver Foothills Green Ash

Fraxinus pennsylvanica lanceolata ‘Patmore’ Patmore Green Ash

Fraxinus pennsylvanica ‘Rugby’ Praire Spire Green Ash

Ginko biloba Maidenhair Tree

Phellodendron amurense Cork Tree

Plantanus acerifolia ‘Bloodgood’ London Planetree

Quercus ellipsoidalis Northern Pin Oak

Quercus macdenielli Heritage Heritage Oak

Quercus macrocarpa Burr Oak

Quercus palustris Pin Oak

Quercus Rubra Red Oak

Syringa reticulata Japanese Tree Lilac

Syringa reticulate ‘Ivory Silk’ Ivory Silk Lilac

Tilia Americana ‘Redmond’ Redmond Linden

Tilia cordata ‘Greenspire’ Greenspire Linden

Tilia x euchlora European Linden

Tilia tomentosa Silver Linden

CONIFEROUS TREES


Picea glauca White Spruce

Picea pungens Colorado Spruce

Picea pungens ‘Glauca’ Colorado Blue Spruce

Pinus flexilis ‘Vanderwolf’s Pyramid’ Vanderwolf’s Pyramid Limber Pine

Pinus nigra Austrian Pine

Pinus ponderosa Ponderosa Pine

Pinus sylvestris Scotch Pine

Pseudotsuga menziesi Douglas Fir


1.3 Shrubs & Ground Cover All shrubs in manicured areas are to be of good form and vigour, and be of a minimum #2 nursery pot size. All shrubs selected must meet the requirements of the BC Landscape Standard.

Plants for naturalised areas may be in #1pot size, plug, cutting or field clump depending on species.

There are a large number of species suitable for the GVA therefore the selection of individual shrubs should be conducted by a landscape professional to ensure the shrub is suitable for the landscape area it is to be installed into.

An approved shrub plant list is listed below. Shrub species not listed below require the approval of the Approving Officer.

Table 38. Approved Shrub List

DECIDUOUS SHRUBS


Aronica meloncarpa ‘Autumn Magic’ Glossy Black Chokecherry

Berberis thunbergi Barberry

Buddleia alternifolia Butterfly Bush

Buxus x ‘Green Gem’ Green Gem Boxwood

Buxus x ‘Green Velvet’ Green Velvet Boxwood

Caragana arborescens Common Caragana

Cornus alba Dogwood

Cotinus coggygria Smoke Bush

Cotoneaster acutifolius Peking Cotoneaster

Cytissus nigricans ‘Cyni’ Cyni Broom

Diervila lonicera Dwarf Bush Honeysuckle

Euonymus alata Winged Burning Bush

Eunoymus alata ‘compacta’ Dwarf Burning Bush

Euonymes fortunei Euonymus

Forsythia ovata Forsythia

Genista lydia Dwarf Broom

Haimodendron halodendron Salt Bush

Hippophae rhamnoides Sea Buckthorn

Hydrangea arborescens grandiflora ‘Annabelle’ Annabelle Hydrangea

Hydrangea paniculata ‘Grandiflora’ P.G. Hydrangea

Kerria Japonica Kerria

Kolkwitzia amabilis Beauty Bush

Ligustrum vulgare Privet


Lonicera tatarica ‘Arnold Red’ Asrnold’s Red Honeysuckle

Lonicera maximowicizi var. sachalinensis Sakhalin Honeysuckle

Lonicera caerulea edulis Sweetberry Honeysuckle

Philadelphus Mock Orange

Physocarpus opulifolius Ninebark

Potentilla fruticosa Potentilla

Prunus besseyi Western Sand Cherry

Rhododendron Hardy Rhododendron

Rhododendron Azalea Hardy Azalea

Rhus aromatica Fragrant Sumac

Rhus typhina Staghorn Sumac

Ribes alpinum Alpine Current

Salix ‘Hakuro Nishiki’ shrub form Hakuro Nashiki Willow

Sambucus spp Elder

Shepherdia argentea Silver Buffalo Berry

Sorbaria sorbifolia Ashleaf Spirea

Spiraea Spirea

Rosa spp. Hardy Roses

Symphoricarpos albus Snowberry

Syringa Lilac Taxus media Yew

Vaccinium vitis-idea European Red Lingonberry

Viburnum Lantana Wayfaring Tree

Viburnum lentago Nannyberry

Viburnum opulus ‘Compactum’ Compact European Cranberry

Vibunum opulus ‘Roseum’ Snowball Viburnum

Viburnum trilobum ‘Bailey Compact’ Bailey Compact American Cranberry

Weigela florida Weigela

Yucca Yucca


EVERGREEN SHRUBS

Latin Species Common Name

Chamaecyparts pisifera filifera ‘Sungold’ Sungold Threadleaf Cypress

Chamaecyparis pisifera ‘Mops’ Mops Threadleaf Cypress

Daphne cneorum Rose Daphne

Juniperous chinensis ‘Monlep’ Mint Julep Juniper

Juniperus horizontalis ‘Andorra’ Youngstown Juniper

Juniperus horizontalis ‘Blue Chip’ Blue Chip Juniper

Juniperus horizontalis ‘Hughes’ Hughes Juniper

Juniperus horizontalis ‘Prince of Wales’ Prince of Wales Juniper

Juniperus horizontalis ‘Wiltonii’ Wiltoni Carpet Juni[per

Juniperus sabina Savin Juniper

Juniperus Sabina ‘Broadmoor’ Broadmoor Juniper

Juniperus Sabina ‘Buffalo’ Buffalo Juniper

Juniperus Sabina ‘Monna’ Calgary Carpet Juniper

Juniperus Sabina ‘Tamariscfolia New Blue’ New Blue Tamarix Juniper

Juniperus scopulorum ‘Gray Gleam’ Gray Gleam Juniper

Juniperus scopulorum ‘Moonglow’ Moonglow Juniper

Juniperus viginiana ‘Skyrocket’ Skyrocket Juniper

Mahonia aquifolium Oregon Grape

Picea abies ‘Nidiformis’ Nest Spruce

Pinus mugo Mugo Pine

Pinus sylvestris ‘Glauca Nana’ Dwarf Blue Scotch Pine

Thuja occidenatlis ‘Brandon’ Brandon Pyramidal Cedar

Thuja occidentallis ‘Little Giant’ Little Giant Cedar

Thuja occidentalis ‘Smaragd’ Emerald Cedar

Thuja occidentalis ‘Woodwardii’ Globe Cedar

1.4 Vines and Ornamental Grasses: All vines and ornamental grasses are to be of good form and vigor, and be of a minimum #1 nursery pot size. All vines and ornamental grasses selected must meet the requirements of the British Columbia Landscape Standard.

There are a large number of species suitable for the Vernon area therefore the selection of individual plants should be conducted by a landscape professional to ensure the plants are of sound quality.

All vines and ornamental grasses selected must be suitable for the region and suitable to the


location proposed.

1.5 Annuals: As these plant materials are replaced on an annual basis the species selection should be driven by the characteristics of the location the materials are proposed for such as soil, exposure, orientation, and water availability.

1.6 Lawn Materials Installation of lawn areas utilizes a variety of grass species in a variety of species compositions dependent upon several site specific characteristics related to the size of the lawn area, use of the lawn area, exposure of site, site soil conditions, site topography, water availability, and proposed maintenance plan. Species selected shall be appropriate to the proposed lawn location and are to be listed on the landscape plans.

Approved locally available propriety low water use mixes include:

• Eco Smart Blend sod available from Ecoturf Farms Tel: 1-866-923-8873 • Bluestem's Enviro-Turf (Seed) from Bluestem Nursery Tel: 1-250-447-6363

Alternate low or no irrigation groundcovers are encouraged where practical. Proposed alternates must be approved by the Approving Officer.

1.6.1 Sod Lawn Areas Lawn areas of high public exposure, areas narrow in width, and areas of high traffic should be planted with sod.

All lawn areas on and adjacent to commercial, industrial, institutional properties, and most lawn areas on and adjacent to multi-family properties should be comprised of installed sod.

Sod species composition varies and should reflect the site conditions for the lawn area. Installation should be conduct by a landscape professional to ensure the quality and survivability of the sod material following planting.

Soil quality and soil preparation play critical roles in the long-term appearance of the sod area, ensure that the soil conditions are adequate and ensure proper soil preparation is conducted as per specifications before sod is installed.

1.6.2 Seed Lawn Areas Lawn areas with low public exposure, controlled traffic, minimal maintenance plan, and large in size can be considered for seeding. Seeding can take the form of broadcast seeding a prepared soil bed or hydro seeding of a prepared or un-prepared soil bed.

Seed species composition varies and should reflect the site conditions for the lawn area.

Installation should be conduct by a landscape professional to ensure the quality and survivability of the seeded material following planting. Soil quality and soil preparation play critical roles in the long-term appearance of the seeded area.

Rough grass and wildflowers areas shall be seeded. Seeding method shall be noted on drawings.

Areas to be seeded with grades greater than 3:1 and/or highly erodible soils shall be hydroseeded with a nurse crop seed mix, or a hydraulically applied erosion control mulch, or erosion control blanket. Erosion control method to be noted on drawings.


1.7 Hydro seeding, Terraseeding and Direct Drilling Hyrdoseeding, Terraseeding and Direct Drilling installation is most effective on larger areas and on areas of sloped and/or variable topography. Hydro seeding also offers the additional benefits of soil protection, seed protection, immediate fertilization, and cost effective installation.

Terraseeding where seed is pre-mixed with a growing medium and is pneumatically blown onto the site offers similar advantages to hydroseeding but may offer improved establishment as the seed is mixed rather than topically applied to the growing medium.

Direct drilling with hydomulch is also an approved option where topography permits machine access.

2 EDGING, MULCH, AND GROUNDCOVER MATERIALS 2.1 Edging Edging refers to materials used to separate landscape areas from other landscape areas and from other uses on the property. Some forms of edging utilized consist of treated wood, stone, concrete, or plastic. Edging being utilized to separate landscape areas from lawn areas and must be of sufficient depth (minimum 15cm) and connectivity to prevent penetration of lawn into the other landscape areas. If plastic edging is to be used a professional grade is required as it will last significantly longer and will act as a better barrier for a longer duration (minimum 15 year material life).

The Approving Officer shall provide direction on appropriate edging on a project specific basis.

2.2 Weed Barrier Weed barrier, refers to woven fabric or certain mulch materials that act to inhibit the growth of weeds in landscape areas.

Unless approved in writing by the Approving Officer woven fabric weed barrier, ‘landscape fabric’ or ‘weed mat’ is not permitted on planted areas due to long term maintenance issues.

Weed barrier may be installed under gravel surfaces and stone riprap. The fabrics must be covered with ground cover materials to ensure that no fabric is exposed directly to the elements to reduce material deterioration.

Proper installation of fabric is critical to its effectiveness, ensure that fabric is installed correctly particularly where site includes sloped topography, and ensure adequate overlap of seams.

Woven fabric weed barriers come in a variety of grades, a professional grade nylon woven fabric is required (minimum 15 year material life.

2.3 Ground Cover Materials Ground cover materials include a variety of materials utilized that act as weed barriers. These materials include but are not limited to a variety of both organic mulch materials such as bark much and compost, and, a variety of inorganic mulches such as rock and gravel materials.


2.3.1 Organic Mulch Ground Cover Materials Organic mulch ground cover materials are commonly found in a variety of grades, compositions, and textures. This range runs from raw fresh conifer wood chip material to fine composted fir bark mulch. Each type of mulch must be utilized according to its characteristics and limitations.

Organic mulches are preferred on planted areas as they remain friable and easy to dig and weed within and as they biodegrade enrich the soil.

Installation depths as per BC Landscape Standards

In non-planted areas a fine texture mulch maybe used as a weed with a minimum depth of 20cm. Most bark mulches currently utilized in landscape areas are not material that will act as an effective weed barrier and must be installed over a woven fabric weed barrier as described in the previous section.

To minimise mulch blowing or washing onto roads, curbs, sidewalks, parking areas and patios the finished elevation of mulch should be a minimum 50mm below any adjacent hard surface.

Approved organic mulches include:

• Ogogrow available Regional Compost Facility Tel: 250 469-8868 • RDNO-Gro available from Greater Vernon Recycling and Disposal Facility

Tel: 250-550-3700

2.3.2 Inorganic Ground Cover Materials Inorganic ground cover materials are available in a large number of shapes, sizes, and colorations. The type of material selected should reflect the aesthetic objectives of the landscape design and also reflect the function of the location where the material is proposed to be installed.

Ensure when selecting rock ground cover materials that the size is suitable for the landscape area, the shape is suitable for the use and maintenance of the landscape area, and the coloration is complimentary to the landscape area and adjacent development.

2.4 Root Barrier Protection Materials Material utilized in landscape areas to protect adjacent structures from damage as a result of tree root growth.

Trees installed adjacent to roads, curbs, driveways, walkways, driveways, parking areas, hard surface recreational facilities, and patios should have root guards installed to ensure the protection of those structures from root damage in the future. Root guards should extend to a minimum depth of 45cm.

Length and location of root barriers as per details L-25 to L-30 unless an alternate arrangement is justified due to the species of tree being installed and it’s rooting characteristics. This must be approved in writing by the Approving Officer.

Approved Materials:

• Deeproot Root Barrier UB18-2 or UB21-2, available Deeproot Tel: 1- 604-687-0899 • Reroot 600, available CityGreen Urban Landscape Solutions Tel: 1-866-282-2743


3 SITE FURNISHINGS 3.1 Park Benches Park benches are available in a wide variety of forms, shapes, materials and colours as both standard pre manufactured products and custom designed items. Proposed bench must be approved by the Approving Officer.

For efficiency and ease of maintenance the Municipality may direct the Consultant or Developer to utilise a specific make and model of bench

Generally the design of a proposed bench should be complementary to the site location, use and desired aesthetic character while addressing the following items:

• Ease of replacement and availability of replacement components • Vandal resistant fixtures and durable materials and finishes • Design to either accommodate skateboard use or include integrated skate deterrents. • Prioritise use of both recycled and recyclable materials for end of life waste reduction. • Prioritise locally sourced materials and fabrication – avoid exotic hardwoods • Accessible design – provide arms and back rests to allow easier use for elderly and

physically challenged users.

Approved Standard Benches:

• Wishbone Rutherford Wide Body bench with redwood recycled plastic slats, textured black metalwork. Available Wishbone Furnishings Tel: 1 866 626 0476

• Maglin MLB970 bench with dark brown HDPC slats and graphite powder coated metalwork. Available Maglin Site Furniture Tel: 1-888-271-8666

3.2 Bollards Bollards shall be installed where required to delineate pedestrian from vehicular traffic.

Custom or non-approved bollards permitted only with written approval by the Approving Officer.

Approved bollards:

• R-790 Bollard, available from Reliance Foundry, Tel: 1-888-735-5680 Removable or fixed base as required (see detail L-39 and L-40)

3.3 Trash Receptacles Trash Receptacles are available in a wide variety of forms, shapes, materials and colours as both standard pre manufactured products and custom designed items. Proposed Receptacle must be approved by the Municipality.

For efficiency and ease of maintenance the Municipality may direct the Consultant or Developer to utilise a specific make and model of bench

Generally the design of a proposed receptacle should be complementary to that selected for the park benches while addressing the following items:

• Ease of replacement and availability of replacement components • Vandal resistant fixtures and low maintenance, durable materials and finishes • Design to accommodate side mounted recyclables cage • Prioritise use of both recycled and recyclable materials for end of life waste reduction. • Prioritise locally sourced materials and fabrication e.g. avoid exotic hardwoods • Wildlife proof containers where interactions are likely to occur.


Approved Standard Trash Receptacles:

• Wishbone Modena Curved Top Receptacle MCTR-21with redwood recycled plastic slats, textured black metalwork. Available Wishbone Furnishings Tel: 1 866 626 0476

• Freedom 32 “Animal Resistant” Receptacle HF-32S redwood recycled plastic slats, textured black metalwork. Available Wishbone Furnishings Tel: 1 866 626 0476

• Maglin MLWR1400-32 Trash Container with dark brown HDPC slats and graphite powder coated metalwork. Available Maglin Site Furniture Tel: 1-888-271-8666

4 RETAINING WALLS All walls over 1.2m in height must have construction drawings sealed by a Professional Engineer.

The Approving Officer may require a safety rail installed on any walls exceeding 0.6m in height adjacent to an accessible surface.

Design should consider a planted bed or climbing vine on the face of wall to reduce the potential for graffiti.

If the retaining wall abuts mown turf area a 150mm wide concrete mowing strip must be installed at the base.

All proposed retaining wall structures and materials must conform to all applicable Municipal Bylaws and provincial Building Codes and is subject to approval by the local Municipality.

4.1 Drystack Boulder Rock material shall be structurally stable with no hidden fissures and be able to weather freeze thaw cycles and exposure to the elements with minimal degradation.

Colour and shape to reflect intended site location, context and use. If there is native bedrock or other rock structures in close proximity select material that is consistent in appearance and form.

Ideally utilise locally sourced material to reduce transportation costs.

4.2 Concrete & Concrete Unit Block Material, finish and colour selection to reflect intended site location, context and use.

Cast in place concrete wall to receive control joints to control cracking and foundation design reviewed by structural Engineer.

Cast in place concrete finish and sealing to be conducive to graffiti removal and minimising inflorescence.


5 PLAYGROUND EDGING, SURFACING, AND SUBGRADE Playground edging shall be as per details L-54 to 56.

Appropriate safety surfacing shall be installed around play equipment as per CSA Z614 Standards.

All playground areas must be positively drained with subsurface drainage provided as required.

Approved surfacing materials:

• Fibrar (or approved equal) engineered wood fibre with min 25mm depth drainage gravel layer sandwiched between layers of geotextile fabric.

• Clean pea gravel with geotextile layer separating them from subgrade.

5.1 Safety Fencing & Hand Rails See typical details L-35 to L-38. Locations and designs to confirmed on a site specific basis by the Approving Officer.

Minimum typical requirement will be Chain link Safety fencing (detail L-37) along all boundaries of municipal park properties. This requirement maybe varied by the Approving Officer where the location or surrounding context does not make this feasible.

5.2 Concrete Unit Pavers Concrete unit pavers are readily available in a variety of colours shapes and finishes to suit a variety of applications and aesthetic effects. Specified pavers must be suitable to the proposed site location and use and are subject to approval by the Approving Officer.

Pavers must be sized to accommodate appropriate loading where vehicular traffic is anticipated.

118 Section III – Standards for Maintenance

SECTION III - STANDARDS FOR MAINTENANCE

1 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS – MAINTENANCE Consideration of future maintenance requirements is a critical component to ensure a successful landscape design outcome. The design should recognize a hierarchy of maintenance dependent of site location, use, context, community expectation and, capital and long term maintenance budgets.

Within each site there may be a range areas with different levels of maintenance requirements, the BC Landscape Standard organizes these into several categories:

• Level 1 – Well Groomed • Level 2 - Groomed • Level 3 - Moderate • Level 4 - Openspace/Play • Level 5 – Background and Natural Areas

The design shall clearly identify the various maintenance requirements for each part of the site.

Sustainable design practices are encouraged wherever possible to minimize long term maintenance requirements though establishment of naturalized areas, selecting appropriate plants for the site soils, aspect, microclimate and most importantly the available growing space.

Use of indigenous species within level 4 and 5 maintenance areas with a long term succession based strategy that requires very low levels of maintenance is encouraged.

2 PRESCRIPTIVE STANDARDS – MAINTENANCE In general, maintenance shall be in accordance with section 14 of the BC Landscape Standard – Landscape Maintenance.

2.1 Mowing • Grass length shall be mowed to the heights and frequency as set in table 14-13 of the BC

Landscape Standard • No damage to turf. • No damage to trees, shrubs or other park features such as scraped bark on trees and

shrubs, bent or scraped park furniture. • No areas have been missed. • Prior to and after mowing, no highly visible debris, paper, etc. have been left on turf. • No more than 5% scalped turf • Prior to and after mowing, no more than 1 piece of highly visible litter per 100 m2 on turf. • No lubricant or fuel spills on turf or non-turf areas.

2.2 Small Mowing / Power Trim Desired results:

• No areas have been missed • No scalped turf • Prior to and after mowing, no visible litter on level 1 Parks and no more than:


• 1 piece of litter per 100 m2 – Level 2 and 3 Parks • 2 pieces of litter per 100 m2 – Level 4 and 5 Parks • No damage to trees, shrubs or other park features such as scraped bark on trees and

shrubs, bent or scraped park furniture • No highly visible grass clippings on level 1 and 2 turf areas. Clippings should not

accumulate to the point of creating an appearance problem or inhibit lawn growth on level 3 to 5 areas.

• Grass clippings should not be present on sidewalks, pathways or any hard surfaces for any class of park.

• Grass clipping should not be present in flower/shrub/rock bed causing contamination the specified materials in the bed.

• No lubricant or fuel spills on turf or non-turf areas.

2.3 Litter Control Desired results:

• Removal of all unsafe “Ad Hoc” structures (tree forts, etc.) unless said structures form part of approved design.

• Fence lines cleaned of highly visible accumulated litter • Lack of highly visible litter per 100 m2 on turf • Level 1 - not to exceed 0 pieces per 100 m2 • Level 2 – not to exceed 1 pieces per 100 m2 • Level 3 - 5 not to exceed 2 pieces per 100 m2

2.4 Garbage Receptacle Emptying / Recycling All bags 75% full or over shall be replaced

Desired Results:

• All garbage cans must have a plastic garbage bag inside • All garbage containers shall remain free of crusted garbage build-up, objectionable odors,

wasps or other insects from being attracted to the garbage can. • Area around garbage container shall be litter free. All garbage bags, hazardous material,

bio-hazardous waste is to be safely disposed of according to applicable safety procedures.


2.5 Spring & Fall Clean-up Desired Results:

• All possible areas within the site swept in a safe and efficient manner. • No litter or visible debris left on the turf. • Proper disposal of all hazardous material including bio-hazardous waste, in compliance to

applicable policy. • All debris piles removed from the site in a safe and efficient manner without damage to

trees, shrubs or other park features. • No damage to parks buildings or amenities. • No lubricant or fuel spills on turf or non-turf areas.

2.6 Fertilize Desired results for maintenance level 1 - 4 areas:

• Application is even and uniform throughout. • No spillage of fertilizer. • No burning of turf grass. • No discolouring (streaking) of turf. • No damage to trees, shrubs or other features such as scraped bark or trees and shrubs,

bent or scraped park furniture. • No lubricant or fuel spills on turf or non-turf areas.

Note: When fertilizing, stay two meters away from tennis courts to avoid material being applied on playing area. Use hand spreader around fence line of tennis courts.

2.7 Aerate Desired results for maintenance level 1 - 4 areas:

• Aerator holes / cores should be 3 inches deep, 3 inches or less apart and about ¾ inch in diameter.

• No damage to trees, shrubs or other park features such as scraped bark on trees and bent or scraped park furniture, or damages to irrigation system.

• No ripping or tearing turf (caused by sharp turns). • No missed areas. • No lubricant or fuel spills on turf or non-turf areas.

2.8 Top Dressing Desired results for maintenance level 1 - 4 areas:

• Park site to be prepared for top dressing as required (i.e. Removal of rocks and litter. Mowing, sweeping, aerating).

• No damage to trees, shrubs, turf or other park features such as scraped bark on trees, bent or scraped park furniture.

• Accurate topsoil requirement calculations. • Appropriate soil mixture piling. • Loam spread and matted evenly throughout designated area. • No areas missed with top dressing material.


• No remaining piles. • No damage to turf caused by loam piles. • No top dressing material on sidewalks or roadways. • No tools are to be left at the work site after completion of task. • No lubricant or fuel spills on turf or non-turf areas.

2.9 Chemical Weed Control Only use when mechanical or hand weeding is not practical.

Public notification must be posted for 48 hrs. following herbicide application.

Desired Results:

• No lubricant, chemical or fuel spills on turfed or non-turfed areas. • Threshold of 5 weeds per m2 attained on all classes (spot spraying see biocide report). • No damage to trees, shrubs or other park features as a result of spraying operations. • No spray (herbicide) damage to non-targeted vegetation. • No spray (herbicide) damage within 10 meters of the edge of playground or tot lots. • All signage removed after 48 hrs.

2.10 Tree Well Maintenance Desired results for maintenance level 1 - 3 areas:

• Tree well to be cultivated and mulched. • Well should be free of weeds and of a standard size approximately one (1) meter in

diameter. • Tree well should be intact and able to hold water. • If well is mulched, mulch should be spread evenly to a depth of 4 inches and not piled

against or touching trunk flare of tree as this can rot the wood causing decay or even death of the tree.

• All visible litter shall be removed.

2.11 Shrub Bed Maintenance Desired results for cultivated beds:

• No damage such as broken branches or scraped bark. • Shrub bed area is cultivated and free of weeds. • No more than 5% of shrubs dead, missing or diseased. • No more than 5% of broken, dead or diseased shrub branches remaining in .bed • Shrub bed 90% free of weeds. • All visible litter removed.

Desired results for mulched beds:

• Shrub bed to be weeded and cultivated before mulch is applied. • Mulch to be spread evenly to a depth of 4 inches. • Mulch should not be piled against the base of trees or shrubs as this can rot the wood,

causing decay or even death of the plant. • No more than 5% of shrubs dead, missing or diseased.


• No more than 5% of broken, dead or diseased shrub branches remaining in bed. • Shrub beds 90% free of weeds. • All visible litter removed.

2.12 Flower Bed Fertilizing Desired results for level 1-4 maintenance areas:

• Fertilization of the flower displays in a safe and efficient manner, using the correct rates and frequencies as recommended by manufacturer based on soil test results. Organic fertilizers and compost application is recommended where practical.

• Healthy, vigorous and colourful flower displays in part as a result of an ongoing effective fertilizer program.

• Even coverage of target plants, without significant spillage. • No symptoms of toxicity as a result of over fertilization. • No significant salt accumulations. • No fertilizer concentrates spilled on flower bed or surrounding area. • All immediate hazards removed. • All tools and equipment removed from site following completion of fertilizing activities.

2.13 Irrigation Maintenance Successful completion of irrigation activities including:

• Service initiation. • DCV Testing. • System Turn-on. • All repairs required in order that system operate effectively. • All systems workable. • No water leaking from system. • No debris or parts left on site. • No irrigation boxes that have lids missing or in poor state of repair. Box lids are safe and

locked. • Parks water value and drain rod are visible, to grade and painted red after. • All sprinkler heads/turf valves are to grade so as not to be a tripping hazard.


2.14 Pathway / Roads / Parking Lot Maintenance Desired results:

• To be maintained in order that they can be used for their intended purpose. • To be inspected and repaired / renovated on a regular basis either as required or as

scheduled. • To be maintained in a manner that meets all legislated requirement including safety

requirements. • Free of hazards and obstructions. • No damage to trees, fences, turf or other park features such as scraped bark on trees,

bent or scraped park furniture or fences. • No lubricant or fuel spills on turf or non-turf areas. • No piles of debris or excess material left on site as a result of maintenance completed.

2.15 Snow Removal Desired results for level 1-4 maintenance areas:

• Free of hazards and obstructions. • 98% clear of snow. • Sand placed on 90% of slippery areas. • No damage to trees, fences, turf or other features such as scraped bark on trees, bent or

scraped park furniture or fence. • No snow piled onto shrub/planting beds. • No lubricant or fuel spills on turf or non-turf areas. • No snow pushed onto private property or obstructing private entryways. • No snow sprayed onto vehicles parked along pathway or sidewalk.

2.16 Park Features • All parks features shall be fully functional, as designed, at all times • All parks features shall be installed as to specifications and standards • All parks features shall be maintained in safe operating condition • All parks features shall meet or exceed all legislated requirements • All park features shall be inspected and maintained on a regular basis as scheduled or as

required.

2.17 Building Maintenance / Janitorial 2.17.1 Building Maintenance: Desired Results:

• All vandalism reported according to procedure. • All breaches of security reported according to procedure. • All buildings safe and secure. • All fans, pumps, filters, furnaces, valves must be checked on a regular scheduled basis

and be in working order. • All lights and other electrical devices in working order.


2.17.2 Building Janitorial: Desired Results:

• Accumulations of water, mud and dirt must not be present on more than 5% of the floor surface (after cleaning).

• Broken glass or obvious litter must not be present. • Adherence to spill cleanup procedures and WHMIS policy. • Smudges, spots, stains, watermarks etc. must not be present on more than 5% of any wall surface or mirrors. • Waste and sanitary receptacles must not be more than 75% full. • Overflowing conditions and piles of litter around receptacles are not acceptable. • All dispensers (toilet paper, paper towels, etc.) shall not be less than 25% full • All toilets and sinks shall be operable. No plugged, leaking or overflowing toilets or sinks.

2.18 Playground Inspection / Maintenance Desired Results:

• Inspections completed as per established inspection schedule. • All formal (inspection report) documentation completed. • All minor repairs completed. • Any major repairs scheduled as per inspection report. • Playground safe for public use.

2.19 Tree Pruning Tree pruning is to be in accordance with the best practices as published by the International Society of Arboriculture.

Desired results for level 1-4 maintenance areas:

• Tree is cleaned of all dead, diseased and broken branches. • All clearance, both vertical and visual (for safety reasons) are maintained. • No low hanging branches that will interfere with vehicles, equipment, pedestrians or signs. • An obvious, prominent central leader is evident (if species and growth habit of tree allows). • Structural defects are mitigated (e.g. Hazards, dead branches removed). • The habit of growth for the species is maintained. • No stubs, flush cuts or stumps and tearing. Final cuts should result in a flat surface with

adjacent bark firmly attached. • No more than 20% of the total live canopy and 20% of living wood on any branch removed

in one season. • No debris from pruning operations on roadway sidewalk or private property.


2.20 Water Features (Fountains / Ponds) Desired results for level 1-2 maintenance areas:

2.20.1 Summer Operation: • All areas/structures related to water feature shall be safe and secure. • All fans, pumps, filters, valves or other water volume regulatory devices must be checked

on a regular scheduled basis and must be in proper working order. • All lights and/or other electrical devices must be in proper working order. • All vandalism and/or security breaches must be reported according to procedure. • All legislated requirements must be adhered to, such as WHMIS, ISO14001, OH&S, etc.

2.20.2 Winterisation: • Unless specifically designed to permit winter operation fountains must be winterised and

drained as per designer’s maintenance manual. • Any vulnerable fixtures or lights to be secured to deter vandalism while the water feature is

dry. All areas/structures related to water feature shall be safe and secure. • Any chemically treated water must be drained as per Municipal swimming pool

requirements.

2.21 Fence Maintenance Desired Results:

• No damage to trees, shrubs or other park features such as scraped bark on trees and shrubs, bent or scraped park furniture.

• No lubricant or fuel spills on turf or non-turf areas . • No fill piled up around posts. • No debris (i.e. rocks, pieces of wood, cable, pieces of fabric, tie wires, etc.) left lying

around repaired fence. • No broken or bent posts. • Cable and/or fabric must be tightened as required. • Fence must be straight and at same consistent height throughout. • All gates must be installed according to standard procedures and fully operational.

2.22 Tennis Courts Desired Results:

• Nets neat and straight and at the correct height. • No surface dirt, gravel or other debris on court. • No graffiti on practice board. • All fencing, furniture and signs are repaired. • Any colour failure on court surface to be addressed as per Maintenance Plan Schedules

(Details L-18 to 20).


2.23 Playfields Desired Results:

• Ensure that in all fields where shale is used, that all edges where shale meets the grass are straight.

• Shale should be loosened regularly, to a depth of 1 inch. • Areas adjacent to the grass to be level • Ball diamond infield and soccer fields should be weed free. • No holes in playing fields. • No glass or other hazardous materials on the playing surface. • Level, non-protruding surface. • Ensure that all fixtures and amenities on or around play fields are inspected. • regularly and maintained in order to provide a safe playfield area (i.e. goal posts,

backstops, players benches, dugouts, bleachers, etc.). • Ensure that all irrigation sprinkler heads and/or box lids are set to grade, so as to not

create a tripping hazard. • Ensure that all irrigation box lids fitted properly to boxes and locked. • Ensure that all lighting and electrical amenities are maintained properly and in good

working condition.

SECTION IV – CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS (MMCD GOLD SUPPLEMENTARY SPECIFICATIONS)

Included in this section are the following supplementary specifications:

02110-S Demolition and salvage

02210-S Site grading

02226-S Aggregates and granular materials

02512-S Hot-mix asphalt concrete paving

02515-S Unit paving

02523-S Concrete walks curbs and gutters

02667-S Irrigation system

02870-S Site furnishings

02872-S Play Equipment

02873-S Protective surfacing

02921-S Topsoil and finish grading

02934-S Hydraulic seeding

02950-S Planting of trees shrubs and groundcovers

02970-S Park and landscape maintenance

03300-S Precast and cast-in-place concrete

MMCD RDNO (Parks, Recreation & Culture) SUPPLEMENTARY SPECIFICATION

DEMOLITION and SALVAGE

SECTION 02110-S PAGE 1 OF 4

JULY 2013

1.0 GENERAL 1. Section 02110-S refers to those portions of the work that are

unique to the salvage, demolition and/or removal of existing site items and materials. This section must be referenced to and interpreted simultaneously with all other sections pertinent in the works described herein.

1.1 Related Work .1 Shrub and Tree Preservation (Section 02104) .2 Clearing and Grubbing (Section 02111) .3 Site Grading (Section 02210) .4 Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling (Section 02223) .5 Dust Control (Section 02242) .6 Topsoil and Finish Grading (Section 02921)

1.2 Demolition .1 Dispose of all demolished items and materials off-site unless specified otherwise in the Contract Documents.

.2 Except as specified in the Contract Documents disposal of

demolished items and materials on RDNO property will not be permitted without the written approval of the Contract Administrator.

.3 Dispose demolished items and materials on non-RDNO

property only upon approval from property owner and provided it is legal and all necessary permits and approvals have been obtained and all necessary fees paid.

1.3 Salvage .1 Salvage work includes the removal, protection, transport and storage of salvaged items and materials identified in the Contract Documents.

.2 Unless specified otherwise in the Contract Documents or

approved by the Contract Administrator, all items and materials identified for salvage become property of Owner.

.3 Except as indicated in the Contract Documents salvage work

will be the responsibility of the Contractor. .4 Except as specified in the Contract Documents for re-use or

stockpiling, remove and store salvaged items and materials off-site

eburke

Typewritten Text

Section IV - Construction Standards (MMCD Gold Supplementary Specifications)

eburke

Typewritten Text

eburke

Typewritten Text

eburke

Typewritten Text

eburke

Typewritten Text




JULY 2013

1.4 Protection of Work,

Property and Public .1 Comply with General Conditions, Clause 4.3, Protection of

Work, Property and Public.

1.5 Approvals, Permits and Fees

.1 Comply with General Conditions, Clause 20, Laws, Notices, Permits and fees.

1.6 Measurement and Payment

.1 Payment for salvage includes the dismantling, protection, transport and storage or stockpiling of the salvaged items and materials. Payment for salvage will be made by separate item and material as shown on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices.

.2 Payment for demolition includes demolition, transport and

disposal of all items and materials shown on the Contract Drawings. Payment for demolition will be made by separate item and material as shown on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices.

.3 No payment will be made for demolition, removal or disposal

of items and materials not shown in the Schedule of Quantities and Prices or in excess of the features and limits shown on the Contract Drawings.

.4 All costs incurred as a result of unauthorized and illegal

demolition, removal or disposal are the responsibility of the Contractor.

2.0 PRODUCTS

NOT APPLICABLE

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation .1 Prior to demolition and salvage verify locations and limits of items and materials to be removed and identify methods to undertake dismantling, protection, removal, storage and disposal.

.2 Protect existing features and surfaces not scheduled for

removal from damage. .3 Coordinate scheduling of demolition and salvage with related

work.

3.2 Demolition .1 Decommission utilities and irrigation system prior to demolition and salvage.

.2 Take care to limit impacts of demolition work to the site of the




JULY 2013

feature being demolished or to the extent of the demolition area shown on the Contract Drawings.

.3 Time is of the essence in demolition and removal of items and

materials. .4 Report any hazardous materials to Contract Administrator.

3.3 Salvage .1 Dismantle salvage items with care to prevent structural and cosmetic damage to the items.

.2 Keep all components, fittings and appurtenances of salvage

items together. .3 Remove salvaged items and materials to storage and stockpile

sites as soon as possible after dismantling.

3.4 Storage and Stockpiling

.1 Store salvaged items and materials that are to be permanently removed from the site at the locations indicated in the Contract Documents.

.2 Store salvaged and stockpiled materials that are to be re-used

on the site at on-site locations approved by the Contract Administrator and/or at off-site locations provided by the Contractor.

.3 For items and materials to be stored at City facilities off-site,

coordinate timing and location of storage at those sites with the Contract Administrator 72 hours in advance of delivery to storage site.

.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection and

security of re-used items and stockpiled materials from weather, erosion, damage, theft and vandalism.

3.5 Disposal .1 Dispose of demolished items and materials as work progresses and do not accumulate.

.2 Fires and burning of demolished material on-site is not

permitted without approval of the Contract Administrator. All fires to conform to Provincial, Regional and Municipal regulations.

.3 Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with

Provincial, Regional and Municipal regulations. .4 Make all effort to recycle materials wherever possible.




JULY 2013

3.6 Clean-up and

Restoration .1 Leave location of removed items and materials in a condition

suitable for immediate follow-up of related work. .2 If no other improvements are scheduled for salvaged and

demolished locations, restore them to a grade and surface that existed prior to demolition and salvage and/or that matches the condition of adjacent undisturbed areas.

END OF SECTION


SITE GRADING SECTION 02210-S

PAGE 1 OF 1 JULY 2013

1.4 Measurement and

Payment .1 Replace clause with:

“Measurement for topsoil stripping including stockpiling for re-use will be made on an area basis for the stripped areas and depths shown on Contract Drawings.”

.2 Replace clause with:

“Payment for rough site grading includes cut and fill excavation and its on-site redistribution and compaction to design elevations and grades with off-site disposal of surplus materials and import of all specified fill materials.”

.3 Remove clause:

.4 Remove clause: .6 Remove clause: .7 Remove clause:

END OF SECTION

This page is intentionally left blank to support double-sided printing


AGGREGATES AND GRANULAR MATERIALS


JULY 2013

2.12 Crusher Chips /

Reject Screenings .1 Add clause:

“To be granular crusher chips, rock dust or reject screenings with fractured edges of consistent colour, size and texture throughout. Material shall be selected with enough fines to enable compaction to minimum 98% Modified Proctor Density or as otherwise specified. Once compacted the material shall not lose its compaction under normal pedestrian and bicycle traffic and shall not slide or shift underfoot. Material shall be free of all organic matter. Contractor shall submit a sample of material to Contract Administrator for approval prior to installation.”

END OF SECTION



HOT-MIX ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING


JULY 2013

1.5 Measurement and

Payment .3 Replace first paragraph with:

“Payment for asphaltic concrete sidewalks, pathways, driveways, in-fill strips and patching includes all construction joint preparation, supply, placement and compaction of all granular base and granular subbase and supply, placement and compaction of all asphaltic concrete and adjustment of frames, covers and lids of all utilities affected. Measurement for asphaltic concrete sidewalks, pathways, driveways, in-fill strips and patching will be made separately for each specified type for the actual area of asphaltic concrete placed, the thickness of which may be checked by the Contract Administrator as given in paragraph 1.5.2 in this Section.”

END OF SECTION



UNIT PAVING SECTION 02515-S


1.6 Measurement and


“Payment for excavation, embankment fill (subgrade fill) and subgrade preparation will be made under payment items in Section 02515 as shown in Schedule of Quantities and Prices.”

.2 Replace clause with: “Payment for granular base and granular subbase (if required) will be made under payment items in Section 02515 as shown in Schedule of Quantities and Prices.”

.3 Replace clause with: “Payment for unit paving includes granular laying course and specified unit pavers to provide the patterns shown on Contract Drawings.”

END OF SECTION



CONCRETE WALKS, CURBS AND GUTTERS


JULY 2013

1.4 Measurement and


“Payment for excavation, embankment fill (subgrade fill) and subgrade preparation under concrete walks, curbs and gutters will be made under payment items in Section 02523 as shown in Schedule of Quantities and Prices.”

.2 Replace clause with: “Payment for granular base and granular sub-base under concrete walks, curbs and gutters will be made under payment items in Section 02523 as shown in Schedule of Quantities and Prices.”

.3 Replace clause with: “Payment for curbs and gutters will cover all straight and curve sections and will be made separately for each specified type.”

.4 Replace clause with: Payment for concrete walks, curbs and gutters includes all formwork, reinforcement, construction joints, expansion joints and finishes specified on Contract Drawings.

.5 Remove clause.

END OF SECTION



IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

1.0 GENERAL .1 Section 02667 refers to those portions of the work that are

unique to the complete installation of a fully automatic underground irrigation system including all necessary preparatory work and all electrical, wiring and plumbing connections, and maintenance work during the guarantee period. This section must be referenced to and interpreted simultaneously with all other sections pertinent to the works described herein.

.2 Any items not specifically noted, but reasonably necessary for

the installation of a complete and functioning irrigation system shall be furnished as part of the work.

.3 The completed system shall efficiently and uniformly irrigate all

areas and perform as required by these specifications. .4 Actual locations of heads, pipe and valves must be

coordinated with the landscaping, building and physical features and confirmed with the RDNO prior to installation.

.5 The Contract Administrator must authorize any and all

changes to these specifications in writing.

1.1 Codes and Permits .1 All work shall be done in strict accordance with applicable plumbing, health and electrical codes and other codes as applicable. Requirements of these specifications not conflicting therewith, but exceeding code requirements shall govern.

.2 Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary

permits and approvals required to undertake and complete the work and shall include costs for such permits and approvals in the tendered prices.

1.2 Definitions .1 For the purposes of Work in this Section, and unless otherwise stated or qualified, the word “Drawings” includes Contract Drawings of the irrigation system and/or approved Shop Drawings of the irrigation system.

.2 In addition to the meaning ascribed to it in MMCD General

Conditions, and for the purposes of this Section, the word “site” shall mean contiguous public land adjacent to the place of work that is or will be landscaped, whether it is part of this Contract or it is other work.

1.3 Irrigation System

Design Standards .1 The irrigation system shall be designed to provide complete

irrigation coverage and be compatible with the work of this Contract and with other work on the site.


IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

.2 Site specific requirements for the design of the irrigation

system shall be obtained from the RDNO. .3 The irrigation system shall be designed to operate properly

and within the requirements of this section based on a 20% reduction in the point of connection water main static pressure.

.4 The irrigation system shall be sized and designed to operate

properly and within the requirements of this section based on a 20% increase in the landscape areas to be irrigated.

.5 The irrigation system shall be sized and designed to apply a

minimum of 7mm of water per day over 100% of the landscaped areas of the site within a nightly watering period of 4 to 6 hours duration.

.6 Unless otherwise required by the RDNO or water utility having

jurisdiction over the site, the irrigation system shall be provided with a booster pump, metered water service, including a plumbing permit, backflow prevention device, backflow prevention test results and establishment of water accounts with the utility provider.

.7 Unless otherwise required by the RDNO or the electrical utility

having jurisdiction over the site, the irrigation system shall be provided with a metered electrical service, including electrical permit and establishment of electrical accounts with the utility provider.

.8 The location of the water service, controller cabinet and

irrigation vault shall be coordinated with the RDNO and shown on the Drawings. Locate the controller in a location that allows for maximum viewing of the irrigation system in operation.

.9 Do not locate cabinets, vaults or boxes in hard surface areas

or features, except as approved by the Contract Administrator. Where possible locate cabinets, vaults or boxes in planting beds or, if none are suitably located, in turf or grass areas. The entire cabinet, vault or box shall be located within said area.

.10 A backflow prevention device is required for all water service

connections. A double check valve assembly (DCVA) shall be used as the backflow prevention device, except where a reduced pressure backflow assembly (RPBA) is required or unless required otherwise by the water utility or the provincial Department of Health.

.11 Calculate the allowable voltage drop on common and zone

signal wires. Maximum voltage loss shall be five (5) per cent. Indicate wire locations, sizes and voltage on the Shop Drawing.


IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

.12 Irrigation sleeves shall be used for running irrigation lines

under hard surfaces and features. The end of sleeves shall be marked with stakes and with a piece of detectable metal below grade at each end of the sleeve.

.13 Pipes shall be sized to allow for a maximum flow of 5ft/sec

(1.5m/sec). .14 The valves of the irrigation system shall be of the same brand

as those used elsewhere on the site. .15 The sprinklers of the irrigation system shall be of the same

brand as those used elsewhere on the site. .16 Sprinklers shall be grouped into like zones that provide

coverage for the same landscape type (e.g. lawn, planting bed, restoration area) and shall have the same precipitation rates, matched through their arcs of coverage.

.17 Sprinklers shall provide head-to-head coverage of landscaped

areas within the zone, with no overspray outside of the landscape area. In turf areas heads shall be laid out in a triangular pattern.

.18 Irrigation design must ensure that completed irrigation works

conform to the BC Plumbing Code and the BC Electrical Code.

1.3 Quality Assurance .1 All irrigation work shall be done by an experienced and competent Irrigation Contractor having the capabilities and personnel necessary for all phases of the work specified.

.2 The irrigation designer and the irrigation installer shall be a

member in good standing of the Irrigation Industry Association of British Columbia (IIABC). The Contractor must, at the request of the Contract Administrator, provide proof of membership and proof of having worked in the industry for a minimum of five (5) years and provide a list of clients for whom similar sized irrigation projects have been satisfactorily completed.

.3 Obtain field assistance from pipe manufacturer or supplier as

necessary to ensure correct installation and adhesive techniques are used on joints.

.4 Do not cement pipe and fittings under wet or muddy

conditions, and follow the manufacturer’s recommendations. .5 All materials shall be new and without flaws and of a quality

and performance as specified.


IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

.6 Waste and excess material shall remain the property of the

Contractor and shall be removed from the site prior to issuance of Substantial Performance.

.7 All equipment from various manufacturers shall be compatible

with other equipment in the system.

1.5 Substitutions .1 Where materials are specified by brand name and model number, such specifications shall be deemed to facilitate a description of the materials and material quality and shall establish a standard for performance and quality against which proposed substitutes will be evaluated.

.2 Proposed substitutes, including sufficient descriptive literature

and product samples to permit evaluation, must be submitted to the Contract Administrator at least two weeks prior to tender closing time or two weeks prior to proposed installation.

.3 Purchase or installation of materials that are not specified will

not be paid for unless they have been:

.1 Reviewed and approved by the Contract Administrator and the RDNO as an Approved Equal, per Section 7.0, Instructions to Tenderers; or

.2 Reviewed and approved by the Contract Administrator and the RDNO as a Change Order, per Section 7.3 of the General Conditions.

Installation of materials that are not specified and have not been approved as an equal shall be removed and replaced with the specified material at the Contractors expense.

1.6 Submittals .1 Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings of the irrigation system are required for all and any aspect of the irrigation system not included in the Contract Drawings. Shop Drawings shall be prepared on a to-scale base plan of the site and shall provide the following information:

.1 Name and contact information of irrigation designer. .2 Name and contact information of water utility provider. .3 Name and contact information of electrical utility provider. .4 Extent and location of grass and plant material, as well as

hard surfaces, civil structures and utilities. .5 Location, sizing and material descriptions of service

connection(s) and related components, controllers and control system components, mainline and lateral piping, control valves, isolation valves, quick coupling valves and irrigation heads.


IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

.6 Static water pressure at the water service connection

downstream of the water meter. .7 Coverage area for each zone, including a table that

describes the dynamic water pressure, precipitation rate and water consumption for each zone (total U.S. gallons per minute).

Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator, for review, comment and approval by the RDNO.

.2 As-constructed Drawings:

Maintain and submit a record drawing of irrigation construction. Prior to Total Performance, prepare and submit As-constructed Drawings of the complete irrigation system. The drawings shall be prepared by a surveyor retained by the Contractor to survey and record the exact location of all surface features of the work and indicate the alignment of all underground pipe and wiring between those surface features. The drawings shall identify each zone numerically, complete with the precipitation rate and U.S. gallons per minute per zone. Provide Contract Administrator with a neat and legible original hard copy and digital copies (in Adobe *.pdf and AutoCAD *.dwg formats) of As-constructed Drawings suitable as a permanent record.

.3 Operating Manual: Prior to Total Performance, prepare and submit an Operating Manual to the Contract Administrator. Manual to include equipment operating instructions, maintenance instructions including winterization procedure, product literature, parts lists, irrigation schedule, and other related material. Submission to include two (2) sets of all special tools, keys, and equipment required to commission or maintain the system.

.4 Product Warranties:

Provide Contract Administrator with product warranty documentation for all controllers, meters, electronic components and valves. Date the warranties with the date of Substantial Completion.

.5 Permits and Test Results:

Provide Contract Administrator with signed and approved copies of all required permits, including the following:

.1 Water service connection permit; .2 Electrical service connection permit; .3 Backflow test report; .4 Electrical permits, inspection report and electrical utility

account information; .5 Plumbing permits, inspection reports and water utility

account information;


IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

.6 Low voltage declarations.

.6 Irrigation Head Replacement Costs:

Provide Contract Administrator with unit price quote for replacement of each type of irrigation head damaged by vandalism or abuse during the guarantee period.

1.7 Scheduling .1 Coordinate and schedule work such that no damage occurs to materials or work before or after installation.

.2 Coordinate work schedule with that of other trades on-site. .3 Prior to starting work verify the location of the water supply

and electrical supply and obtain necessary permits for connection to same.

.4 Plan, schedule and execute work to ensure a supply of water

for landscape establishment and maintenance purposes at adequate times, in adequate amounts and pressures, for plant survival and satisfactory irrigation of all landscaped areas.

1.8 Measurement for Payment

.1 Water Service: Supply and installation of the water service will be measured as a lump sum. The work shall include the supply, installation, testing and adjustment of the connection to water source, booster pumps, master valves, water meters, flow sensors, backflow prevention device, blowouts, vaults, lids, fittings, permits, fees, excavation, backfill, restoration work and incidentals necessary for the proper installation and operation of a complete water service to the irrigation system. This item shall be paid upon completion of the said work and submission of permits and account information.

.2 Electrical Service:

Supply and installation of the electrical service will be measured as a lump sum. The work shall include the permits, fees, supply, installation and testing of the connection to electrical source, excavation, backfill, restoration work and incidentals necessary for the proper installation and operation of a complete electrical service to the irrigation system.

.3 Control System:

Supply and installation of the control system will be measured as a lump sum. The work shall include the supply, installation, testing and adjustment of irrigation controllers, transmitters, decoders, conduits, cabinets, concrete boxes, lids, fittings, permits, fees, excavation, backfill, restoration work and incidentals necessary for the proper installation and operation of a complete irrigation control system, including necessary testing, programming and adjusting the irrigation system, shall


IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

be included under Control System.

.4 Pipes, Valves and Sprinklers:

Supply and installation of the pipes and valves will be measured as a lump sum. The work shall include the supply, installation, testing and adjustment of irrigation pipe, sleeves, zone control valves, control wire, drain valves, isolation valves, pressure regulators, swing joint assemblies, sprinklers, emitters, fittings, boxes, lids, excavation, backfill, restoration work and incidentals necessary for the proper installation and operation of a complete irrigation system.

.5 As-constructed Drawings:

Payment for As-constructed Drawings will be measured as a lump sum.

.6 Maintenance:

Payment for irrigation system operation, winterization and spring start-up during the guarantee period will be measured as a lump sum.

1.9 Inspections and Testing

.1 Refer to General Conditions, Clause 4.12, Inspections. .2 Prior to issuance of Substantial Performance the Contractor

shall, in the presence of the Contract Administrator, conduct the following tests:

.1 Pressure test; .2 Coverage test; and .3 System test.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 Water Service and Meter

.1 For water service supplied by the RDNO water utility the water meter shall be supplied by Corix unless specified otherwise.

.2 For water service supplied by a utility other than the RDNO

water utility, the water meter shall be supplied as required by that utility.

.3 Water meter shall be sized to conform to the mainline diameter

unless specified otherwise.

2.2 Electric Service and Meter

.1 Except as specified otherwise the electric service shall be a surge protected minimum 15 amp service and shall include a four plug GFI receptacle.

.2 Except as specified otherwise the electric meter shall be

supplied as required by FortisBC or BC Hydro.


IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

2.3 Backflow Prevention Device

.1 Acceptable double check valve assemblies (DCVA) include the following:

1. Conbraco 40-100 Series; or 2. Watts Series 007,709, c/w NRS

.2 Acceptable reduced pressure backflow assemblies (RPBA)

include the following:

1. Conbraco 40-200 Series; or 2. Watts Series 909

2.4 Blow-out Device

.1 Blow-out devices shall be as follows: Mainline diameter Mainline

diameter Brand and

Model

¾” to 2” (19mm to 50mm)

Quick coupler on a 1” (25mm) swing joint assembly

Hunter HQ-5-RC;

RainBird 5RC; or Toro 474-00

2½” to 6” (63mm to 152mm)

Threaded 2” (50mm) PVC plug, inserted horizontally

n/a

2.5 Pressure Reducing Valve

.1 Acceptable water pressure reducing valves include the following:

.1 Watts Series 25 AUB-Z3

2.6 Flow Sensor .1 Acceptable flow sensors include the following:

.1 Data Industrial models IR-250B, IR-228PV, 220BR; or

.2 Rain Bird models FS100B, FS150P, FS200P, FS300P, FS400P and FS350B.

2.7 Master Valve .1 Acceptable master valves include the following:

.1 Hunter ICV;

.2 Rain Bird PEB;

.3 Toro P-220;

.4 Singer106-SC; or

.5 Watts 113.

2.8 Vaults and Lids .1 Acceptable vaults and matching lids include the following:


IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

Concrete Vault (by Kon Kast)

Aluminum Lid (by Excel Metals)

# 1102 # 1031 # 1032 # 1060

# 1060R

# 3974-2 # 4840-1 # 11040-1 # 2436-5 # 2436-5

2.9 Irrigation Cabinet .1 Acceptable irrigation cabinets shall be by Kelowna Steel Fabricators and include the following:

.1 Single post # KSF-11; or .2 Double post # KSH-21.

.2 Irrigation cabinet shall be painted with one coat of zinc

chromate primer by General Paint or Tremclad, and two coats of General Paint Exterior Alkyd, Black Colour

2.10 Irrigation Controller .1 Acceptable irrigation controllers and associated components include the following:

Rain Bird Toro

Central Controller

CCU-6-W; or CCU-28-W n/a

Satellite Controller

ESP-SAT two-wire; ESP-SAT link

radio; or ESP-Site

Sentinel Satellite Assembly w. key pad; or Sentinel Map-to field; or

Sentinel Wireless Output Board

Controller Features

Wall mount, with 12, 16, 24, 32 or 40 station field

satellite

Wall mount, with 12, 24, 36 or 48

station field satellite

Relay Device

Link radio modem kit #RMK-450, w.

450-470MHz narrow band, incl.

antenna

Lo Pro VRA antenna assembly,

w 450-470MHz, incl. end connector on cable w. surface

mount compatible

Antenna from Woods Communications

from Van Kel Distributors

.2 The actual controller and associated components to be used

shall be as directed by the RDCO based on compatibility with the centralized irrigation control system.

2.11 Pulse Decoder .1 Acceptable pulse decoders include the following:

.1 Rain Bird M51200


IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

2.12 Pulse Output

Transmitter .1 Acceptable pulse output transmitters include the following:

.1 Data Industrial 600-15; or

.2 Rain Bird PT322

2.13 Solenoid Valve .1 Acceptable solenoid valves include the following:

.1 Hunter ICV

.2 Rain Bird PEB; or

.3 Toro P-220

2.14 Pressure Regulating Module

.1 Acceptable pressure regulating modules include the following:

.1 Hunter Accu-Set;

.2 Rainbird PRS-Dial; or

.3 Toro EZReg

2.15 Isolation Valve .1 Acceptable isolation valves include the following:

.1 Red & White model 206, clow resistant wedge with non-rising stem and 2” square operating nut valves.

2.16 Valve Box .1 Acceptable valve boxes and matching lids shall be Carson L-series and include the following:

Valve Box

(by Carson) Matching Lid (by Carson)

# 1419-12 # 1220-12 # 1324-12 # 1324-15 # 1730-12 # 1730-15 # 1730-18

# 1419-3B # 1220-3B # 1324-3L # 1324-3L # 1730-3B # 1730-3B # 1730-3B

.2 Valve box shall be green in colour. .3 Locking device of lid shall be stainless steel bolts with

appropriate washers or a captive L-bolt lock

2.17 Control Wire .1 Wire, breakers, conduits and related materials that comprise the electrical supply to the controller shall be CSA approved.

.2 Control wire from controller to valve shall be minimum #14

gauge direct burial type, CSA approved TWU-40 wire. Wire shall be any color other than white.


IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

.3 Common wire from controller to valve shall be minimum #14

gauge direct burial type, CSA approved TWU-40 wire. Wire shall be white in color.

.4 Master valve wire from the controller to the valve shall be

minimum #14 gauge direct burial type, CSA approved TWU-40 wire. Wire shall be of different colour than control wires and common wires.

.5 All connectors shall be new, CSA approved for water tight

applications and assembled according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Acceptable connectors include Spears WDS400 gel-filled, complete with crimp ring or 3M DBY.

2.18 Wire Splice Box .1 Acceptable wire splice boxes include the following:

.1 Carson L series #1419-12 c/w #1419-3B, grey in colour.

2.19 Quick Coupler Valve .1 Acceptable quick coupler valves include the following:

.1 Hunter HQ-5-RC;

.2 Rain Bird 5RC;

.3 ¾” to 1” Buckner; or

.4 Toro 474-00.

2.20 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe

.1 All pipe shall conform to CSA B137.3-93. All pipe shall be in new condition, extruded form virgin, high impact materials, solvent weldable with belled ends, and continually and permanently marked showing manufacturers name, material, size, pressure rating, and ULC approval.

.2 Pipe shall be Schedule 40 PVC, unless otherwise specified on

the Drawings.

2.21 Polyethylene Pipe .1 All pipe shall be in new condition, extruded form virgin,

materials and continually and permanently marked showing manufacturers name, material, size, pressure rating, and CSA approval.

2.22 Fittings .1 Fittings shall be GSR Schedule 40 PVC conforming to ASTM D-2466-97 (and F438-97 for CPVC) standards and be of the same material as the pipe. Fittings shall be designed for solvent welding to PVC pipe except where valves and risers require threaded joints.

.2 Threaded nipples shall be Schedule 80 PVC and be


IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

manufactured from the same material specified for the pipe. Teflon tape is required for all threaded fittings.

.3 At the point where the supply source changes from metal to

PVC pipe, the metal end of the pipe must be an FIPT adapter and the PVC fitting a MIPT adapter. Flange couplers may be used upon approval of Parks Division.

2.23 Copper Pipe and Fittings

.1 All pipe in and through interior of buildings shall be copper.

2.24 Pipe Solvent and Primer

.1 PVC pipe cement and primer combinations shall be as recommended by the manufacturer to be suitable for the materials and application, when used as directed, and shall meet local codes.

.2 The use of wet and dry solvent and primer on piping larger

than 1 ½” (38mm) shall not be used without the approval of the Parks Division.

2.25 Irrigation Sleeve .1 Irrigation sleeve conduit shall be Schedule 40 PVC pipe. .2 Conduit diameter shall be minimum 4” (100mm) or twice the

diameter of the main or lateral line running through it, whichever is greater.

.3 Control wire conduit shall be a minimum 2” (50mm) diameter

non-metallic PVC pipe.

2.26 Thrust Blocks .1 Acceptable thrust block material includes:

.1 Poured in place concrete; and

.2 Pre-cast concrete block.

2.27 Sprinkler – General

.1 All sprinklers shall be new, with the size, manufacturer, and features as specified or as indicated on the Drawings.

.2 All sprinklers in grass areas of sport fields shall be equipped

with manufacturer-supplied rubber covers.

2.28 Sprayhead Sprinkler .1 Acceptable sprayhead sprinklers include the following: Manufacturer Model or Series Hunter INST

Rain Bird 1800-PRS 1800-SAM

Toro 570 PRX


IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

2.29 Rotor Sprinkler .1 Acceptable rotor sprinklers include the following: Manufacturer Series

Hunter

PGJ PGP I-20 I-25 I-40 I-60

Rain Bird

3500 5000

5000 Plus 5000/5000 Plus MPR

5500 7005 8005

Toro

Mini 8 Super 700 Super 800 TR50XT TR70XT

640 2001

2.30 Swing-joint Assembly

.1 Pop-up sprinklers shall be attached to a lateral PVC pipe with triple swing-joint assembly, fabricated with three threaded Schedule 40 PVC elbows and one threaded Schedule 80 PVC nipple.

.2 Schedule 80 PVC nipples shall be of such a length to permit

the installed sprinkler to be set at a finished grade level.

2.31 Water .1 Free of impurities that would inhibit germination and growth or may be harmful to the environment.


IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 General .1 Requirements, approvals and accounts for water and electrical service connections from the utility having jurisdiction over the site shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.2 Existing Conditions .1 Verify locations of underground utilities prior to commencing excavation and conduct work so as to prevent interruption and damage to services and utilities. Make good all damages to same at Contractor’s cost.

.2 Verify the location of all services in building walls before boring

or drilling holes for the supply outlet, controls or other work. Make good all damages to same at Contractor’s cost.

.3 Report existing conditions at variance with the Drawings to the

Contract Administrator. .4 Protect all existing conditions and completed work from

disturbance during excavation. Contractor shall make good all damage occurring to existing improvements and completed work during the course of this work.

.5 Adjustments to installation of irrigation system to avoid existing

improvements, completed work and utilities will be permitted as approved by the Contract Administrator.

3.3 Excavation .1 All excavation shall be unclassified. Report material that cannot be excavated by normal mechanical means to the Contract Administrator.

.2 Remove and dispose of buried debris, including

decommissioned irrigation materials, which may impede the proper installation and operation of the irrigation system.

3.4 Layout .1 Layout and stake the entire system per the Drawings, including locations of sprinkler heads, and confirm that:

.1 Layout is within project boundary and property lines and

that grades are correct; and .2 Minimum horizontal and vertical clearances from electrical

and other utilities are not exceeded. .2 Verify on site the location of all sleeving under hard surfaces

and improvements and adjust to suit. .3 Have layout inspected and approved by the Contract

Administrator before commencement of work.


IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

.4 Due to changes during construction it may be necessary to

adjust the spacing of the sprinklers in the field. Field changes shall be approved by the Contract Administrator.

3.5 Water Service .1 Obtain service account from water utility provider prior to starting work.

.2 Connect to the utility’s water source as per the Drawings and

the requirements of the water utility. .3 Restore disturbed areas and improvements to original

condition.

3.6 Electrical Service .1 Obtain service account from electrical utility provider prior to starting work.

.2 Connect to the utility’s electrical source as per the Drawings

and the requirements of the electric utility. .3 Install service and electrical connections in accordance with

local, provincial and national electrical codes. .4 Install a minimum 15 amp surge-protected service, including

breaker, in irrigation cabinet. Include installation of a four plug GFI receptacle.

.5 All 120v AC power wire shall be mechanically protected by the

mainline or lateral piping. Any deviation from the piping system will require the 120v AC to be installed in electrical conduit.

.6 Restore disturbed areas and improvements to original

condition.

3.7 Electric Meter .1 Install electric meter in the irrigation cabinet.

3.8 Irrigation Cabinet .1 Install the irrigation cabinet as specified in the location indicated on the Drawings.

3.9 Backflow Prevention Device

.1 Double Check Valve Assemblies and Reduced Pressure Backflow Assemblies shall be installed in a lockable enclosure and in accordance with all applicable codes and bylaws, with positive drainage and room for servicing.

.2 All assemblies 2½” (63mm) and larger shall use two scissor

jacks or screw jacks for blocking supports on a 300mm x


IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

300mm x 50mm concrete slab. Consult the manufacturer for recommended locations of the supports.

.3 Locate assembly in enclosure to provide sufficient room for

easy access and maintenance to the assembly and its components.

3.10 Master Valve .1 To be specified.

3.11 Isolation Valve .1 To be specified.

3.12 Pressure Regulating Module

.1 To be specified.

3.13 Flow Sensor .1 To be specified. .2 Follow manufacturer’s instructions for installation and wiring of

flow sensor.

3.14 Pulse Decoder .1 Install the pulse decoder in the irrigation cabinet. .2 Follow manufacturer’s instructions for wiring of pulse decoder.

3.15 Pulse Output Transmitter

.1 Install the pulse output transmitter in the irrigation cabinet. .2 Follow manufacturer’s instructions for wiring of pulse output

transmitter.

3.16 Blow-out Device .1 Install the blow-out device in the irrigation vault.

3.17 Irrigation Vault .1 The piping and valve assembly within the vault must be adequately supported and braced using a minimum of 2 adjustable riser type supports and 2 side wall supports, complete with riser, pipe clamps, galvanized metal and stainless steel bolts.

.2 All piping inside the vault is to be brass or pre-approved equal,

and is to extend a minimum of 300mm outside the vault on the downstream side and a minimum of 150mm on the upstream side.

.3 The top of the piping will be 600 mm from the top of the lid.

The service vault will be filled with 25mm minus drain rock to within 300mm of the bottom of the pipe. Contractor to install a 100mm PVC drain pipe, complete with a backwater valve.


IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

The vertical section of the drain pipe is to be perforated and terminating with a grate that is flush with the surface of the drain rock. The drain pipe is to run (minimum of 0.5% slope) into a catch basin or approved drainage system.

.4 PVC connections to brass outside the vault on the

downstream side are to be made with schedule 80 PVC female adapters.

.5 All piping to vault from city service is to be copper or pre-

approved equal. Inside vault piping to be brass including swing joints for blow down quick coupler.

3.18 Irrigation Controller .1 Furnish and install the irrigation controller in the irrigation cabinet.

.2 Coordinate controller installation with that of other electrical

components. .3 All wiring shall be installed in accordance with local, provincial

and national electrical codes. .4 Install and test the 3-rod ground grid to ensure the earth

resistance to ground does not exceed 5 ohms. .5 Retain Wood Communication to supply and install antennae,

phone tote, communication hardware, software and phone activation account.

.6 Provide the 120v AC electrical supply to the time clock. Co-

ordinate the electrical work prior to selecting a location for the irrigation controller and cabinet.

3.20 Control Wire .1 Electrical control wire shall be buried at a minimum depth of 300mm as the BC Electrical Code and, in no case, less than the bottom side of the parallel pipe. Multiple lengths of wire shall be bundled together at maximum 6m intervals. Install wire with minimum 150mm slack at all changes of direction.

.2 All wires shall be sand bedded. Where the wires are in the

same trench as the pipes, place the wires under the pipe but separate the wires from the pipes with an additional 50mm of sand.

.3 Wrap control wires sharing a trench or conduit with electrical

tape at 1.0m intervals. .4 Minimize wire splices. .5 All wire splices shall be looped and installed in a wire splice


IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

box. Do not splice the wire in the trench or anywhere outside of a wire splice box.

.6 The length of coiled wire to extend out of the wire splice box

shall be at least 30mm before connected with watertight connectors.

.7 Provide a minimum of five 25mm coils of wire at connections

to control valve solenoid. .8 White wire shall be used only as the common wire and other

colors shall be consistent from valve to control module. .9 Install extra hot wires, in quantity noted on the Drawings, to

the wire splice box at the end of each mainline branch leaving a one-metre coil for future use.

3.21 Pipe Installation .1 Verify that all pipe, fittings, primers and cements are compatible for proper installation.

.2 Trenches shall not be closer than 300mm to any hard surface

or feature. .3 Minimum burial depths for pipe, measured from the top of the

pipe to the surface of the ground immediately above it, shall be:

.1 Main line: to be specified .2 Lateral line: to be specified

.4 Irrigation lines may occupy the same trench provided they are

installed on the same plane and the following clearances are achieved:

.1 Main line: 450mm .2 Lateral line: 200mm

.5 Trenches shall be hand or machine excavated. Pulling pipes

is not acceptable. Lateral pipes in sport fields shall be installed with a vibratory plough to minimize settling.

.6 Install pipe in a manner so as to provide for expansion and

contraction of pipe in the trench. Follow manufacturer’s recommended procedures.

.7 Install thrust blocks at all changes in direction of PVC pipe 3”

(75mm) in diameter or greater, and for any change in direction of gasketed pipe, to prevent water hammer damage to irrigation system components.

.8 Install pressure regulating module in its own valve box as


IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

required to prevent low head drainage.

.9 Keep inside of pipe clean at all times. Open pipe ends shall

be capped or plugged. .10 PVC pipe ends shall be cut 90 degrees to the pipe length and

cleaned of all cutting burrs using approved reaming tool prior to cementing. Pipe ends shall be wiped clean with a rag lightly wetted with PVC P70 or P72 primer.

.11 Cement shall be applied with a light coat on the inside of the

fitting and a heavier coat on the outside of the pipe. Pipe shall be inserted into the fitting and given a quarter turn to seat the cement. Excess cement shall be wiped form the outside of the pipe. Do not cement pipe under wet, frozen or muddy conditions.

.12 All plastic to metal joints shall be made with plastic male

adapters. .13 All male threads on fittings shall be wrapped with minimum 3

wraps of Teflon tape immediately prior to making connection. .14 All irrigation pipe shall be flushed out in a satisfactory manner

to remove accumulation of dirt and other deleterious matter. Flush all laterals in a manner approved by the manufacturer to prevent clogging of sprinkler screens or nozzles.

.15 Notify Contract Administrator 24 hours prior to backfilling main

lines. Main lines shall be inspected and approved by the Contract Administrator prior to backfilling.

.16 For pipe within the growing medium of planting beds or lawn

areas, the same growing medium shall be carefully placed over the pipe and tamped by hand in lifts to match the adjacent grade and achieve compaction equal to the adjacent growing medium.

.17 For pipe within native soil, sub-surface fill or aggregate base

material, the pipe shall be carefully backfilled with 100mm depth of bedding sand. The remainder of trench backfill to finish grade shall be made in lifts with suitable material under 25mm in size and free of materials that could result in settling or damage to pipe or surface improvements.

3.22 Valve Boxes .1 All manual and automatic control valves shall be installed in valve boxes or a concrete vault as indicated on the Drawings or within the specifications.

.2 Size valve boxes to provide minimum 50mm clearance around

valves and equipment for ease of future maintenance.


IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

.3 Up to three 25mm valves or two 38mm valves may be

contained within a single valve box. Each larger valve shall be installed alone in its own valve box.

.4 Solenoid valves shall be housed within valve boxes with bolt

down lids. .5 Valve boxes shall be installed flush to finish grade and

arranged in a neat and orderly manner and shall be located for ease of access, maintenance, and testing.

.6 Valve boxes shall be installed with adequate clearance above

the pipe and on a compacted base so as not to contact the pipe with settlement of upon being depressed. Valve boxes shall be supported with masonry blocks and able to support the weight of expected traffic. Install 150mm depth of 25mm gravel in bottom of valve box. Provide minimum 50mm clearance between bottom of valve and top of gravel.

3.23 Wire Splice Boxes .1 Wire splice boxes shall be installed flush to finish grade and arranged in a neat and orderly manner and shall be located for ease of access, maintenance, and testing.

.2 Wire splice boxes shall be supported with masonry blocks and

able to support the weight of expected traffic. Install 150mm depth 25mm gravel in bottom of valve box. Provide minimum 50mm clearance between bottom of valve and top of gravel.

3.24 Zone Valve– Electric Control

.1 To be specified

3.25 Zone Valves – Manual Control

.1 To be specified

3.26 Sprinkler Heads and Swing Joints

.1 Location of heads as illustrated on Drawings is intended as a guide to layout of heads. The Contractor shall establish actual head locations in the field to ensure complete and adequate coverage of all areas to be irrigated and no overspray onto adjacent surfaces and improvements. Spacing of heads shall not exceed dimensions recommended and shall provide “head to head” coverage of landscaped area.

.2 Minimum horizontal setback of sprinkler heads from adjacent

hard surface or improvement is 50mm. Heads adjacent to hard surface shall be set 13mm below the grade of the hard surface.

.3 Pop-up heads shall be mounted on a triple swing-joint

assembly. The swing joint assembly shall be connected to the


IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

bottom of the sprinklers and not the side inlet. Adjust the swing assembly to set the sprinkler flush with finish grade.

.4 Threads of PVC fittings shall be taped with Teflon tape and

made hard-hand tight. .5 The triple swing-joint assembly shall be connected to the

bottom inlet of the sprinklers and not the side inlet. .6 Adjust arc, radius of coverage and flow at each sprinkler to

achieve even coverage of area to be irrigated with minimum over spray onto other surfaces.

3.27 Quick Coupler Valve .1 Install quick coupler valves in upright position on galvanized triple-swing assembly.

.2 Quick couplers shall be installed inside a valve box. Ensure

top of quick coupler valve is installed a maximum of 50mm below lid of valve box.

.3 Install non-corrosive metal clamp on quick coupler valve to

prevent uninhibited turning of the valve.

3.28 Irrigation Sleeve .1 Install irrigation sleeve 450mm below finished grade and extend end of sleeve 300mm beyond limit of hard surface or improvement.

.2 Bed sleeve with 75mm of bedding sand placed under the

sleeve and 100mm of bedding sand covering the sleeve. .3 Cap irrigation sleeve with removable plug or cover. Maintain

plug until such time as pipe or wire is ready to be placed in sleeve.

.4 Stake location of each end of sleeve prior to backfilling such

that top of stake is 300mm above finished grade. Label exposed end of stake with the word “sleeve”.

.5 Remove stake after submission of As-constructed Drawings.

3.29 Testing .1 To be specified

3.31 Clean-up and Restoration

.1 Remove all debris resulting from irrigation installation from site.

.2 Restore all disturbed surfaces to original condition and repair

all trench settlement.


IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

3.31 Instruction to Owner .1 Instruct a designated representative of the Parks Division in the complete operating and maintenance procedures for the irrigation system, including start-up, winterization, and programming. Review As-constructed Drawings, manuals, and irrigation schedule with Parks Division as part of instruction.

3.32 Inspections .1 Notify the Contract Administrator a minimum of two (2) working days prior to required inspections or testing. Failure to provide such notice or proceeding with work without receiving approval from Contract Administrator is sufficient grounds for withholding of payment or removal and replacement of work at the Contractor’s expense.

.2 Inspections are required at the following times:

.1 To be specified

.3 All work is to remain uncovered for inspection of workmanship and materials. All buried work that has not been inspected and approved will have to be totally uncovered, inspected and re-buried at the Contractor’s expense.

3.33 As-Constructed Drawings

.1 Upon receipt of Substantial Performance the Contractor shall employ a surveyor to survey and the as-constructed irrigation system and prepare As-constructed Drawings.

.2 Submit As-constructed Drawings to Contract Administrator

prior to receipt of Total Performance.

3.34 Maintenance – Operation

.1 During the guarantee period the Contractor is responsible for regular inspection of the irrigation system to ensure its proper operation. The Contractor’s operation responsibilities include:

.1 Adjusting the irrigation controller program to ensure the

survival, health and growth of the plant material and to reflect the soil conditions, climate and seasons of the site.

.2 Cleaning sprinkler heads and adjusting coverage to avoid surface water and overspray.

.3 Replacing irrigation heads damaged or removed by acts of vandalism or abuse at the unit cost quoted. Incidents of vandalism shall be reported to the Contract Administrator immediately, and vandalized heads or components thereof shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator.

.4 Restoration of grass areas, planting beds, hard surfaces and improvements due to settlement of irrigation trenches.

.5 Responding to requests from the Contract Administrator or Parks Division for service adjustments and repairs.


IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

3.35 Maintenance – Winterization

.1 During the guarantee period the Contractor is responsible for winterization of the irrigation system at the end of the growing season and prior to the onset of air temperatures below 0º Celsius. The Contractor shall be liable for any damage resulting from late or improper winterization.

.2 Prior to winterizing the irrigation system, saturate the soil with

water to a depth of 300mm to provide deep watering of all lawn areas, planting beds and tree pits.

.3 Winterization includes deactivation of the controller, and

drainage and blow-out of the entire irrigation system. .4 Contact the water utility provider to determine if the water

meter is to be removed for winter. The Contractor shall remove and store the water meter, or assist the water utility provider with removal of the water meter, as directed by the utility.

3.36 Maintenance – Spring Start-up

.1 During the guarantee period the Contractor is responsible for re-activation of the irrigation system at the onset of the growing season or when directed by the Contract Administrator or Parks Division. The Contractor shall be liable for any damage resulting from late or improper spring start-up.

.2 Prior to spring start-up contact the water utility provider and

examine the service connection to determine if the water meter needs to be re-installed or re-activated. The Contractor shall re-install the water meter, or assist the water utility provider with re-installation of the water meter, as directed by the utility.

.3 Spring start-up includes testing for leaks, cycling the irrigation

control program through all the zones to ensure proper function and performance of a test of the backflow prevention device and submission of test results to the Contract Administrator.

.4 Upon start-up, and prior to setting a regular watering program,

saturate the soil with water to a depth of 300mm to provide deep watering of all lawn areas, planting beds and tree pits.

3.37 Guarantee

.1 Contractor shall submit a written guarantee, in approved form, stating that all work showing defects in materials, workmanship or operation will be repaired or replaced at no cost to the RDNO for a period of one year from date of Total Performance.


IRRIGATION SYSTEM


JULY 2013

.2 Guarantee includes the supply of labour, materials and

equipment necessary for the repair and replacement of damaged or defective materials and workmanship. Guarantee also includes start-up, winterization, maintenance, necessary testing, program corrections or adjustments and restoration of settled trenches.

.3 Guarantee will not apply to materials or workmanship damaged

after Total Performance by causes beyond the Contractor’s control, such as vandalism or abuse. Guarantee will cover materials or workmanship supplied and installed by the Contractor to replace that damaged by vandalism or abuse.

END OF SECTION


SITE FURNISHINGS


JULY 2013

1.0 GENERAL Section 02870-S refers to those portions of the work that are

unique to the supply and installation of site furnishings. This section must be referenced to and interpreted simultaneously with all other sections pertinent to the works described herein.

1.1 Related Work .1 Aggregates and Granular Materials (Section 02226)

.2 Unit Paving (Section 02515) .3 Concrete Walks, Curbs and Gutters (Section 02523) .4 Pre-cast and Cast-in-Place Concrete (Section 03300)

1.2 References .1 The product manufacturer’s instructions for installation of each product.


.1 Payment for new furniture will be for each type specified on Contract Drawings. Payment includes all supply, preparatory work, installation and other incidentals as specified in the manufacturer’s instructions and on the Contract Drawings.

.2 Payment for relocation or removal of existing furniture will be

for each type specified on Contract Drawings. Payment includes all removal, storage, delivery, relocation, excavation, backfill and re-installation as specified herein and on the Contract Drawings.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials .1 As shown on Contract Drawings

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 Furniture Installation .1 Assemble furniture in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Install furniture in location indicated on Contract Drawings and

in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to ensure the furniture is securely anchored to its concrete base.

.3 Touch-up damaged finishes to approval of Contract

Administrator. .4 Installation of benches and trash receptacles by others.


SITE FURNISHINGS


JULY 2013

3.2 Installation of Bollards & Chains

.1 Conduct underground utility locate prior to augering bollard holes.

.2 Auger holes for bollards in locations indicated on Contract

Drawings. .3 Install bollards in hole such that the above ground height

matches that of existing undisturbed bollards. Ensure uniform height between bollards.

.4 Backfill bollard holes with select granular sub-base and

compact in 200mm lifts to not less than 95% Modified Proctor density.

.5 Tighten loose steel collars. Replace damaged steel collars

and fittings. .6 Replace and secure chain to lowest point of chain’s length

matches that of existing chains.

3.3 Relocation of Existing Signs and Pedestal Monument

.1 Protect signs and monument from damage during removal and storage.

.2 Conduct underground utility locate prior to re-installing signs

and monument. .3 Install signs and monuments to original grade and plumb.

Firmly anchor to prevent tipping or leaning. .4 Touch-up damaged finishes to approval of Contract

Administrator.

END OF SECTION


PLAY EQUIPMENT


JULY 2013

1.0 GENERAL .1 Section 02872-S refers to those portions of the work that are unique to the supply and installation of play equipment including climbing apparatus, platforms, ramps, beams and rails, stairways, swings, rotating equipment, rocking/springing equipment, cable/rail glides and other play equipment. This section must be referenced to and interpreted simultaneously with all other sections pertinent to the works described herein. 1.1 Related Work .1 Protective Surfacing Section 02873-S

.2 Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling Section 02223

.3 Roadway Excavation, Embankment and Compaction Section 02224

.4 Aggregates and Granular Materials Section 02226

.5 Pre-Cast and Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300

.6 Metal Fabrication Section 05500-S 1.2 References .1 CAN/CSA-Z614-07 Children’s Playspaces and Equipment,

April 2008, including updates published by Canadian Standards Association.

.2 ASTM F1487 Standard Consumer Safety Performance for play

Equipment for Public Use, including updates published by American Society for Testing and Materials.

.3 Manufacturer’s instructions for installation and maintenance of

play equipment. 1.3 Quality Control .1 Assembly and installation of play equipment shall be supervised by an experienced and competent person possessing current theory and practical certification as a Canadian Certified Playground Inspector by the Canadian Playground Safety Institute.

.2 Damaged, incomplete or unfinished equipment will not be accepted.

.3 Protect equipment from damage until date of Total Performance.

Contractor shall make good all damage or disturbance to play equipment at no additional cost.

1.4 Samples .1 Provide samples of materials as required. 1.5 Shop Drawings .1 Refer to General Conditions, Clause 5, Shop Drawings.

.2 Detail method of securely fastening furnishing to finished surface


PLAY EQUIPMENT


JULY 2013

or feature.

1.6 Submittals .1 Submittals to Contract Administrator to be made as follows:

.1 Submit proof of playground installer’s current certification as a Canadian Certified Playground Inspector prior to delivery of play equipment to site.

.2 Submit colour samples of play equipment prior to ordering equipment.

.3 Submit manufacturer’s product data sheets, installation specifications, maintenance program requirements and warranty documentation prior to inspection for Substantial Performance.

.2 Additional submittals or shop drawings may be requested by the Contract Administrator. Additional submittals to be made within 5 days of request for submittal.

1.7 Interpretation .1 If there is any inconsistency or conflict within or between the provisions of

the Contract Documents, CAN/CSA-Z614-07 and/or the submitted manufacturer’s information, Contract Administrator will rule on which document takes precedence over the other.

1.8 Measurement and .1 Payment for new equipment will be for each type specified on

Payment Contract Drawings. Payment includes all supply, excavation, footings, preparatory work, assembly, installation and other incidentals as specified in the manufacturer’s instructions and shown on Contract Drawings.

.2 Payment for relocation of existing equipment will be for each type

specified on Contract Drawings. Payment includes all removal, storage, preparatory work, and re-installation as shown on Contract Drawings.

.3 Payment for installation of equipment supplied by others will be for each

type specified on Contract Drawings. Payment includes all preparatory work and installation as shown on Contract Drawings. If payment includes pick up from source and delivery to site it will be indicated on Contract Drawings.

.4 Payment for safety fencing, drainage, excavation, backfilling, fastening

apparatus, related work and maintenance and repair until Total Performance shall be considered incidental to the work performed under this Section unless shown otherwise in the Schedule of Quantities and Unit Prices.

1.9 Inspection and .1 Refer to General Conditions, Clause 4.12, Inspections. Testing .2 Prior to issuance of Substantial Performance the Contractor shall conduct a inspection of the play equipment with the playground installer and a representative of the Owner. 1.10 Public Safety .1 Install fencing and barriers to prevent public use of play equipment and maintain until Substantial Performance.


PLAY EQUIPMENT


JULY 2013

2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 Play Equipment .1 As specified on Contract Drawings.

.2 As specified on submitted product data sheets, installation specifications or maintenance program.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 Product Assembly .1 Assemble equipment and components thereof as specified by the manufacturer or as shown on Contract Drawings. 3.2 Product Placement .1 Install equipment in the location and at the elevations and along the lines and offsets shown on Contract Drawings. 3.3 Site Examination .1 Examine playground area prior to installation of play equipment.

.2 Obtain written approval of subgrade from Contract Administrator prior to staking, excavation and installation of play equipment.

3.4 Embedded .1 Excavate holes for footings and foundations as shown in Equipment Contract Documents.

.2 Ensure location and installation of play equipment does not impede sub-surface drainage. Ensure water drains away from play equipment.

.3 As required set equipment or fastening apparatus in hole and brace to ensure it will remain in position and plumb during backfilling. .

.4 Backfill hole with concrete. Tamp full depth of concrete with a still rod or mechanical vibrator to eliminate air voids and provide secure seal with furnishing or fitting.

.5 As required set equipment or fastening apparatus in concrete. Tamp

concrete around furnishing or fitting with a steel rod to provide secure seal with furnishing or fitting. Except as specified otherwise extend concrete 25 mm above finished grade and slope concrete to drain away from equipment or fitting.

.6 Brace equipment or fastening apparatus in plumb position and true to alignment and elevation until concrete has set.

.7 Finish concrete as shown on Contract Drawings.

.8 As required place and secure equipment to fastening apparatus.


PLAY EQUIPMENT


JULY 2013

3.5 Fastened .1 Prior to installation obtain approval from Contract Administrator for the Equipment receiving surface/structure the equipment is to be fastened into or onto.

.2 Prepare surface/structure to be fastened. Preparation may include cleaning, setting level or plumb, grinding, drilling, coring or other work shown on Contract Drawings.

.3 Place and brace equipment or fastening apparatus to the receiving surface/structure and maintain until the furnishing is installed.

.4 As required place and secure fastening device to receiving surface/structure as shown on Contract Drawings.

.5 As required place and secure equipment to fastening apparatus or receiving surface/structure as shown on Contract Drawings.

3.6 Clean-up .1 Remove all packaging, extraneous materials and debris resulting from equipment installation.

.2 Wipe down equipment free of dust, soil, salts, concrete residue, adhesives, solvents, sealants, wet paints, hydraulic seeding mulch, water residue and other matter.

.3 Smooth out surface of equipment and fastening apparatus to eliminate rough edges, burrs and splinters.

.4 Apply touch up paint as required according to manufacturer’s specifications.

3.7 Maintenance .1 Maintain equipment until date of Total Performance.

.2 Maintenance practices include clean-up and repair or replacement of equipment, apparatus and parts or components thereof that are broken, damaged, failing or hazardous.

3.8 Conditions for .1 Contract Administrator will issue Certificate for Substantial Performance Substantial only when following conditions exist: 1 Assembly and installation of play Performance equipment is complete. .2 Receipt of manufacturer’s product data sheets, installation specifications, maintenance program requirements and warranty documentation.


PLAY EQUIPMENT


JULY 2013

3.9 Guarantee .1 A one year guarantee period will apply as standard for play equipment. Contractor to guarantee all materials and workmanship for a period of one full year from date of Total Performance, unless specified otherwise in Contract Documents.

.2 Guarantee includes replacing play equipment and parts or components thereof determined by the Contract Administrator to be broken, damaged, failing or hazardous during guarantee period. Replacements and repairs to be made as soon as possible after notification by Contract Administrator, and conditions of guarantee will apply to all replacement equipment and parts or components thereof for one full year from the date of replacement or repair.

.3 Guarantee will not apply to equipment damaged after Total Performance by causes beyond Contractor’s control, such as vandalism, “acts of God”, “excessive wear and tear”, abuse or maintenance contrary to the manufacturer’s submitted maintenance program.

END OF SECTION



PROTECTIVE SURFACING


JULY 2013

1.0 GENERAL .1 Section 02873-S refers to those portions of the work that are unique to the supply and installation of protective surfacing for play equipment including bird’s eye gravel, engineered wood fibre and synthetic safety surfacing. This section must be referenced to and interpreted simultaneously with all other sections pertinent to the works described herein. 1.1 Related Work .1 Play Equipment Section 02872-S .2 Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling Section 02223 .3 Aggregates and Granular Materials Section 02226 .4 Roadway Excavation, Embankment and Compaction Section 02224 1.2 References .1 CAN/CSA-Z614-07 Children’s Playspaces and Equipment, April 2008, including updates published by Canadian Standards Association. .2 ASTM F1292 Standard Specification for Impact Attenuation of Surfacing Materials within the Use Zone of Playground Equipment, including updates published by American Society for Testing and Materials. .3 ASTM F2223 Standard Guide for ASTM Standards on Playground Surfacing, including updates published by American Society for Testing and Materials. .4 ASTM F1951 Standard Specification for Determination of Accessibility of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment, including updates published by American Society for Testing and Materials. .5 ASTM E1980 Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflective Index of Horizontal and Low-Slopes Opaque Surfaces, including updates published by American Society for Testing and Materials. .6 Manufacturer’s instructions for installation and maintenance of engineered wood fibre and synthetic safety surfacing 1.3 Quality Control .1 Protect play equipment and other work from damage or disturbance during installation of protective surfacing. Contractor shall make good all damage occurring to existing play equipment and other work caused by the work of this Section at no additional cost. .2 Installation of synthetic safety surfacing shall be done by an experienced and competent installer having the capabilities and personnel necessary for all work required. .3 Strictly adhere to manufacturer’s instructions regarding product installation.




JULY 2013

.4 Damaged, contaminated, off-colour or unfinished protective surfacing will not be accepted. 1.4 Delivery, Storage .1 Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened and Handling containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name, manufacturer and quantity. .2 Take care to prevent contamination or mixing of protective surfacing materials with other materials and substances. .3 If protective surfacing material is stored on site prior to installation place material in secure location on clean asphalt or concrete or on tarps or to prevent contact between material and ground. Cover and secure tarps over stored material until installation. .4 If contamination or mixing of material occurs, take proper corrective measures to satisfaction of Contract Administrator or dispose and replace with new approved stock. 1.5 Drainage Control .1 Provide proper water management and drainage of site during storage and installation of protective surfacing. Include temporary water diversion measures and siltation control measures, as well as adequate maintenance thereof, until installation complete. 1.6 Submittals .1 Submittals to Contract Administrator to be made as follows: .1 Submit 1.0kg sample of bird’s eye gravel or engineered wood fibre as applicable. .2 Submit a synthetic safety surfacing sample for each colour indicated on Contract Drawings as applicable. .3 Unless thickness of synthetic safety surfacing is indicated on Contract Drawings, and prior to ordering material, submit Manufacturer’s written recommendation for thickness of synthetic safety surfacing material based on fall height indicated on Contract Drawings. .4 Submit manufacturer’s product data sheets, installation specifications, maintenance program requirements and warranty documentation. .5 Submit sample and necessary product documentation for

proposed alternate materials. .2 Additional submittals or shop drawings may be requested by the Contract Administrator. Additional submittals to be made within 5 days of request for submittal. 1.7 Interpretation .1 If there is any inconsistency or conflict within or between the provisions of the Contract Documents, CAN/CSA-Z614-07 and/or the submitted manufacturer’s information, Contract Administrator will rule on which document takes precedence over the other.




JULY 2013

1.8 Measurement and .1 Payment for protective surfacing will be for each type specified Payment on Contract Drawings. Payment includes all supply, preparatory work, installation, grade establishment, drainage works, geotextile, wear mats, finishing, maintenance and other incidentals as specified in the

manufacturer’s instructions and shown on Contract Drawings. .2 Payment for removal, relocation, re-use and/or disposal of existing protective surfacing will be for each type specified on Contract Drawings. Payment includes all removal, storage, preparatory work, re-installation

and disposal as shown on Contract Drawings. 1.9 Inspection and .1 Refer to General Conditions, Clause 4.12, Inspections. Testing .2 Prior to issuance of Substantial Performance the Contractor shall, in the presence of the Contract Administrator, the playground installer and a representative of the Owner, inspect the protective surfacing. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 Bird’s Eye Gravel .1 Washed, rounded pea-type gravel, from an alluvial geologic source, with a maximum particle size of 6mm (1/4”). Crushed granular aggregate is not acceptable. .2 Free from crushed, broken or irregular pieces, foreign matter and dust. 2.2 Engineered .1 Processed new or virgin wood fibre with a maximum particle Wood Fibre dimension of 50mm. Wood mulch and bark mulch is not acceptable. Free of bark, twigs, leaves, roots, stones, earth, and toxic or deleterious materials, including paint, preservatives and chemical additives.

.2 Except as specified otherwise on Contract Drawings acceptable engineered wood fibre products include:

.1 GT Impax Fibre, by GameTime .

.2 Fibar Engineered Wood Fibre, by Fibar .

.3 Sof’Fall Engineered Wood Fibre, by Sof’Solutions .3 As specified on manufacturer’s product documentation

2.3 Synthetic Safety .1 Except as specified otherwise on Contract Drawings

Surfacing – acceptable synthetic pour in place products include: Pour in Place 1 Fibar PIP, by Fibar .

2 Pebble-Flex SBR, by Pebble-Flex 3 GT Impax Poured Rubber, by GameTime .4 Landsafe,

By Marathon Athletic Surfaces.

.2 Includes necessary filler material, binding compounds, colouring agents, sealants and incidental materials. .3 As specified on manufacturer’s product documentation

2.4 Geotextile .1 Woven or spun weed barrier geotextile.




JULY 2013

.2 Except as specified otherwise on Contract Drawings acceptable geotextile products include:

.1 950ES Landscape Fabric, by Nilex.

.2 Alternate product recommended by manufacturer of specified engineered wood fibre.

.3 As specified on manufacturer’s product documentation 2.5 Wear Mat .1 Shredded recycled, SBR and/or EPDM rubber bonded together as a single component not less than 25mm thick and 90mm x 90mm in area.

.2 Except as specified otherwise on Contract Drawings acceptable wear mat products include:

.3 As specified on manufacturer’s product Documentation. .1 GT Impax Wear Mat, by GameTime .2 FibarMat, by Fibar .3 Sof’Mat, by Sof’Solutions .4 As specified on manufacturer’s product Documentation

2.6 Aggregate Base .1 Type 1 or Type 2 Granular Base to Section 31 05 17 – Aggregates and Granular Materials.

3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 Site Examination .1 Examine playground area prior to installation of protective surfacing. .2 Confirm that play equipment is completely in place and suitably protected against damage that may be caused by installation of protective surfacing. .3 Confirm that curbing or edging for playground is complete. .4 Rectify unsuitable conditions prior to installation of protective surfacing, geotextile or aggregate base. .5 Obtain written approval of subgrade or aggregate base conditions from Contract Administrator prior to installation of protective surfacing. 3.2 Subgrade .1 Excavate or fill to design subgrade and compact subgrade to Preparation Section 31 24 13 – Roadway Excavation, Embankment and Compaction. .2 Prior to installation of protective surfacing install geotextile on subgrade to Section 31 32 19 – Geosynthetics and per manufacturer’s specifications. 3.2 Bird’s Eye Gravel .1 Obtain written approval of subgrade from Contract Administrator prior to installation of bird’s eye gravel. .2 Install geotextile on approved aggregate base per manufacturer’s specifications.




JULY 2013

.3 Place bird’s eye gravel on geotextile to a depth sufficient that, after settlement, minimum depth of installed gravel meets the specified depth and freeboard shown on Contract Drawings. .4 Rake and level material to provide smooth, uniform surface. 3.3 Engineered .1 Prior to installation of protective surfacing place and compact Wood Fibre aggregate base on prepared subgrade as shown on Contract Drawings. .2 Obtain written approval of aggregate base from Contract Administrator prior to installation of engineered wood fibre.

.3 Install geotextile on approved aggregate base per manufacturer’s specifications.

.4 Place engineered wood fibre on geotextile to a depth that, after

settlement, minimum depth of installed gravel meets the specified depth shown on Contract Drawings.

.5 Rake and level material to provide smooth, uniform surface.

3.4 Synthetic Safety .1 Confirm colour requirements for wear (or finish) course and submit Surfacing – colour samples and corresponding Solar Reflective Index (SRI) to

Pour in Place Contractor Administrator for approval prior to ordering materials. .2 Obtain written approval of aggregate base from Contract Administrator prior to installation of synthetic safety surfacing.

.3 Place synthetic surfacing materials to the thicknesses specified on Contract Drawings or, if no thickness specified on Contractor Drawings, to

the thickness recommended by the manufacturer. .4 Install base (or impact) course per manufacturer’s specifications .5 Install wear (or finish) course per manufacturer’s specifications

3.5 Clean-up .1 Remove all packaging, surplus materials and debris resulting from installation of protective surfacing.

.2 Sweep and/or rake extraneous surfacing material from adjacent landscape and hard surface areas and dispose of off site.

.3 Rake the surface of gravel wood fibre surfacing to provide smooth, consistent surface.

.4 Sweep or wash down synthetic surfacing to provide clean surface free

from dust, mud and debris. Remove extraneous adhesive or bonding agents.

3.6 Maintenance .1 Maintain surfacing until date of Total Performance.

.2 Maintenance practices include clean-up of surfaces, addition of material




JULY 2013

to compensate for settlement and repair or replacement of synthetic surfacing that is marred, damaged, failing or hazardous.

3.7 Conditions for .1 Contract Administrator will issue Certificate for Substantial Performance

Substantial only when following conditions exist: Performance

.1 Protective surfacing is installed per specifications. .2 Receipt of manufacturer’s product data sheets, installation Specifications, maintenance program requirements and Warranty documentation. 3.8 Guarantee .1 A two year guarantee period will apply as standard for

protective surfacing. Contractor to guarantee all materials and workmanship for a period of two full years from date of Total Performance, unless specified otherwise in Contract Documents.

.2 Guarantee includes replacing protective surfacing determined

By the Contract Administrator to be broken, damaged, failing or hazardous during guarantee period. Replacements and repairs to be made as soon as possible after notification by Contract Administrator, and conditions of guarantee will apply to all replacement equipment and parts or components thereof for two full years from the date of replacement or repair.

.3 Guarantee will not apply to equipment damaged after Total Performance by causes beyond Contractor’s control, such as vandalism, “acts of God”, “excessive wear and tear”, abuse or maintenance contrary to the manufacturer’s submitted maintenance program.

END OF SECTION


TOPSOIL AND FINISH GRADING


JULY 2013

1.4 Measurement and


“Payment for growing medium, imported topsoil and re-use of stockpiled topsoil will be made for each type of growing medium and topsoil specified. And includes supply of materials, on-site handling, placement to thickness specified, finish grading and application of fertilizers and other amendments.”


“Payment for topsoil and finish grading will be withheld pending Contract Administrator’s review of the soil testing and analysis.”


“If analysis of placed topsoil or growing medium indicates that the physical or chemical properties of the material varies from the limits and ranges specified in this Section, the Contract Administrator may do one of the following:

.1 Require removal and replacement of topsoil and growing

medium that does not meet the limits and ranges specified in this Section. No additional payment will be made for removal, replacement, repair or adjustment of topsoil, growing medium or other work, including removal and replacement of plant material and irrigation components, that is or may be impacted by removal and replacement of unsuitable topsoil and growing medium.

.2 Require the application and incorporation of soil amendments to enable the soil to meet the physical and chemical requirements specified in this Section.

.3 Accept the work at a reduced price determined by the Contract Administrator.”

END OF SECTION



HYDRAULIC SEEDING SECTION 02934-S


3.8 Grass Maintenance .2 Add clause:

“.7 Do not mow areas seeded with wildflowers or planted

with tree or shrub seedlings.”

3.9 Conditions for Total Performance


“Seeded areas have been mown to a height of 38mm a minimum of:

.1 Three times for sport fields and high traffic lawn

areas .2 Two times for low traffic lawn areas .3 Once for areas of reclamation and naturalization

With the last mowing being within 48 hours of inspection for acceptance. “

END OF SECTION



PLANTING OF TREES, SHRUBS AND GROUNDCOVERS


JULY 2013

1.9 Measurement and


“Payment for tree, shrub, ground cover and perennial plant planting will be for each plant of the size and species specified on Contract Drawings. Payment includes all preparatory work, supply and planting plants, growing medium for tree pits, mulching, and staking and guying as applicable and other incidentals as specified under Section 02950 including maintenance to meet Conditions of Total Performance.”

.2 Replace clause with: “Payment for tree grates and guards includes supply, preparation, finishing, installation, fittings and incidentals, as shown on Contract Drawing.”

.3 Add clause: “Payment for root barrier will be for each type and size supplied and installed as shown on Contract Drawings.”

.4 Add clause: “Payment for concrete tree rings will be for each type and size supplied and installed as shown on Contract Drawings.”

2.4 Mulch .1 Replace clause with: “Mulch to be ‘Ogo-Grow’, by Kelowna-Vernon Regional Compost Facility.”

3.7 Mulching .1 Replace clause with:

“Place mulch immediately after all planting is complete and finish grading approved by Contract Administrator.”


“Ensure minimum depth of mulch is 75mm after settlement.”

END OF SECTION


MMCD RDNO (Parks, Recreation & Culture) SPECIFICATION

PARK AND LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE


JULY 2013

1.0 GENERAL .1 Section 02970-S refers to those portions of the work that are

unique to the maintenance and operation of newly constructed improvements in parks, boulevards, medians, stormwater management facilities and other public facilities, including landscaping, plantings, grass areas, top soil and growing medium, irrigation systems, lighting and electrical systems, hard surfaces, structures and other improvements. This section must be referenced to and interpreted simultaneously with all other sections pertinent to the works described herein.

.2 The complete work under this Section shall be governed by

the dictates of good horticultural and maintenance practise in all details or methods even if not minutely specified.

.3 The Contractor shall supply all licenses, permits, tools,

equipment, labour and materials necessary and required to complete all the work as specified.

1.1 Related Work .1 Shrub and Tree Preservation (Section 02104) .2 Site Grading (Section 02210) .3 Unit Paving (Section 02515) .4 Irrigation System (Section 02667) .5 Topsoil and Finish Grading (Section 02921) .6 Seeding (Section 02933) .7 Hydraulic Seeding (Section 02934) .8 Sodding (Section 02938) .9 Planting of Trees, Shrubs and Groundcovers (Section 02950)

1.2 References .1 British Columbia Landscape Standard .2 Landscape Canada Guide Specification for Nursery Stock

1.3 Quality Control .1 The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring the scope and standard of maintenance work as specified herein is achieved.

.2 The RDNO Parks, Recreation & Culture or its appointed

representative, will conduct regular inspections of the maintenance work and document compliance and non-compliance with these specifications.




JULY 2013

1.4 Landscape Maintenance Period

.1 Maintenance of the work after Total Performance may or may not be required as a condition of this Contract. The term of the maintenance period shall be on a monthly basis or one (1) year, as described under the individual payment item in the Schedule of Quantities and Unit Prices.

.2 No Maintenance:

.1 The Contractor is not responsible for maintenance of the work after the issuance of Total Performance, unless described otherwise in the Schedule of Quantities and Unit Prices. This generally applies to park and landscaping improvements on public land owned by the RDNO or Crown, or intended to be deeded to same in the future, for which the maintenance will be conducted by the RDNO or the Owner.

.3 Monthly Maintenance:

.1 This maintenance period generally applies to park and landscaping improvements on public land owned by the RDNO or Crown.

.2 The Contractor shall maintain work and improvements covered by the Contract Documents on a monthly basis from the issuance of Total Performance until the end of the landscape maintenance period, as described under the individual payment item in the Schedule of Quantities and Unit Prices.

.4 One-year Maintenance: .1 This maintenance period generally applies to park and

landscaping improvements on property not currently owned by the RDNO or Crown, but intended to be deeded to same in the future. This may include landscape works and services covered by the requirements of the GVA Landscape Construction Standards.

.2 The Contractor shall maintain work and improvements covered by the Contract Documents for one calendar year from the issuance of Total Performance or until title for the property is transferred to the RDNO, whichever is later.

1.5 Submittals .1 Irrigation Head Replacement Schedule: Submit a schedule of labour and material costs for the replacement of irrigation heads damaged or removed by acts of vandalism. A separate unit price shall be provided for each type of head and shall include all costs associated with the replacement of the head and its associated components and connections and the restoration of them to proper function.

.2 Soil Samples and Test Results: Submit soil samples and

analytical results as specified in Section 02921 – Topsoil and




JULY 2013

Finish Grading.

.3 Maintenance Record: Submit a complete and accurate

monthly maintenance record, as described in Item 3.12, to Contract Administrator at the end of each calendar month. Preparation and approval of payment certificate cannot be made without submission of maintenance record.

.4 Playground Inspection and Maintenance Record: Submit a

complete and accurate monthly inspection and maintenance record, as described in Item 3.18, to Contract Administrator at the end of each calendar month. Preparation and approval of payment certificate cannot be made without submission of the inspection and maintenance record.

1.6 Tools and Equipment .1 Tools and equipment shall be suited to the work at hand, and shall be in good working condition. All appropriate safety devices shall be in place and functioning to current Worker’s Compensation Board requirements.

.2 Equipment shall be such that there is no spillage or leakage of

fluids. .3 All equipment to operate on turf (tractors and operator-

mounted mowing equipment) must be equipped with low pressure floatation tires designed for use on turf. All other equipment used to perform the Work (pick-ups, trash collection vehicle) shall be restricted to hard surface areas of the Park capable of supporting the vehicle without damage to the surface.

.4 All cutting equipment shall be kept clean and cutting edges

kept sharp and well adjusted. Grass trimming equipment to be manually operated rotary string-type machine. Turf cutting equipment to be manually operated mechanical machine. String-type machines not permitted.

.5 All personal protective equipment shall meet the appropriate

CSA and WCB standards and regulations.

1.7 Scheduling .1 The phrase “growing season” shall mean all the days in the months April to September inclusive. The phrase “non-growing season” shall mean all the days in the months October to March inclusive.

.2 Unless specified otherwise the Contractor shall conduct

maintenance inspections as follows:

.1 During the growing season every Monday, Wednesday and Friday morning minimum.




JULY 2013

.2 During the non-growing season bi-weekly (every two

weeks) minimum, and as required by weather conditions to monitor for control of snow and ice.

.3 Unless specified otherwise the Contractor shall schedule and

conduct maintenance work to:

.1 Ensure optimal plant growth and health.

.2 Ensure an adequate supply of water for satisfactory irrigation of all plants.

.3 Provide optimum protection of the environment.

.4 Provide safe and accessible use of the site by the public, including passive use and booked programs and events.

.5 Maintain a clean, tidy and aesthetically pleasing site.

.6 Respond to action requests forwarded from the RDNO within 24 hours and report back to the RDNO upon completion of action request task(s).

.7 Meet the scheduling requirements specified under Section 3.


.1 Payment for monthly maintenance will be made on a monthly basis as described in the Schedule of Quantities and Unit Prices, and includes supply of all materials, utilities, labour, equipment and fees necessary to maintain the site as specified in the Contract Documents.

.2 Payment for one-year maintenance will be made on a monthly

basis as described in the Schedule of Quantities and Unit Prices, and includes supply of all materials, utilities, labour, equipment and fees necessary to maintain the site as specified in the Contract Documents.

.3 Maintenance work that is not performed, delayed, incomplete

or below standard will be noted and the Contract Administrator will ascribe a monetary value to such work, which will be deducted from payment owed the Contractor.

1.9 Inspection and Testing

.1 Refer to General Conditions, Clause 4.12, Inspections.




JULY 2013

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 Plant Material .1 Plant material and related products shall meet the requirements of Section 02950 – Planting of Trees, Shrubs and Groundcovers, except that new plants supplied under this section shall be sized to match existing plants of the same variety at the time of installation of new plants.

2.2 Water .1 Water shall meet the requirements of Section 02667 – Irrigation System.

2.3 Top Soil, Growing Medium and Soil Amendments

.1 Top soil, growing medium, soil amendments and related products shall meet the requirements of Section 02921 – Topsoil and Finish Grading.

2.4 Irrigation System .1 Irrigation System components shall be as specified in Section 02667 – Irrigation System.

2.5 Unit Pavers .1 Unit pavers shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings and as specified in Section 02515 – Unit Paving.

2.6 Paint .1 Paint shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 Inspection and Documentation

.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for regular and timely monitoring and inspection of all aspects of the work.

.2 The Contractor shall maintain a complete and accurate record

of all site inspections and maintenance work. .3 The maintenance record shall state the dates when

maintenance staff were on site, the operations carried out and documentation of any conditions requiring attention beyond the Scope of this Section.

3.2 Litter and Waste Clean-up

.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for collection and removal of litter and waste from the site, including but not limited to trash, paper, wrappers, containers, cans, glass, cigarette butts, injection supplies, feces, branches and milfoil.

.2 The Contractor shall remove material from trash receptacles

and replace plastic liner bags in trash receptacles. All litter must be removed from the litter receptacles when performing




JULY 2013

this task. In no case shall any litter receptacle be allowed to overflow, become unsanitary or create noxious odours.

.3 Liner bags and other collected litter and waste shall be

removed from the site immediately and disposed of at the closest regional landfill.

.4 During the growing season litter and debris shall be collected

and removed 4 days per week; one day of which must be Saturday or Sunday. During the non-growing season litter and debris shall be collected and removed once per week.

3.3 Turf Mowing .1 Remove debris and litter from turf areas prior to mowing. .2 Mow all turf areas with a sharp reel or rotary mower, except

steep slopes, localized wet areas and areas of immature turf, which shall be cut with a push-type rotary mower.

.3 Cut grass to a height of 50mm, or as revised at the direction or

approval of the Contract Administrator. Perform mowing once per week during the growing season.

.4 Take care and employ preventative measures to ensure that

no damage is caused by tools or equipment to people, trees, posts, sidewalks, curbs, bleaches, park furniture, sprinkler heads, utility boxes, monuments and other surface features. Restore or repair damage caused by turf mowing. Trees with bark damage exceeding 25% of trunk circumference caused by mowing, trimming or vertical cutting equipment shall be replaced and warranted by the Contractor at no additional cost.

.5 Trim grass around trees, posts, sidewalks, curbs, bleaches,

park furniture and other surface features at the time of mowing. Do not scalp turf or damage tree bark or the surface finish of objects located in or near turf area.

.6 Vertically cut turf where it meets sidewalks, curbs, resilient

surface of playground structures, hard surfaced areas, flower beds, shrub beds and tree circles on an as-needed basis to prevent spread of turf on or over the adjacent surfaces. Perform vertical cutting every two weeks during the growing season.

.7 Grass clippings from mowing, trimming and vertical cutting

shall be removed from all areas of the site after each mowing. Visually noticeable rows, clumps and blankets of grass clippings on lawn areas are not acceptable. Visually noticeable clippings in planting beds and on parking lots, pedestrian areas and other features are not acceptable.




JULY 2013

3.4 Rough Cutting .1 Remove debris and litter from turf areas prior to mowing. .2 Cut vegetation to a height of 100mm, or as revised at the

direction or approval of the Contract Administrator. Perform rough cutting in June and September.

.3 Take care and employ preventative measures to ensure that

no damage is caused by tools or equipment to trees, shrubs, posts, fences, sidewalks, curbs, sprinkler heads, utility boxes, monuments and other surface features. Restore or repair damage caused by rough cutting. Trees with bark damage exceeding 25% of trunk circumference caused by rough cutting equipment shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost.

.4 Clippings from rough cutting shall remain on the area rough

cut. Clippings from rough cutting on roads, parking lots, sidewalks, paths and lawn areas are not acceptable.

3.5 Grass Remediation .1 Remediate areas of grass that are discoloured, have thin ground coverage or bare patches, are impacted by public use or damaged by maintenance practices.

.2 Remediation may include but not be limited to the following:

irrigation adjustment, aeration, de-thatching, raking, top-dressing with sand and/or soil, re-turfing, over-seeding and fertilization.

3.6 Leaf Clean-up 1. Fallen leaves are considered an unsightly matter and shall be raked, gathered and removed from the site, except from naturalized areas and restoration areas. Leaf clean-up shall be performed on a weekly basis during the growing season.

3.7 Cultivation and Mulching

.1 In the spring, before beginning irrigation or watering, cultivate the soil surface of planted areas and tree bases to a depth of 50mm, taking care to avoid damage to roots, to ensure penetration of water and air into the soil.

.2 Apply composted mulch to a depth of 50mm and cultivate into

the top 50mm of soil. .3 Cultivation and mulching is not required for lawns, restoration

areas, planting beds or tree bases covered with wood mulch or rock mulch.

.4 For areas of the work treated with wood mulch and rock

mulch, rake or wash to provide a clean, smooth surface that is uniform in appearance. Add additional wood or rock mulch as




JULY 2013

required to restore the mulch to the depth and conditions specified in Section 02950.

.5 Restore soil and mulch found on lawns, pedestrian surfaces,

parking lots, roadways, and in or on other work to its original location.

3.8 Control of Pests & Diseases

1. Inspect all plants for signs of pest or disease once per week during the growing season and report any such conditions to the Contract Administrator immediately.

2. Control of insect pests shall be the responsibility of the RDNO,

except in cases where the source of the pest or disease is plant material or soil installed by the Contractor as part of the Work, in which case the Contractor shall be responsible for:

.1 Non-chemical control of the pest or disease to the

satisfaction of the RDNO, or .2 Removal of the infected material, replacement of it with

material free of pests or diseases, restoration of the site and works to the satisfaction of the RDNO and warranty of the restored work for one year.

3. Control of pests and diseases using chemical pesticides is not

permitted unless authorised in writing by the RDNO.

3.9 Weed Control .1 The site shall be free of noxious weeds. .2 Pedestrian surfaces and playground surfaces shall be free of

all weeds and grasses. .3 Landscaped areas shall be relatively free of other weeds,

containing no more than :

.1 Two (2) broadleaf weeds per m2, or

.2 Ten (10) annual weeds per m2, or

.3 Ten (10) weedy grasses per m2. .4 Inspect the site for weeds once per week during the growing

season. Begin weed control immediately following observation.

.5 Control of weeds using chemical herbicides is not permitted. .6 Weed control shall be performed manually or mechanically,

taking care not to damage plants, existing features and other work on site. Weeds shall be collected and removed from the site at the end of each working day.




JULY 2013

3.10 Pruning .1 Pruning shall be minimal and as specified in Section 02950 –

Planting of Trees, Shrubs and Groundcovers.

3.11 Tree Stabilization .1 Regularly inspect, adjust, repair and replace ties, guy wires, stakes and posts as required to secure the tree in its upright position and encourage proper growth and development of the tree.

.2 Remove stakes, anchors and guys at the end of the one-year

maintenance period.

3.12 Soil Testing and Analysis

.1 Schedule soil testing and analysis to be conducted once during the maintenance period, preferably midway through the growing season.

.2 The quantity and locations of soil samples shall be as follows:

.1 Lawn areas: 1 sample for every 500m2 of lawn; 1 sample minimum

.2 Planting beds: 1 sample for every 2,000m2 of planting bed; 1 sample minimum.

.3 Undertake sampling, analysis and reporting as specified in

Section 02921 – Topsoil and Finish Grading.

3.13 Fertilizing .1 Fertilizing is required at least twice during the growing season:

.1 Once during the period April to June; and

.2 Once during the period July to September. .2 Schedule and apply fertilizers and soil amendments to the

landscaped areas of the work per the recommendations of the soil analysis report, the direction of the Contract Administrator and as specified in Section 02921 – Topsoil and Finish Grading.

3.14 Irrigation

.1 Refer to Section 02667 – Irrigation System.

3.15 Lighting Operation .1 The Contractor is responsible for regularly inspecting the lighting system to ensure its proper function.

.2 Lighting operation includes adjustment of the lighting control

program to ensure timely and adequate illumination of the works and replacement of lamps and bulbs.

3.16 Unit Paver Re-setting .1 Remove unit pavers that have settled and re-set them as




JULY 2013

specified in Section 02515 – Unit Paving where one of the following conditions exists:

.1 The grade difference between a depressed unit paver and

the adjacent unit paver, sidewalk, curb or edger exceeds 3mm, or

.2 The area of settlement has a depression that exceeds 3mm as measured with a 3m straight edge.

3.7 Cleaning of Pedestrian Surfaces

.1 Maintain all hard-surfaced pedestrian and vehicle surfaces of the work in a clean condition. Sweep or hose off all such surfaces on an as-needed basis and up to once per week during the growing season. Do not pile, store or leave maintenance materials and debris on hard surfaces.

.2 Maintain sport court surfaces on a weekly basis to ensure that

leaves and other debris are removed from the court surfaces without damage to paint or other special surfacing.

.3 Collect and remove dust and sand from hard-surfaced

pedestrian and vehicle surfaces at the start of the growing season and dispose of off-site. Do not sweep or pile dust and sand on lawn areas or planting beds.

.4 During the one-year maintenance period and at least once per

year, hose or power wash the surfaces to remove spills, stains, gum, grease and oils. Ensure that any chemicals or stripping/removal agents are safe for use and will not alter the pedestrian surface prior to their use.

3.18 Playgrounds and Play Equipment

.1 The Contractor is responsible for regularly inspecting and testing playgrounds and play equipment that are part of the work to ensure that they are in a good repair and safe for use.

.2 Playgrounds and play equipment shall be inspected on a

weekly basis. A written record of each inspection and any maintenance or repair work shall be kept and submitted to the Contract Administrator per Item 1.5.4.

.3 Maintenance of playgrounds and play equipment shall be

undertaken as necessary to make them function as intended and safe for use per CAN/CSA-Z614 and may include but not be limited to ensuring that:

.1 Surfacing is at the proper depth .2 Fall zones and clear zones are free of obstructions and

hazards .3 Equipment is stable and firmly secured to footings and

other equipment and components .4 Exposed footings are covered




JULY 2013

.5 Loose or warn hardware and fittings are tightened or

replaced .6 Surfaces and structures are smooth and free of objects,

sharp edges and protrusions .7 Equipment or components showing signs of wear or fatigue

are replaced

3.19 Furniture and Equipment

.1 Furniture and equipment includes benches, tables, bicycle racks, trash receptacles, drinking fountains, signs, railings, fences, bollards, arbours, goal posts, back stops, boards and related amenities and structures that are part of the work.

.2 Maintenance and repair of furniture and equipment shall be

undertaken as necessary to make them function as intended and safe for use, and may include but not be limited to ensuring that furniture and equipment:

.1 Is stable and firmly secured to the ground or footings .2 Has hardware and fittings that are tight and secure .3 Have surfaces that are smooth and free of objects, sharp

edges and protrusions

3.20 Snow and Ice Control .1 The Contractor shall be responsible for regular and timely monitoring of pedestrian surfaces during the non-growing season.

.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the clearing and

removal of snow, from hard-surfaced pedestrian surfaces, and for the management of icy conditions thereon. The Contractor is not responsible for snow and ice control on roads, parking lots and sidewalks within public road rights-of-way.

.3 Snow shall be cleared and removed when its fresh fallen depth

exceeds 25mm, up to once per day. Compacted snow and ice shall be cleared and removed as necessary to prevent pedestrian slippage and make pedestrian surfaces safe for use, up to once per day.

.4 Cleared snow and ice shall not be piled on planting beds,

against trees or on pedestrian or vehicle surfaces. The Contractor shall be liable for damage to the work and other work caused by snow and ice control.

.5 Sand and de-icing salts shall be applied to prevent pedestrian

slippage and make pedestrian surfaces safe for use, except de-icing salts which may not be employed where a pedestrian surface drains to a landscaped area.

3.21 Touch-up Painting .1 Immediately prior to end of the maintenance period identify




JULY 2013

painted surfaces of the work that are weathered, scratched, scraped, chipped, discoloured, corroded or graffitied for touch-up painting. Items that may require touch-up painting include furniture, equipment and playgrounds.

.2 Prepare surfaces for touch-painting by sanding, grinding,

brushing and cleaning as necessary to provide a surface that will accept and hold paint.

.3 Apply paint specified in the Contract Drawings or per the

manufacturer’s instructions.

3.22 Access Control .1 Where the work includes gates to control pedestrian or vehicle access to the site the Contractor shall be responsible for gate opening and closing.

.2 Public access gates, for use by the general public, shall be

opened and closed on a daily basis at the times directed by the Contract Administrator.

.3 Limited access gates, for use by the Contractor’s maintenance

personnel and equipment, shall be opened and closed on an as-needed basis.

3.23 Vandalism .1 The Contractor shall immediately report all acts of vandalism causing damage to the work or other works on site to the Contract Administrator.

.2 The Contractor is not responsible for the repair or replacement

of work damaged by acts of vandalism, with the following exceptions:

.1 Repair and replacement of irrigation heads, per Section

02667 – Irrigation System. .2 Touch-up painting of work with graffiti on painted surfaces. .3 Damage to work and site features that, due to inadequate

precautions or access control by the Contractor, would not otherwise have been reasonably possible.

END OF SECTION


PRECAST AND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE


JULY 2013

1.4 Construction Quality

Control .2 Add clause:

“For concrete finishes specified on the Contract Drawings for test panels, prior to start of work covered by this Section prepare test panels of the finish for review and approval of a preferred finish by the Contract Administrator. Retain approved sample on site as reference standard for concrete finishing.”



“Payment for cast in place reinforced concrete retaining walls, slabs, stairs, walls and other structures includes all formwork, reinforcements, subgrade preparation to receive concrete pour, construction and expansion joints, finishing and test panels, all as shown on Contract Drawings. Excavation and backfilling will be paid under appropriate pay items in Section 02210.”

END OF SECTION

SECTION V – Standard Details

Included in this section are the following typical standard details:

L-00 Sports fields - Typical Drainage Patterns

L-01 Soccer Field Dimensions U12 U6

L-02 Soccer Field Dimensions Major Minor

L-03 Soccer Goal Permanent

L-04 Soccer Goal Portable

L-05 76m Softball Diamond

L-06 76m Little League Diamond Infield

L-07 91m Little League Diamond

L-08 91m Little League Diamond Infield

L-09 Backstop Details- Plan and elevation

L-10 Backstop Details

L-11 Tennis Courts Plan Section

L-11a Pickleball Courts on Tennis Court Plan

L-12 Tennis Practice Board

L-13 Tennis Fencing

L-14 Tennis Apron Construction

L-15 Tennis Transom- Permanent

L-16 Tennis Transom- Removable

L-17 Tennis Net Post

L-18 Tennis Courts Maint 1



L-21 Basketball Court

L-22 Basketball Goal Post

L-23 Basketball Court Surface

L-24 Tree Planting in soft landscape

L-25 Boulevard Tree in grass

L-26 Boulevard Tree in structural soil plan

L-27 Boulevard Tree in structural soil section

L-28 Boulevard Tree in soil cell plan

L-29 Boulevard Tree in soil cell section

L-30 Root Barrier at Paving

L-31 Planting on slope

L-32 Growing medium lawn

L-33 Growing medium shrub

L-34 Lawn Sod Details

L-35 Handrail Low amenity

L-36 Handrail High amenity

L-37 Safety Fencing - Chain Link

L-38 Two Rail Fence

L-39 Removable Bollard

L-40 Fixed Bollard

L-41 Pathways - Class A - Major Multi-Use Path

L-42 Pathways - Class B - Minor Multi-Use Path

L-43 Pathways - Class C - Local Path

L-44 Pathways - Class D - Multi-Use Trail

L-45 Pathways - Hiking & Equestrian Trail

L-46 Pathways - Accessible Trail

L-47 Pathways - Class G - Hiking Trail

L-48 Pathways - Hiking & Single Track Mtn Bike

L-49a Porous Asphalt Trail

L-49b Pathways - 2m Gravel Crush Trail

L-50 Wood Fiber Trail

L-51 Retaining Wall and Trail

L-52 Wood Frame Staircase

L-53 Concrete Paving Stones

L-54 Playground Edge- Plastic lumber above

L-55 Playground Edge- Plastic lumber recessed

L-56 Playground Edge- concrete

L-57 Retaining Wall - Drystack Stone

L-58 Retaining Wall – Concrete

L-59 Retaining Wall - Unit Block

L-60 Accessible Community Garden

L-61 Community Garden

Irrigation

SS-I-01 Irrigation Point of Connection - 1-2"

SS-I-02 Irrigation Point of Connection - 2-1/2-4"

SS-I-03 Irrigation Vault - Large

SS-I-04 Irrigation Vault - Small

SS-I-05 Controller Pedestal

SS-I-06 Pipe Trench

SS-I-07 Thrust Blocks

SS-I-08 Remote Control Valve

SS-I-09 Drip Zone Valve Kit

SS-I-10 Wire Splice Box

SS-I-11 Isolation Valve

SS-I-12 Quick Coupler Valve

SS-I-13 Sprayhead / Rotor

SS-I-14 Drip Line Assembly

SS-I-15 Root Watering System

SS-I-16 Drip Ring

SS-I-17 Point Source Drip Emitters

SS-I-18 Flush Valve

SS-I-19 Air Relief Valve

END RIDGE

RIDGE

CORNER PITCH

HIGH POINT

LEGEND

DIRECTION OF SURFACE DRAINAGE

GRAPHIC REPRESENTATION OF CONTOUR

LINE (NO SCALE)

SPORTS FIELD

Sports Fields - Typical

Drainage Patterns

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

July 2013

STANDARD DETAILS

GREATER VERNON PARKS,

RECREATION & CULTURE

L-00

MAJOR SOCCER GOAL

POSTS (TYPICAL). SET

INSIDE END LINE OF U12

FIELD BY 0.29m OR

APPROXIMATELY 1 ft.

BUFFER AROUND

U8 FIELDS

EXISTING MINOR

SOCCER GOAL POSTS

(TYPICAL)

BUFFER AROUND

U10 FIELDS

BUFFER AROUND MAJOR/MINOR FIELDS

BUFFER AROUND

U12 FIELD

U12 59.44 (65)

100.58 (110)

U8 27.43 (30)

22.86 (25)

U10 45.72 (50)

41.15 (45)

5.14

7.32

5.64

10

10

5.71

7.57

10

5.71

NOTES:

1. TYPICAL BUFFERS AROUND FIELDS ARE 10m BEHIND

GOAL POSTS AND 3m ALONG SIDELINES.

2. U6 FIELDS ARE 27.43 X 18.29m (30 X 20yd) AND LAY OUT IN

THE SAME LOCATIONS AS THE U8 FIELDS.

Soccer Field

Dimensions U12/U6

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

July 2013

STANDARD DETAILS



L-01

N.B. All dimensions in metres, unless noted otherwise. Dimensions in yards are in brackets.

MAJOR SOCCER

GOAL POSTS

(TYPICAL). SEE

DETAIL DRAWING

GOAL POST LOCATIONS TO BE

STAKED BY CITY PARKS AND

RECREATION STAFF.

MINOR SOCCER

GOAL POSTS

(TYPICAL). SEE

DETAIL DRAWING

SO

CC

ER

E

NV

ELO

PE

: 3.0m

B

UF

FE

R. O

PT

IM

UM

2%

G

RA

DE

IN

A

LL D

IR

EC

TIO

NS

(T

OT

AL A

RE

A

= 9116 sq.m

.).

MAJOR/MINOR

SOCCER FIELDS

(LAYOUT BY

OTHERS)

31.34 31.347.32

540

40

5

70 55

80

17.18

5.64

17.18

100

Soccer Field Dimensions

Major/Minor

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

July 2013

STANDARD DETAILS



L-02

N.B. All dimensions in metres, unless noted otherwise.

WELDED JOINTS (TYP.)

CAPPED END (TYP.)

SET SCREW (TYP.)

89mm INSIDE DIA. (TYP.)

FINISHED GRADE

89mm O.D. SCHEDULE 20,

PAINTED WHITE (TYP.)

GOAL POST IN

CONCRETE BASE (TYP.)

GOAL POST

FINISHED GRADE

* METAL SLEEVE 89mm I.D. x

1075mm, 25mm ABOVE GRADE

* REBAR. 13mm DIA. x 400mm, 150mm

FROM BASE OF SLEEVE

* DRAINAGE SUMP (40mm CLEAN,

WASHED, CRUSHED GRAVEL) (TYP.)

* OPTIONAL INSTALLATION

TO ALLOW REMOVAL

NOTES:

1. SUBJECT TO APPROVAL BY THE

CITY, PORTABLE GOALPOSTS

MAY BE INSTALLED.

2. IF PORTABLE GOALPOSTS ARE

TO BE INSTALLED, THEY MUST BE

SECURELY ANCHORED TO

GROUND.

Elevation Section

300

(TYP.)

1000

(T

YP

.)

1200 (T

YP

.)

Major: 7.32m (24')

Minor: 5.49m (18')

MA

JO

R: 2.44m

(8')

M

IN

OR

: 1.83m

(6')

Soccer Goal -

Permanent

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS



N.B. All dimensions in millimetres, unless noted otherwise

L-03

July 2013

SIDE STAND 48mm O.D. PIPE

GROUND FRAME 120mm x 50mm

RECTANGULAR TUBE

MAIN UPRIGHTS AND CROSSBAR

89mm O.D. PIPE

GALVANIZED STEEL PIN CENTERED

ON THE BOTTOM RAIL

LOCATION OF THE PIN TO BE

500mm FROM THE BACK OF THE

GOALPOST FRAME, CENTERED

ON THE BOTTOM RAIL

20mm DIA. x 725mm LONG HOT DIP

GALVANIZED STEEL PIN, C/W

38mm ROUND HEAD

NOTES:

1. ALL GOAL PIPE SHALL BE POWDER COATED.

Soccer Goal -

Portable

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-04

July 2013

76.2

85.8 6.1

1

2

.

2

M

I

N

.

-

1

5

.

2

1

6

.

5

SOFTBALL ENVELOPE:

- 3.0M BUFFER

- OPTIMUM 2% GRADE IN ALL

DIRECTIONS

- TOTAL AREA INCLUDING

BUFFER = 8361 Sq.m.

6

2

.

8

-

5

9

.

7

76.2m (250') Softball

Diamond

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

July 2013

STANDARD DETAILS



L-05


Refer to Baseball Canada Official Rules for more information.

NOTE:

1. BACKSTOP AND RED SHALE

CORNER LOCATIONS TO BE

STAKED BY PARKS PERSONNEL.

1

6

.

5

0

+/- 21

9.15

9.15

+/- 5

+/- 29

24.40

5

R21.30

LIMIT OF RED

SHALE AREA

(1558 Sq.m., MIN.

150mm DEPTH)

BASELINE

LAYOUT BY

OTHERS

TYPICAL PLAYERS'

BENCH (4.57m, 15')

BACKSTOP, SEE DETAIL

DRAWING

PITCHERS' MOUND, SEE

DETAIL BELOW

PITCHERS' MOUND

DETAIL (N.T.S)

GROUND LEVEL

PLAN VIEW

LEVEL

AREA

SECTION A - A

200m

m

R

2

2

8

6

m

m

450m

m

150mm

-

A A

4

5

12.20 MIN. - 15.20

76.2m (250') Little League

Baseball Diamond Infield

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

July 2013

STANDARD DETAILS



L-06



91.44

103.00 6.10

1

8

.

2

8

1

8

.

4

4

SOFTBALL ENVELOPE:

- 3.0M BUFFER

- OPTIMUM 2% GRADE IN

ALL DIRECTIONS

- TOTAL AREA INCLUDING

BUFFER = 10,394 Sq.m.

6

9

.

9

5


Baseball Diamond

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

July 2013

STANDARD DETAILS



L-07



NOTE:

1. BACKSTOP AND RED SHALE

CORNER LOCATIONS TO BE

STAKED BY PARKS PERSONNEL.

LIMIT OF RED SHALE AREA

(2449 SQ.M., MIN. 150mm

DEPTH)

BASELINE LAYOUT

BY OTHERS

PITCHERS' MOUND, SEE

DETAIL BELOW

+/- 24.50

1

8

.

4

0

1

8

.

2

8

+/- 34

+/- 5

9.15

9.15

5

1

4

5

27.40

R29

TYPICAL

PLAYERS' BENCH

(4.57m, 15')

BACKSTOP, SEE

DETAIL DRAWING

PLAN VIEW

AA

1525m

m

600mm

280mm

254m

m

LEVEL

AREA R

2

7

4

3

m

m

PITCHERS' MOUND

DETAIL (N.T.S)

GROUND LEVEL

SECTION A - A


Baseball Diamond Infield

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

July 2013

STANDARD DETAILS



L-08



LINE POSTS

3

.

0

5

3

.

0

5

3

.

0

5

3.05 3.05

3

.

0

5

3

.

0

5

3

.

0

5

TOP RAIL

CORNER POSTS

45

45

BACKSTOP PLAN

BACKSTOP ELEVATION

CANOPY DETAIL

N.T.S.

SEE DETAIL A SEE DETAIL CSEE DETAIL B

SEE DETAIL DSEE DETAIL E

GROUND LEVEL

WIRE MESH FABRIC

300mm DIA. x 1300mm DEEP

CONCRETE ANCHOR

3.05

3.05

1.22 P

OS

T B

UR

Y

3.05m

1

.

5

2

m

4

5

DOME CAP

60.30mm O.D. GALV.

PIPE (CANOPY)

WELDED BEND

(FULLY SEALED)

41.30 O.D. GALV.

PIPE (RAIL)

88.90mm O.D. GALV. PIPE (CORNER POST)

60.30mm O.D. GALV. PIPE (LINE POST)

NOTE:

1. NO.6 OR NO.9 GAUGE

WIRE MESH FOR CANOPY

RUBBER BACKSTOP

MATTING PANELS

1.2m x 1.8m x 9.5mm (4' x

6' x .75") WITH BRASS

GROMMETS WIRED TO

WIRE MESH FABRIC

Backstop Details

Plan & Elevation

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

July 2013

STANDARD DETAILS



L-09


DETAIL A DETAIL C

DETAIL B

DETAIL EDETAIL D

MATERIAL LIST

POST TOP

TENSION BAND

TENSION BAR

WELDED JUNCTION

TOP RAIL

WIRE TIE

CORNER POST

WELDED

JUNCTION

TOP RAIL

TOP RAIL

TOP RAIL

WELDED

JUNCTION

WELDED

JUNCTION

WIRE TIE

WIRE TIE

TENSION BAND

TENSION BAR

CORNER POST

CORNER POST

LINE POST

CONCRETE ANCHOR

CONCRETE ANCHOR

WELDED

JUNCTION

LINE POST

WIRE MESH LACED

TOGETHER AT JOINT

AND TIED TO THE RAIL

QTYSIZE

DESCRIPTION

BACKSTOP MATERIALS (38 WELDED JUNCTIONS,

CANOPY NOT INCLUDED)

49m3.05m x 50mm

No. 6 Gauge Wire Mesh

147m41.30mm O.D.

Top Rail

4 88.90mm O.D. x 7.32mCorner Post

5 60.30mm O.D. x 7.32m Line Post

456.90mm I.D.

Post Tops

123.05m

Tension Bars

9.07kgNo. 16 Gauge

Lacing Wire

7238mm x 7.90m

Bolts c/w Locks & Nuts

7288.90mm I.D.

Tension (offset) Bands

NOTE:

1. CHAINLINK TWISTED SELVAGE

SHOULD BE DOWN AND

OUTSIDE AREA OF PLAY.

131.20m x 1.80m x 9.50mm

Rubber Backstop Matting

Backstop Details

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS



L-10

July 2013

SE

E S

PE

CS

F

OR

P

LA

YIN

G

SU

RF

AC

E C

ON

ST

RU

CT

IO

N

60.00

15.00

1.00

10.97

10.97

1.37

8.23

1.37

23.77

3.50

3.05

3.05

3.05

3.50

37.00

60.00

16.00

12.00

0.30m

E

DG

E

1.00m

A

PR

ON

SLO

PE

= 0.50%

D

RA

IN

AG

E

SLO

PE

= 0.50%

D

RA

IN

AG

E

6.315

SE

CT

IO

N A

- A

PL

AN

V

IE

W

PR

AC

TIC

E

BO

AR

D

PR

AC

TIC

E

PA

D

1.22

1.22

1.22

NE

T P

OS

T

TR

AN

SO

M

NE

T P

OS

T

TR

AN

SO

MT

RA

NS

OM

TR

AN

SO

M

NE

TN

ET

NE

TN

ET

1.22m

P

ED

ES

TR

IA

N G

AT

E

1.22m

P

ED

ES

TR

IA

N G

AT

E

NOTES:

1. WHERE THERE IS AN IRRIGATION MAINLINE WITHIN 25m OF A PEDESTRIAN ENTRANCE AN

IRRIGATION TURF VALVE SHALL BE PLACED AT THAT ENTRANCE.

2. NET POST LOCATED 0.8m FROM EDGE OF COURT (TRANSOM LOCATED 0.9144m)

3.66m

H

IG

H C

HA

IN

LIN

K F

EN

CE

, S

EE

D

ET

AIL

SH

EE

T

PR

AC

TIC

E

BO

AR

D

PR

AC

TIC

E

PA

D

NE

T

N

COURT

ORIENTATION

A

A

Tennis Courts

Plan & Section

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

July 2013

STANDARD DETAILS



L-11

N.B. All dimensions in metres, unless noted otherwise

6.10

13.41

37

PL

AN

V

IE

W

NOTES:

1. THE DIMENSIONS AND MEASUREMENTS FOR THE STANDARD PICKLEBALL COURT ARE 6.10m

WIDE AND 13.41m LONG FOR BOTH SINGLES AND DOUBLES MATCHES.

2. TOTAL PLAYING AREA 9.14m WIDE AND 18.28m LONG IS THE MINIMUM SIZE THAT IS

RECOMMENDED.

3. COURT MEASUREMENTS SHALL BE MADE TO THE OUTSIDE OF THE LINES. THE LINES

SHOULD BE 2 INCHES (5.1cm) IN WIDTH AND THE SAME COLOR, CLEARLY CONTRASTING WITH

THE COLOR OF THE COURT SURFACE.

4. THE NET MAY BE MADE OF ANY NETTED MATERIAL.

5. THE NET LENGTH SHALL BE AT LEAST 6.1m EXTENDING FROM ONE SIDELINE TO THE OTHER.

THE NET WIDTH SHALL BE AT LEAST 0.8m.

6. THE NET MESH SIZE MUST BE SUFFICIENTLY SMALL TO PREVENT A BALL FROM PASSING

THROUGH IT.

7. THE NET SHALL BE SUSPENDED OVER THE CENTER OF THE COURT AND SHALL BE 0.914m

HIGH AT THE SIDELINES AND 0.86m HIGH AT THE CENTER OF THE COURT.

8. CENTER STRAP. A CENTER STRAP MAY BE PLACED AT THE CENTER OF THE NET TO ENABLE

EASY ADJUSTMENT TO THE 0.86m REQUIREMENT AT CENTER.

9. THE TOP OF THE NET SHOULD BE EDGED WITH A 5 CM WHITE BINDING OVER A CORD OR

CABLE RUNNING THROUGH THE BINDING. THIS BINDING MUST REST UPON THE CORD OR

CABLE.

10. NET POSTS SHOULD BE PLACED OUTSIDE THE SIDELINES. RECOMMENDED HEIGHT OF THE

POST IS 0.914m AND RECOMMENDED PLACEMENT IS 30.48cm FROM THE SIDELINE.

11. PORTABLE PICKLEBALL NET SYSTEM AVAILABLE FROM www.usapa.org/store

N

COURT

ORIENTATION

4.57

TE

MP

OR

AR

Y N

ET

6.10

4.57

1.80

2.13

2.40

2.13

2.13

Temporary Double & Quad

Pickleball Courts

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

July 2013

STANDARD DETAILS



L-11a


NOTES:

1. BACK SIDE OF PRACTICE BOARD

SHOWN. FRONT SEAMS TO BE FLUSH.

2. PRACTICE BOARD TO BE MOUNTED

ON 89mm (

31

2

") O.D. SCHEDULE 40

POSTS.

3. PRACTICE BOARD TO BE MOUNTED

100mm ABOVE COURT SURFACE FOR

DRAINAGE PURPOSES - PROVIDE 100

x 100 x 200 PRESSURE TREATED

WOOD BLOCKING @ 1220mm O.C.

4. PRACTICE BOARD TO RECEIVE ONE

COAT OF PRIMER PAINT AND TWO

COATS OF "FOREST GREEN" OR AS

OTHERWISE APPROVED.

5. A 75mm WIDE WHITE SIGHTING LINE

SHALL BE PAINTED ON THE PRACTICE

BOARD. THIS LINE SHALL BE 1080mm

ABOVE AND HORIZONTAL TO THE

PLAYING SURFACE.

2

4

4

0

2

4

4

0

2

4

4

0

2

4

4

0

1

2

2

0

T

Y

P

.

9

7

6

0

19mm GOOD ONE

SIDE PLYWOOD

(EXTERIOR RATED

GLUE)

38mm x 89mm FRAMING

38mm x 38mm FRAMING

38mm x 140mm FRAMING

100mm x 100mm

x 200mm WOOD

BLOCK TYP.

1220 1220

2440

Tennis Practice

Board

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-12

July 2013

300

1200

250

1000

1220 M

IN

.3050 M

AX

.

CO

RN

ER

P

OS

T C

AP

RA

IL E

ND

TO

P R

AIL F

AS

TE

NE

RS

@ 450m

m O

.C

. (T

YP

.)

LIN

E P

OS

T C

AP

LIN

E P

OS

T

MID

R

AIL A

T A

LL C

OR

NE

R

PO

ST

A

ND

G

AT

E JU

NC

TIO

NS

OF

FS

ET

B

AN

D 73m

m x 178m

m LO

NG

TE

NS

IO

N B

AR

6m

m x 16m

m

CO

RN

ER

P

OS

T

PE

DE

ST

RIA

N G

AT

E

LO

CK

6 G

AU

GE

S

IN

GLE

S

TR

AN

D T

EN

SIO

N W

IR

E

100m

m D

EP

TH

A

SP

HA

LT

F

ILL (T

YP

.)

EN

D O

R C

OR

NE

R P

OS

T

CO

NC

RE

TE

F

OO

TIN

G 300m

m

x 1200m

m D

EP

TH

M

IN

.

LIN

E P

OS

T

CO

NC

RE

TE

F

OO

TIN

G

250m

m x 1000m

m

DE

PT

H M

IN

.

38m

m W

IR

E M

ES

H (T

YP

.)

NOTES:

1. CONCRETE FOOTINGS SHALL BE 21

MPa STRENGTH.

2. 3.66m HEIGHT CHAIN LINK MESH.

3. ALL POSTS SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40

GALVANIZED STEEL.

4. MESH SIZE SHALL BE 38mm - 9

GAUGE GALVANIZED OR

COLOURED VINYL.

5. MESH TO HANG NO MORE THAN

25mm OFF SURFACE AND NO LESS

THAN 12.55mm OFF SURFACE.

6. MESH ON INSIDE OF COURT.

7. 400mm - 600mm SQUARE OF

ASPHALT TO BE REMOVED PRIOR

TO AUGERING POST HOLES.

REPAIR USING ASPHALT TO GRADE

LEVEL WITH SURROUNDING

SURFACE.

3660mm CHAIN LINK FENCE:

LINE POSTS: 63mm x 4500mm

CORNER POSTS: 89mm x 4730mm

TOP RAILS: 35mm x 6700mm

LINE POST CAPS: 63mm

CORNER POST CAPS: 89mm

RAIL ENDS: 35mm

CENTRE BANDS FOR LINE POSTS: 63mm

CENTRE BANDS FOR CORNER POSTS: 89mm

OFFSET BANDS FOR CORNER POSTS: 89mm

TENSION BARS: 3660mm

Tennis Fencing

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-13

July 2013

TURF (EXISTING GRADE) TO

BE LOWER THAN ASPHALT

APRON TO ALLOW POSITIVE

DRAINAGE OFF OF COURTS

CHAIN LINK FENCE

APRON

2% - 6%

DESIRABLE

40mm MIX 'M'

60mm MIX 'B'

100mm OF 19mm

GRANULAR BASE

MIN. 500mm TO MAX

1000mm OF 75mm MINUS

PITRUN GRANULAR SUB

BASE

700 300 59.40

SUBGRADE

Tennis Apron

Construction

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-14

July 2013

NOTES:

1. 400mm - 600mm SQUARE OF ASPHALT TO BE REMOVED

PRIOR TO AUGERING POST HOLES. REPAIR USING

ASPHALT AND GRADE LEVEL WITH SURROUNDING

SURFACE.

2. ALL PIPE TO BE GALVANIZED SCHEDULE 40.

TOP CAP TYP.

WELDED

90mm x 40mm x 5mm

QUICK LINK TYP. WELDED

ONTO TRANSOM

SPOT WELD TYP.

45mm x 30mm x 5mm EYE

BOLT TYP. WELDED TO

TRANSOM

45mm x 30mm x 5mm

CHAIN TYP. CRIMPED TO

NET AND NET POST

PAVED SURFACE

ASPHALT FILL

100mm O.D. PIPE

CONCRETE FOOTING

50 T

YP

.

150 T

YP

.

1067 T

YP

.

750 T

YP

.890 T

YP

.

1640 T

YP

.2290 T

YP

.

3340 T

YP

.

200

251

251

251

1540 T

YP

.

100 T

YP

.

50mm DIA. PIPE

400 - 600 TYP.

DISTANCE VARIES

Tennis Transom -

Permanent

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-15

July 2013

NOTES:

1. 400mm - 600mm SQUARE OF ASPHALT TO BE REMOVED

PRIOR TO AUGERING POST HOLES. REPAIR USING

ASPHALT AND GRADE LEVEL WITH SURROUNDING

SURFACE.

2. ALL PIPE TO BE GALVANIZED SCHEDULE 40.

TOP CAP TYP.

WELDED

90mm x 40mm x 5mm

QUICK LINK TYP. WELDED

ONTO TRANSOM

SPOT WELD TYP.

45mm x 30mm x 5mm EYE

BOLT TYP. WELDED TO

TRANSOM

45mm x 30mm x 5mm

CHAIN TYP. CRIMPED TO

NET AND NET POST

PAVED SURFACE

ASPHALT FILL

100mm O.D. PIPE

CONCRETE FOOTING

50 T

YP

.

150 T

YP

.

1067 T

YP

.

890 T

YP

.

1640 T

YP

.2290 T

YP

.

3340 T

YP

.

200

251

251

251

1540 T

YP

.

100 T

YP

.

50mm DIA. PIPE

400 - 600 TYP.

DISTANCE VARIES

105mm I.D. 775mm

METAL SLEEVE, 25mm

ABOVE GRADE TYP.

REBAR 13mm DIA. x

40mm - 150mm FROM

BASE OF SLEEVE TYP.

650 T

YP

.

Tennis Transom -

Removable

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-16

July 2013

PE

RM

AN

EN

T T

EN

NIS

N

ET

P

OS

TR

EM

OV

AB

LE

T

EN

NIS

N

ET

P

OS

T

NO

TE

S:

1.

400m

m - 600m

m S

QU

AR

E O

F A

SP

HA

LT

T

O B

E R

EM

OV

ED

P

RIO

R T

O

AU

GE

RIN

G P

OS

T H

OLE

S. R

EP

AIR

U

SIN

G A

SP

HA

LT

A

ND

G

RA

DE

LE

VE

L W

IT

H

SU

RR

OU

ND

IN

G S

UR

FA

CE

.

2.

ALL P

IP

E T

O B

E G

ALV

AN

IZ

ED

S

CH

ED

ULE

40.

TO

P C

AP

T

YP

.

TN

-R

EE

L T

YP

., W

ELD

O

NT

O

NE

T P

OS

T

3.5m

m P

OLY

ET

HY

LE

NE

TN

-T

N90H

T O

R

EQ

UIV

ALE

NT

50m

m D

IA

. P

IP

E, C

EN

TR

E

OF

P

IP

E W

ELD

ED

T

O N

ET

PO

ST

A

ND

C

EN

TR

E O

F

ST

EE

L P

LA

TE

ST

EE

L P

LA

TE

, 200m

m

x 200m

m x 13m

m

13m

m D

IA

. P

IP

E, W

ELD

ED

AT

B

OT

H E

ND

S

CO

NC

RE

TE

F

OO

TIN

G

395

400 - 600 T

YP

.

PA

VE

D S

UR

FA

CE

AS

PH

ALT

F

ILL

100m

m O

.D

. x 1950m

m

NE

T P

OS

T

7

5

0

468

1540

1640

100

50

600

1200

NO

TE

:

1.

SY

ST

EM

IN

CLU

DE

S P

OS

T T

OP

C

AP

S A

S

AP

PR

OV

ED

B

Y P

AR

KS

P

ER

SO

NN

EL.

TO

P C

AP

T

YP

.

TN

-R

EE

L T

YP

., W

ELD

O

NT

O

NE

T P

OS

T

3.5m

m P

OLY

ET

HY

LE

NE

TN

-T

N90H

T O

R

EQ

UIV

ALE

NT

50m

m D

IA

. P

IP

E, C

EN

TR

E

OF

P

IP

E W

ELD

ED

T

O N

ET

PO

ST

A

ND

C

EN

TR

E O

F

ST

EE

L P

LA

TE

ST

EE

L P

LA

TE

, 200m

m

x 200m

m x 13m

m

13m

m D

IA

. P

IP

E, W

ELD

ED

AT

B

OT

H E

ND

S

CO

NC

RE

TE

F

OO

TIN

G

395

400 - 600 T

YP

.

PA

VE

D S

UR

FA

CE

AS

PH

ALT

F

ILL

100m

m O

.D

. x 1950m

m

NE

T P

OS

T

7

5

0

1540

1640

100

50

600

1200

NO

TE

:

1.

SY

ST

EM

IN

CLU

DE

S P

OS

T T

OP

C

AP

S A

ND

C

OV

ER

S

RE

QU

IR

ED

T

O S

EA

L S

LE

EV

ES

W

HE

N P

OS

TS

A

RE

RE

MO

VE

D A

S A

PP

RO

VE

D B

Y P

AR

KS

P

ER

SO

NN

EL.

RE

BA

R 13m

m D

IA

. x

400m

m, 150m

m F

RO

M

BA

SE

O

F S

LE

EV

E

105m

m I.D

. 775m

m M

ET

AL

SLE

EV

E, 25m

m A

BO

VE

GR

AD

E

Tennis Net Post

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-17

July 2013

CO

LO

UR

F

AIL

UR

E A

NY

WH

ER

E O

N B

AC

K S

PA

CE

,

RE

CO

LO

UR

T

HE

E

NT

IR

E A

FF

EC

TE

D A

RE

A.

BA

CK

S

PA

CE

S

HO

WN

T

HU

S -

PR

AC

TIC

E

PA

D

PR

AC

TIC

E

BO

AR

D

3.66m

H

IG

H

CH

AIN

LIN

K F

EN

CE

NE

T

12.00

16.00

60.00

37.00

59.40 T

YP

.

0.30m

E

DG

E

1.00m

A

PR

ON

6.315 TYP.

Tennis Courts Maintenance

Plan - Schedule 1

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

July 2013

STANDARD DETAILS



L-18


CO

LO

UR

F

AIL

UR

E A

NY

WH

ER

E O

N S

ID

E C

OU

RT

S

PA

CE

OR

B

ET

WE

EN

C

OU

RT

S

PA

CE

, R

EC

OL

OU

R T

HE

E

NT

IR

E

AF

FE

CT

ED

A

RE

A.

SID

E C

OU

RT

S

PA

CE

O

R B

ET

WE

EN

CO

UR

T S

PA

CE

S

HO

WN

T

HU

S -

PR

AC

TIC

E

PA

D

PR

AC

TIC

E

BO

AR

D

3.66m

H

IG

H

CH

AIN

LIN

K F

EN

CE

NE

T

12.00

16.00

60.00

37.00

59.40 T

YP

.

0.30m

E

DG

E

1.00m

A

PR

ON

23.77 TYP.

4.10 T

YP

.2.44 T

YP

.


Plan - Schedule 2

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

July 2013

STANDARD DETAILS



L-19


CO

LO

UR

F

AIL

UR

E O

N A

NY

C

OU

RT

, R

EC

OL

OU

R A

ND

RE

LIN

E T

HE

E

NT

IR

E A

FF

EC

TE

D C

OU

RT

.

CO

UR

T S

HO

WN

T

HU

S -

PR

AC

TIC

E

PA

D

PR

AC

TIC

E

BO

AR

D

3.66m

H

IG

H

CH

AIN

LIN

K F

EN

CE

NE

T

12.00

16.00

60.00

37.00

59.40 T

YP

.

23.77 TYP.

10.97 T

YP

.


Plan - Schedule 3

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

July 2013

STANDARD DETAILS



L-20


3 POINT LINE

EDGE OF ASPHALT

SIDE LINE

CENTRE LINE

END LINE

SEE GOAL POST

DETAIL

KEY LINE

26.82

A

SP

HA

LT

P

AD

88' LO

NG

16.46

ASPHALT PAD 54' WIDE

3.66

12'

7.62

25'

4.57

15'

6.40

21'

12.80

42'

6

.

4

0

R

2

1

'

1

.

8

3

R

6

'

NOTES:

1. 2m MINIMUM BUFFER AROUND ASPHALT EDGE.

2. ALL LINES TO BE MASKED AND STRIPED WITH 100% ACRYLIC LATEX PAINT ONLY.

Basketball Court

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

July 2013

STANDARD DETAILS



L-21


GOAL: 2- 16mm HIGH STRENGTH COLD

ROLLED C104 STEEL RIM AND 5mm THICK x

25mm WIDEFLAT BAR BRACE TO

INDIVIDUALLY ACCOMMODATE NET TIES FOR

NYLON AND CHAIN NETS. 5mm ONE-PIECE

FORMED FULL-BACK/ SIDE PLATE. POWDER

COATED ORANGE. ALL COMPONENTS

FRONT-MOUNTED

FAN-SHAPED 6mm CAST ALUMINUM BACKBOARD WITH

REINFORCING RIBS AND 12mm THICK GOAL MOUNTING

AREA. POWDER COATED WHITE, MOUNTED WITH

TAMPER-PROOF HARDWARE. INCLUDES

ORANGE-PAINTED SHOOTER'S SQUARE

NOTE:

1. POST, GOAL AND BACKBOARD ARE

ALL MOUNTED TOGETHER WITH THE

SAME HARDWARE.

114mm O.D.

SCHEDULE 40 GALV. STEEL

FINISH GRADE

REBAR

CONCRETE

760

150

300

500

1200

2930

1370

950

1369

R

7

4

0

150 EDGE OF POLE TO

EDGE OF COURT MARKING

450

3050

T

OP

O

F R

IM

T

O F

IN

IS

H G

RA

DE

Basketball Goal Post

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-22

July 2013

TURF (EXISTING GRADE)

TO BE 25mm BELOW

EDGE OF ASPHALT

APRON

2%

40mm MIX 'M'

60mm MIX 'B'

100mm OF 19mm GRANULAR BASE

MIN. 500mm TO MAX 1000mm OF

75mm MINUS PITRUN GRANULAR

SUB BASE

600 7620

SUBGRADE

1.0%1.0%

Basketball Court

Surface

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-23

July 2013

75mm DEPTH MULCH

GRASS

GROWING MEDIUM

FIRM SUBGRADE

ROOTBALL. ENSURE TOP IS 25-50mm HIGHER

THAN ADJACENT GRADE TO ALLOW FOR

SETTLING. DO NOT COVER THE TOP WITH

SOIL. DO NOT ALLOW MULCH TO TOUCH THE

TRUNK. REMOVE EXCESS ROOTBALL SOIL TO

EXPOSE TRUNK FLARE. PRUNE OFF

ADVENTATIOUS OR CIRCLING ROOTS.

DO NOT STAKE OR WRAP TREE

SCARIFY TO 150mm DEPTH THE ENTIRE TREE

PIT PRIOR TO PLACING GROWING MEDIUM

DO NOT EXCAVATE BELOW ROOTBALL

TAMP SOIL AROUND BASE OF ROOTBALL

2

H

:

1

V

(

T

Y

P

.

)

2

V

:

1

H

(

T

Y

P

.

)

NOTES:

1. DO NOT STAKE OR WRAP TREE UNLESS TO ALLOW FOR LOCALIZED TREE SWING. REFER

TO SPECIFICATIONS.

2. DO NOT DISTURB THE ROOTBALL OR PLANTING PIT OF THE TREE WITH THOSE OF OTHER

TREES AND SHRUBS PLANTED IN THE PLANTING BED.

3. USE ROOT BARRIER ADJACENT TO HARD SURFACE WHERE TREE TRUNK IS WITHIN 3.0m

OF HARD SURFACE.

4. WHEN IN PLANTING BED, LOCATE TREE A MIN. OF 1000mm FROM EDGE OF PLANTING BED.

DO NOT PRUNE, LEAVE CENTRAL LEADER

TREE GUARD OR EQUIVALENT

150

25 - 50

500mm MIN

SAUCER

3X DIA. OF ROOTBALL

OR 1500mm,

WHICHEVER IS GREATER

Tree Planting - in

Soft Landscape

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-24

July 2013

NOTES:

1. DO NOT STAKE OR WRAP TREE UNLESS REQUIRED BY PARKS PERSONNEL. WHEN REQUIRED, STAKE TREES USING

ARBOURTIE OR EQUIVALENT TO ALLOW FOR LOCALIZED TREE SWING.

2. ROOT BARRIER : INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS.

3. USE ROOT BARRIER ADJACENT TO HARD SURFACE WHERE TREE TRUNK IS WITHIN 3.0m OF HARD SURFACE.

4. DO NOT DISTURB THE ROOTBALL OR PLANTING PIT OF THE TREE WITH THOSE OF OTHER TREES AND SHRUBS

PLANTED IN THE PLANTING BED.

PLANT TREE IN CENTRE OF BOULEVARD AT

SPECIFIED SPACING

CURB

450mm DEPTH ROOT BARRIER, BOTH SIDES,

SET ABOVE ADJACENT GRADE AS PER

MANUFACTURER`S SPECS.

75mm DEPTH MULCH

GRASS

GROWING MEDIUM

FIRM SUBGRADE

ROOTBALL. ENSURE TOP IS 25-50mm HIGHER THAN

ADJACENT GRADE TO ALLOW FOR SETTLING. DO

NOT COVER THE TOP WITH SOIL. DO NOT ALLOW

MULCH TO TOUCH THE TRUNK. REMOVE EXCESS

ROOTBALL SOIL TO EXPOSE TRUNK FLARE. PRUNE

OFF ADVENTITIOUS OR CIRCLING ROOTS.






SIDEWALK

2440 PREFERRED, 1200 MIN.

BOULEVARD WIDTH

1000 CIRCLE OR

SQUARE EDGE

SAUCER AROUND TREE

2

H

:

1

V

(

T

Y

P

.

)


ROOT BARRIER SET ABOVE

ADJACENT GRADE AS PER

MANUFACTURER`S SPECS

CONC.

75mm DEPTH MULCH

25

GRASS NOT SHOWN

FOR CLARITY

250

MIN

300

MAX

300

MAX

300mm MAX. TO ROOT BARRIER


Concrete Edge

Boulevard Tree - in

Grass

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-25

July 2013

CURB

450mm DEPTH ROOT BARRIER, ALL SIDES,

INSTALLED AS PER MANUFACTURER`S

SPECIFICATIONS

CONCRETE TREE SQUAREw/ STEEL ANGLE

SUPPORT FOR TREE GRATE

TREE ROOTBALL

TREE GRATE

600mm DEPTH CONTINUOUS STRUCTURAL

SOIL TRENCH BENEATH SIDEWALK

1200

PROVIDE SOIL BREAKOUTS AT TREE

LOCATIONS TO ADJACENT SOFT LANDSCAPE

WHERE POSSIBLE

1200

GEOTEXTILE AROUND STRUCTURAL SOIL

1. TARGET IS TO PROVIDE 9.0 cu.m. OF ROOT ZONE PER TREE.

2. DETAIL TO BE USED IN INSTANCES WHERE TREES ARE

PLANTED IN CONTINUOUS PAVING.

3. REFER TO STANDARD DETAIL BOULEVARD TREE - IN

STRUCTURAL SOIL (SECTION) FOR SECTION VIEW.

4. DRIP OR BUBBLER IRRIGATION TO BE PROVIDED ADJACENT

TO ROOTBALL. ALL IRRIGATION COMPONENTS TO BE

CONCEALED.

NOTES:

AD

JA

CE

NT

S

OF

T LA

ND

SC

AP

E

PAVED SURFACING

AS PER DESIGN



ST

RE

ET

Boulevard Tree - in

Structural Soil (Plan)

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-26

July 2013

NOTES:

1. TREE MUST BE DENSE AND FULL WITH COMPLETE BRANCH DEVELOPMENT, VIGOROUS FOLIAGE AND A FORM WHICH

IS SATISFACTORY TO THE LANDSCAPE DESIGNER. CANOPY DENSITY AND LEAF COLOUR MUST BE CHARACTERISTIC

OF SPECIES.

2. CUT ALL BINDING MATERIAL AND REMOVE STRAPPING OF TREE ROOTBALL. PRIOR TO BACKFILL, REMOVE ANY

MATERIAL FROM TREE PIT THAT WOULD IMPEDE ROOT GROWTH.

3. DO NOT STAKE OR WRAP TREE UNLESS REQUIRED BY PARKS PERSONNEL. WHEN REQUIRED, STAKE TREES USING A

SUBSURFACE STAKING SYSTEM TO ALLOW FOR LOCALIZED TREE SWING.

4. ROOT BARRIER: INSTALLED IN A CONTINUOUS SQUARE SHAPE PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS.



6. REFER TO STANDARD DETAIL BOULEVARD TREE - IN STRUCTURAL SOIL (PLAN) FOR PLAN VIEW.

DO NOT PRUNEE CENTRAL LEADER

600

2

H

:

1

V

(

T

Y

P

.

)



SPECIFICATIONS

75mm DEPTH MULCH

CONCRETE TREE SQUARE W/ 50x50x6mm

STEEL ANGLE

GROWING MEDIUM

FIRM SUBGRADE



TREE GRATE



SCARIFY TREE PIT TO 150mm DEPTH THE

ENTIRE TREE PIT PRIOR TO PLACING

GROWING MEDIUM



SETTLING. DO NOT COVER THE TOP OF

ROOTBALL WITH SOIL. REMOVE EXCESS

ROOTBALL SOIL TO EXPOSE TRUNK FLARE.

PRUNE OFF ADVENTITIOUS OR CIRCLING

ROOTS

PAVED SURFACING

(AS PER DESIGN)

1200

BOULEVARD WIDTH

Boulevard Tree - in

Structural Soil (Section)

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

July 2013

STANDARD DETAILS




L-27

CURB

450mm DEPTH ROOT BARRIER, ALL SIDES,


SPECIFICATIONS

CONCRETE TREE SQUAREw/ STEEL ANGLE

SUPPORT FOR TREE GRATE

TREE ROOTBALL

TREE GRATE

TRENCH WITH CONTINUOUS SOIL CELL

BENEATH SIDEWALK

1200

PROVIDE SOIL BREAKOUTS AT TREE

LOCATIONS TO ADJACENT SOFT LANDSCAPE

WHERE POSSIBLE

1200

GEOTEXTILE AROUND SOIL CELL TRENCH

1. TARGET IS TO PROVIDE 9.0 cu.m. OF ROOT ZONE PER TREE

2. DETAIL TO BE USED IN INSTANCES WHERE TREES ARE PLANTED IN

CONTINUOUS PAVING.

3. REFER TO STANDARD DETAIL BOULEVARD TREE - IN SOIL CELL

(SECTION) FOR SECTION VIEW.

4. DRIP OR BUBBLER IRRIGATION TO BE PROVIDED ADJACENT TO

ROOTBALL. ALL IRRIGATION COMPONENTS TO BE CONCEALED.

NOTES:

AD

JA

CE

NT

S

OF

T LA

ND

SC

AP

E

PAVED SURFACING

AS PER DESIGN

TRENCH WITH CONTINUOUS SOIL CELL

BENEATH SIDEWALK

ST

RE

ET

Boulevard Tree - in Soil

Cell (Plan)

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

July 2013

STANDARD DETAILS




L-28

NOTES:

1. TREE MUST BE DENSE AND FULL WITH COMPLETE BRANCH DEVELOPMENT, VIGOROUS FOLIAGE AND A FORM WHICH IS

SATISFACTORY TO THE LANDSCAPE DESIGNER. CANOPY DENSITY AND LEAF COLOUR MUST BE CHARACTERISTIC OF SPECIES.

2. CUT ALL BINDING MATERIAL AND REMOVE STRAPPING OF TREE ROOTBALL. PRIOR TO BACKFILL, REMOVE ANY MATERIAL

FROM TREE PIT THAT WOULD IMPEDE ROOT GROWTH.

3. DO NOT STAKE OR WRAP TREE UNLESS REQUIRED BY PARKS PERSONNEL. WHEN REQUIRED, STAKE TREES USING A

SUBSURFACE STAKING SYSTEM TO ALLOW FOR LOCALIZED TREE SWING.

4. ROOT BARRIER: INSTALLED IN A CONTINUOUS SQUARE SHAPE PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

5. REFER TO STANDARD DETAIL BOULEVARD TREE - IN SOIL SELL (PLAN) FOR PLAN VIEW.

450mm DEPTH ROOT BARRIER, BOTH

SIDES, INSTALLED AS PER

MANUFACTURER`S SPECIFICATIONS

75mm DEPTH MULCH

CONCRETE TREE SQUARE W/ STEEL

ANGLE SUPPORT FOR TREE GRATE

GROWING MEDIUM



TREE GRATE

SOIL CELLS, DOUBLE STACKED

(INSTALL AND SECURE AS PER

MANUFACTURER SPECIFICATIONS)

100mm DEPTH AGGREGATE SUB-BASE

GEOTEXTILE BELOW AGGREGATE

SUB-BASE

DO NOT PRUNE CENTRAL LEADER

1200 MIN.

BOULEVARD WIDTH

100

300

100

25150

800

PAVED SURFACING

(AS PER DESIGN)

SIDEWALK BASE COURSE (VARIES)

GEOTEXTILE AROUND SOIL CELL

TRENCH

SCARIFY TREE PIT TO 150mm

DEPTH THE ENTIRE TREE PIT PRIOR

TO PLACING GROWING MEDIUM

ROOTBALL. ENSURE TOP IS 25-50mm

HIGHER THAN ADJACENT GRADE TO

ALLOW FOR SETTLING. DO NOT COVER

THE TOP OF ROOTBALL WITH SOIL.

REMOVE EXCESS ROOTBALL SOIL TO


ADVENTITIOUS OR CIRCLING ROOTS

Boulevard Tree - in

Soil Cell (Section)

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-29

July 2013

NOTES:

1. DO NOT STAKE OR WRAP TREE UNLESS REQUIRED BY PARKS PERSONNEL. WHEN REQUIRED, STAKE TREES

USING ARBOURTIE OR EQUIVALENT TO ALLOW FOR LOCALIZED TREE SWING.

2. ROOT BARRIER : INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS.

3. USE ROOT BARRIER ADJACENT TO HARD SURFACE WHERE TREE TRUNK IS WITHIN 3.0m OF HARD SURFACE.



PLANT TREE IN CENTRE OF BOULEVARD AT

SPECIFIED SPACING


SET ABOVE ADJACENT GRADE AS PER

MANUFACTURER`S SPECS.

75mm DEPTH MULCH ALL AROUND

SIDEWALK

TREE PIT EXCAVATION. GROWING MEDIUM

ALL AROUND

FIRM SUBGRADE



SETTLING. DO NOT COVER THE TOP WITH

SOIL. DO NOT ALLOW MULCH TO TOUCH THE

TRUNK. REMOVE EXCESS ROOTBALL SOIL TO


ADVENTITIOUS OR CIRCLING ROOTS.






1000

CIRCLE OR SQUARE

EDGE AROUND TREE

2

H

:

1

V

(

T

Y

P

.

)


25 - 50

ROOT BARRIER SET ABOVE

ADJACENT GRADE AS PER

MANUFACTURER`S SPECS

CONC.

75mm DEPTH MULCH

25

GRASS NOT SHOWN

FOR CLARITY

300

MAX

300

MAX

300mm MAX. FROM HARD SURFACE TO ROOT

BARRIER


Concrete Edge

Root Barrier at

Paving

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

July 2013

STANDARD DETAILS




L-30

M

A

X

2

:1

T

Y

P

.

SHRUB, SEE PLANT LIST FOR SPECIES

MULCH LAYER, 50mm MIN. DEPTH AFTER

SETTLEMENT. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS

WATER

RETENTION

BERM

GROWING MEDIUM. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS

ROOT BALL - SET CROWN 50mm ABOVE FINISHED

GRADE

PLANTING PIT TO BE 2X THE SIZE OF THE

ROOTBALL

COMPACTED SUBGRADE OR APPROVED

SUBBASE

NOTE:

ALL DEPTHS ARE COMPACTED MATERIALS.

ENSURE MULCH DOES NOT COVER ROOT

BALL.

TAPER MULCH OVER ROOT BALL

ENSURE THE SOIL LEVEL DOES NOT

EXCEED THE ORIGINAL NURSERY SOIL

LINE AND THAT SIDE ROOTS ARE

COMPLETELY COVERED IN SOIL

Planting on a Slope

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-31

July 2013

LAWN

GROWING MEDIUM

150

COURSE CULTIVATE TO 150mm

DEPTH PRIOR TO PLACING

GROWING MEDIUM

FIRM SUBGRADE

NOTE:

1. ALL DEPTHS ARE COMPACTED MATERIALS.

2. GROWING MEDIUM DEPTHS AND

SPECIFICATIONS AS PER BC LANDSCAPE

STANDARDS.

Growing Medium -

Lawn

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-32

July 2013

ENSURE THE SOIL LEVEL DOES NOT EXCEED

THE ORIGINAL NURSERY SOIL LINE AND THAT

SIDE ROOTS ARE COMPLETELY COVERED IN

SOIL

75mm DEPTH MULCH

COMPACTED FILL OR NATIVE MATERIAL

SCARIFY BOTTOM OF PLANTING BED TO

REMOVE GLAZING

AMENDED GROWING MEDIUM.

SHRUB BEDS 450mm DEPTH, GROUNDCOVER

BEDS 300mm DEPTH

75

300-450

NOTE:


Growing Medium -

Shrub

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-33

July 2013

SECTION THROUGH SOD

CROSS SECTION OF 3H:1V SLOPE

PLAN VIEW OF SOD LAYOUT AND EDGING

FLUSH WITH PAVED AREA (IF

APPLICABLE)

FLUSH WITH CURBS (IF

APPLICABLE)

SOD

130mm TOPSOIL MIN.

COMPACTED SUBGRADE

SOD TO BE LAID LENGTHWISE

ACROSS FACE OF SLOPE

PEGS. REMOVE PRIOR TO FINAL

ACCEPTANCE

EACH UPHILL END OF SOD TO BE

PEGGED WITH TWO 25mm x 25mm

x 230mm WOODEN PEGS, DRIVEN

IN BELOW LAWN LEVEL

SOD TO BE LAID CLOSELY PACKED

TOGETHER, JOINTS IN ADJACENT

ROWS SHALL BE STAGGERED

PLANTING AREA OR WALKWAY

FULL ROW OF SOD TO BE USED ON

PERIMETER OF SODDED AREA

SLOPE DOWN

NOTE:


Lawn Sod Details

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-34

July 2013

NOTES:

1. POSTS - SCHEDULE 40, 48mm O.D.

2. RAILS - 0.083 TO 0.100 WALL THICKNESS, 48mm O.D.

3. * TOTAL RAILING HEIGHT INCREASES TO 1400mm WHEN REQUIRED

ON A BRIDGE

4. ALL METAL TO BE HDG. ANY ONSIDE WELDS TO BE TREATED WITH

ZINC COLD GALVANIZING COMPOUND.

CONCRETE FOOTING

200mm x 1200mm

SONOTUBE

FINISHED GRADE

CUT AND WELD JUNCTIONS

2000300

600 *

600 *

1000

200

1200 *

1200

Handrail - Low

Amenity Use

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-35

July 2013

1800 MAX

1200

NOTES:

1. HANDRAIL TO BE USED IN ALL SIDEWALK APPLICATIONS WHERE FALL HEIGHT EXCEEDS 600mm.

2. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE SHOP DRAWINGS TO CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR FOR ALL

CONNECTIONS & FABRICATION TECHNIQUES PRIOR TO FABRICATION.

3. ALL COMPONENTS TO BE MATTE BLACK POWDER COATED FINISH.

4. ALL RAILS ARE HOLLOW - 3.55mm WALL.

5. NO ON-SITE WELDS PERMITTED.

C

L

50

12.5

6

R

5

0

450

450

FINISHED GRADE

600 M

IN

.

Plan Detail

1:10 Metric

100

12.5

10

0

600

75mm DIA STEEL RAIL

STEEL BRACKET 100 x 12.5mm

ARMS WELDED TO UPPER RAIL.

PLACE 1800mm ON CENTRE

STEEL SLEEVE INSERT. WELD RAIL

TO BRACKET ON INSTALLATION

50mm DIA STEEL RAIL WELDED TO

BASE OF STEEL BRACKET

SHEET METAL 600 x 100 x 6mm

WELDED TO BRACKET ON CENTRE

CONCRETE FOOTING

50mm DIA STEEL RAIL WELDED TO

100mm SIDE OF BRACKET ARMS,

CENTRED

STEEL BRACKET 100 x 12.5mm ARMS WELDED

TO UPPER RAIL. PLACE 1800mm ON CENTRE

STEEL SLEEVE INSERT. WELD RAIL TO

BRACKET ON INSTALLATION

SHEET METAL 600 x 100 x 6mm WELDED TO

BRACKET ON CENTRE

50mm DIA STEEL RAIL WELDED TO 100mm

SIDE OF BRACKET ARMS, CENTRED

75mm DIA STEEL RAIL.

Elevation Section

40

150

300 MIN.

Handrail - High

Amenity Use

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-36

July 2013

Elevation

TOP RAIL 45mm DIA. 3.44mm WALL THICKNESS

STANDARD CONTINUOUS WELD

ALL JOINTS TO BE STANDARD CONTINUOUS

WELD

END POST 1800mm O.C. (UNLESS OTHERWISE

STATED), 89mm DIA., 5.49mm WALL

THICKNESS, STANDARD CONTINUOUS WELD

6 GAUGE GALVANIZED STEEL, COMMERCIAL

HEAVY GRADE WOVEN TO 50mm X 50mm

OPENINGS

300mm DIA. CIP CONCRETE FOOTING

NOTES:

1. ALL METAL PARTS TO BE FINISHED WITH BLACK VINYL COATING

2. ALL FITTINGS MUST BE FIRST GRADE GALVANIZED STEEL OR ALUMINUM AND FINISHED WITH

BLACK VINYL COATING.

3. ANY AREAS AFFECTED BY CUTTING, WELDING, ETC. SHALL BE GROUND SMOOTH AND FINISHED

WITH BLACK VINYL COATING.

4. LINE POSTS TO BE 60.3mm DIAMETER, 3.91mm WALL THICKNESS, STANDARD CONTINUOUS WELD.

5. ALL PIPING TO BE SCHEDULE 40 PIPE

1285

TIE WIRE FASTENER, 5mm DIA., GALVANIZED

TENSION BAR - THREAD THROUGH WIRE MESH

#9 WIRE GALVANIZED WIRE

TENSION BAND

19mm MINUS COMPACTED CRUSHED

GRANULAR BASE COURSE, 150mm DEPTH

MIN.

2750 TYP. O.C.

2750 TYP. O.C.

800

1000

150

300

600

Safety Fencing -

Chain Link

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-37

July 2013

PRECAST CONCRETE 8" DIA. X 7' LENGTH

WOOD GRAIN FENCE POST

1200

900

650

300

2" X 6' ROUGH CUT FIR FENCE BOARDS

5.5" X 1.5" DIA. FIR DOWEL. INSERT THROUGH

1.5" DIA. HOLE IN FENCE BOARD. PREDRILL

FLAT STEEL METAL BRACKET: ATTACH TO

END OF FENCE RAILS WITH 4 SCREWS

METAL L-BRACKET: ATTACH TO FENCE RAILS

WITH 4 SCREWS

Two Rail Split

Timber Fence

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-38

July 2013

110

915

219

196

305

132

355 M

in*

255 Min*

178

5

880

HOLE FOR PADLOCK

PADLOCK (OPTIONAL)

DRAIN HOLE

13mm (

1

2

") DIA. REBAR ANCHOR

DRAIN ROCK

NOTE:

1. * MINIMUM FOUNDATION SIZE DEPENDS ON LOCAL SOIL

CONDITIONS, WEATHER CONDITIONS AND ENGINEERING

REQUIREMENTS.

R790 BOLLARD -

AVAILABLE AT RELIANCE

FOUNDRY.

TEL: 1-888-735-5680

Bollard - Removable

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-39

July 2013

190

153

O.C.

915

110

132

4

(3) HOLES 16mm

(

5

8

") DIA. @ 120

DROP IN CONCRETE ANCHOR

FOR 13mm (

1

2

") UNC BOLTS

DRILL 16mm (

5

8

") DIA,

50mm (2") DEEP

13mm (

1

2

") UNC SS

BUTTON HEAD BOLT

13mm (

1

2

") SS

WASHER

R790 BOLLARD AVAILABLE

FROM RELIANCE FOUNDRY

TEL: 1-888-735-5680

Bollard - Fixed

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-40

July 2013

NOTES:

SURFACE: HARD SURFACED, TYPICALLY CONCRETE OR ASPHALT, DECORATIVE

PAVERS OR STAMPED CONCRETE.

ENGINEER SURFACE TO ACCOMMODATE VEHICLE TRAFFIC AS PER

APPROVING OFFICERS DIRECTION.

CURBS: BROOM FINISHED CONCRETE WITH 10M REBAR ROD & SAWCUT

CONTROL JOINTS @ 3600 O.C.

BASE: 100mm GRANULAR BASE (OR AS PER GEOTECHNICAL

RECOMMENDATIONS) COMPACTED TO 95% MPD. SUBGRADE TO BE

COMPACTED TO 95% MPD.

ACCESSIBILITY: UNIVERSAL ACCESSIBILITY THROUGHOUT.

SURFACE SLOPE: CROSS-SLOPE 2% MIN., CROWNED OR SINGLE PITCH. LONG-SLOPES

5% WHERE POSSIBLE, 8% MAX

DRAINAGE: TRAILSIDE SWALES/CULVERTS NOT SHOWN.

SLOPE TO DRAIN

4000

CLEARZONE

3000

HE

IG

HT

C

LE

AR

AN

CE

300

200

Pathway - Class A

Major Multi-Use Path

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-41

July 2013

NOTES:

SURFACE: ASPHALT, CONCRETE, OR COMPACTED AGGREGATE.

BASE: 100mm GRANULAR BASE (OR AS PER GEOTECHNICAL

RECOMMENDATIONS) COMPACTED TO 95% MPD. IF

REGULAR VEHICULAR TRAFFIC IS ANTICIPATED,

SUBGRADE TO BE COMPACTED TO 95%.FOR

NON-VEHICULAR USE SUBBASE TO BE PROOF ROLLED

WITH VIBRATORY DRUM ROLLER AND ANY SOFT AREAS

EXCAVATED AND REPLACED WITH APPROVED FILL

MATERIAL.

ACCESSIBILITY: UNIVERSAL WHERE PRACTICAL, INCLUDING ACCESS

POINTS TO ACCESSIBLE PORTIONS.

SURFACE SLOPE: CROSS-SLOPE 2% MIN., CROWNED OR SINGLE PITCH.

LONG-SLOPE 8% MAX WITH 12% IN SHORT SECTIONS.

DRAINAGE: TRAILSIDE SWALES/ CULVERTS NOT SHOWN.

SLOPE TO DRAIN

2000 TO 3000

CLEARZONE

2400

HE

IG

HT

C

LE

AR

AN

CE

500

CLEARZONE

500

CLEARZONE

Pathway - Class B

Minor Multi-Use Path

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-42

July 2013

1500 TO 2500

CLEARZONE

NOTES:

SURFACE: CONCRETE, GRAVEL, WOODFIBRE, ASPHALT, ASPHALT

MILLINGS.

BASE: GRANULAR BASE (100mm MIN. OR AS PER GEOTECHNICAL

REPORT). COMPACTED TO 95% MPD. SUBBASE PROOF

ROLLED WITH VIBRATORY DRUM ROLLER AND ANY SOFT

AREAS EXCAVATED, REPLACED AND COMPACTED WITH

APPROVED IMPORT FILL MATERIAL.

ACCESSIBILITY: UNIVERSAL WHERE PRACTICAL, INCLUDING ACCESS


SURFACE SLOPE: CROSS-SLOPE 2% MIN., CROWNED OR SINGLE PITCH.


500

CLEARZONE

SLOPE TO DRAIN

500

CLEARZONE

2400

HE

IG

HT

C

LE

AR

AN

CE

Pathway - Class C

Local Path

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-43

July 2013

SLOPE TO DRAIN

2500 TO 3000

CLEARZONE

500

CLEARZONE

500

CLEARZONE

3000

HE

IG

HT

C

LE

AR

AN

CE

FO

R E

QU

ES

TR

IA

N

2400

HE

IG

HT

C

LE

AR

AN

CE

F

OR

CY

CLIS

TS

/ P

ED

ES

TR

IA

NS

ON

LY

S

EC

TIO

NS

NOTES:

SURFACE: GRAVEL, WOODFIBRE, NATIVE SOIL.

BASE: NATIVE SOIL, GRANULAR BASE WHERE REQUIRED.

ACCESSIBILITY: UNIVERSAL WHERE PRACTICAL, INCLUDE ACCESS


SURFACE SLOPE: CROSS-SLOPE 2% MIN., CROWNED OR SINGLE

PITCH.


Pathway - Class D

Multi-Use Trail

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-44

July 2013

SA

ND

Y S

OIL

MO

IS

T C

LA

Y

MA

TE

RIA

L

LO

OS

E R

OC

K

ST

AB

LE

R

OC

K

HO

RIZ

ON

TA

L =

V

ER

TIC

AL

3 T

O 4

=1

3 T

O 2

=1

2 T

O 1.5

=1

1/2

=1

SH

ALE

1=

1

1/4

=1

MA

XIM

UM

C

UT

(B

AC

K) S

LO

PE

S

450

MIN

450

MIN

450

MIN

450

MIN

2.4m

M

IN

.

CLE

AR

IN

G LIM

IT

+/- 900

2.4m MAX. IN E-ZONE

CLEARING LIMIT

2%

M

IN

.

5%

M

AX

.

NO

TE

S:

1.

VE

GE

TA

TIO

N R

EM

OV

AL IN

T

HE

T

RA

ILW

AY

W

ILL V

AR

Y W

IT

H G

RO

WT

H H

AB

IT

OF

S

PE

CIE

S.

2.

CU

T W

OO

DY

P

LA

NT

S B

AC

K O

R R

EM

OV

E E

NT

IR

ELY

S

O T

HA

T B

RA

NC

HE

S

DO

N'T

E

NC

RO

AC

H IN

T

RA

ILW

AY

.

3.

ALLO

W N

AT

IV

E H

ER

BA

CE

OU

S P

LA

NT

S T

O R

EV

EG

ET

AT

E A

LL B

UT

T

RA

ILB

ED

.

4.

US

E F

ULL B

EN

CH

C

UT

W

HE

RE

VE

R P

OS

SIB

LE

.

5.

LO

NG

IT

UD

IN

AL S

LO

PE

(R

UN

NIN

G G

RA

DE

) S

HO

ULD

B

E LE

SS

T

HA

N H

ALF

SLO

PE

O

F H

ILLS

ID

E (

1

2

R

ULE

).

6.

CH

OO

SE

T

RA

IL A

LIG

NM

EN

T T

O C

RE

AT

E R

OLLIN

G G

RA

DE

W

IT

H A

DE

QU

AT

E

CR

ES

TS

A

ND

D

IP

S.

7.

DIR

EC

T R

UN

OF

F A

WA

Y F

RO

M W

AT

ER

B

OD

IE

S IN

O

RD

ER

T

O A

VO

ID

PO

SS

IB

LE

C

ON

TA

MIN

AT

IO

N F

RO

M H

OR

SE

W

AS

TE

.

PR

UN

E (T

YP

.)

AD

JU

ST

B

AC

K S

LO

PE

DE

PE

ND

IN

G O

N S

OIL T

YP

E IN

MA

XIM

UM

C

UT

T

AB

LE

LIM

BS

T

O B

E R

EM

OV

ED

A

T

CO

LLA

R T

O A

VO

ID

S

TU

BS

SLO

PE

2-5%

T

O D

RA

IN

SP

RE

AD

E

XC

AV

AT

ED

S

OIL

TO

S

ID

ES

O

F T

RA

IL (150m

m

MA

X D

EP

TH

). A

VO

ID

F

ILL A

T

SE

NS

IT

IV

E P

LA

NT

S. S

EE

D A

S

NE

ED

ED

LO

OS

E G

RA

VE

LLY

SO

IL O

R H

UM

US

1200-3000

TR

AILB

ED

Class E Hiking &

Equestrian Trail

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-45

July 2013

SA

ND

Y S

OIL

MO

IS

T C

LA

Y

MA

TE

RIA

L

LO

OS

E R

OC

K

ST

AB

LE

R

OC

K

HO

RIZ

ON

TA

L =

V

ER

TIC

AL

3 T

O 4

=1

3 T

O 2

=1

2 T

O 1.5

=1

1/2

=1

SH

ALE

1=

1

1/4

=1

MA

XIM

UM

C

UT

(B

AC

K) S

LO

PE

S

600

1.5m

(W

IT

H P

AS

SIN

G

AR

EA

S) T

O 3m

600

2.4m

M

IN

.

CLE

AR

IN

G LIM

IT

2.4m MAX. IN E-ZONE

CLEARING LIMIT

2%

M

AX

.

NO

TE

S:

1.

EX

CE

SS

C

UT

T

O B

E D

IS

TR

IB

UT

ED

T

O S

ID

ES

O

F T

RA

IL (IF

N

OT

N

EE

DE

D F

OR

F

ILL) T

O R

EV

EG

ET

AT

E

NA

TU

RA

LLY

. R

E-S

EE

D A

S N

EE

DE

D.

2.

PR

OO

F R

OLL S

UB

GR

AD

E W

IT

H V

IB

RA

TO

RY

D

RU

M R

OLLE

R, E

XC

AV

AT

E A

ND

R

EP

LA

CE

A

NY

SU

BG

RA

DE

M

AT

ER

IA

L T

HA

T IS

N

OT

F

IR

M.

3.

WE

T A

RE

AS

T

O D

RA

IN

U

ND

ER

G

EO

TE

XT

ILE

IN

150m

m X

300m

m (6" X

12") T

RE

NC

H O

F R

OU

ND

R

OC

K

EN

CLO

SE

D IN

F

ILT

ER

F

AB

RIC

.

4.

RE

DU

CE

T

OP

C

OU

RS

E T

O 25m

m (1" ) A

ND

B

AS

E C

OU

RS

E T

O 50m

m (2") F

IN

IS

HE

D D

EP

TH

S IF

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

C

AN

C

OM

PA

CT

G

RA

VE

L LA

YE

RS

T

O M

IN

. 95%

M

PD

5.

PE

A G

RA

VE

L IS

N

OT

A

N A

CC

EP

TA

BLE

S

UB

ST

IT

UT

E. IT

S R

OU

ND

S

HA

PE

R

OLLS

A

ND

W

ILL N

OT

CO

MP

AC

T.

50m

m M

IN

. C

RU

SH

ED

6m

m (

1

4

") M

IN

US

CO

MP

AC

TE

D G

RA

VE

L

SLO

PE

S

UB

GR

AD

E 2%

M

IN

. F

OR

P

OS

IT

IV

E

DR

AIN

AG

E

25m

m (1") D

IA

. D

RA

IN

R

OC

K W

RA

PP

ED

IN

GE

OT

EX

TILE

F

AB

RIC

F

OR

U

ND

ER

DR

AIN

,

SLO

PE

T

O D

AY

LIG

HT

U

ND

ER

T

RA

IL

LO

OS

E G

RA

VE

LLY

SO

IL O

R H

UM

US

100m

m M

IN

. C

RU

SH

ED

32m

m (1

1

4

") M

IN

US

CO

MP

AC

TE

D G

RA

VE

L

Pathways -

Accessible Trail

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-46

July 2013

SANDY SOIL

MOIST CLAY

MATERIAL

LOOSE ROCK

STABLE ROCK

HORIZONTAL = VERTICAL

3 TO 4 = 1

3 TO 2 = 1

2 TO 1.5 = 1

1/2 = 1

SHALE 1 = 1

1/4 = 1

MAXIMUM CUT (BACK) SLOPES

375

MIN

500-1200

TRAILBED

375

MIN

375

MIN

375

MIN

2.1M MIN.

CLEARING LIMIT

+/- 900

2.4M

M

AX

. IN

E

-Z

ON

E

CLE

AR

IN

G LIM

IT

2% MIN.

5% MAX.

NOTES:

1. VEGETATION REMOVAL IN THE TRAILWAY WILL VARY WITH GROWTH OF SPECIES.

2. CUT WOODY PLANTS BACK OR REMOVE ENTIRELY SO THAT BRANCHES DO NOT

ENCROACH IN TRAILWAY.

3. HERBACEOUS PLANTS WILL REVEGETATE ALL BUT TRAILBED.

4. USE FULL BENCH CUT WHEREVER POSSIBLE.

5. LONGITUDINAL SLOPE (RUNNING SLOPE) SHOULD BE LESS THAN HALF SLOPE ON HILLSIDE

(

1

2

RULE).

6. CHOOSE TRAIL ALIGNMENT TO CREATE ROLLING GRADE WITH ADEQUATE CRESTS AND

DIPS.

PRUNE (TYP.)

ADJUST BACK SLOPE

DEPENDING ON SOIL

TYPE IN MAXIMUM

CUT TABLE

LIMBS TO BE

REMOVED AT COLLAR

TO AVOID STUBS

SLOPE 2-5% TO DRAIN

SPREAD EXCAVATED

SOIL TO SIDES OF TRAIL

(150mm MAX DEPTH).

AVOID FILL AT

SENSITIVE PLANTS.

SEED AS NEEDED

LOOSE GRAVELLY

SOIL OR HUMUS

Pathways- Class G

Hiking Trail

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

July 2013

STANDARD DETAILS




L-47

SA

ND

Y S

OIL

MO

IS

T C

LA

Y

MA

TE

RIA

L

LO

OS

E R

OC

K

ST

AB

LE

R

OC

K

HO

RIZ

ON

TA

L =

V

ER

TIC

AL

3 T

O 4

=1

3 T

O 2

=1

2 T

O 1.5

=1

1/2

=1

SH

ALE

1=

1

1/4

=1

MA

XIM

UM

C

UT

(B

AC

K) S

LO

PE

S

300

MIN

500-1200

TR

AILB

ED

300

MIN

1.8m

M

IN

. - 2.4m

M

AX

E

-Z

ON

E C

LE

AR

IN

G LIM

IT

2.4m MAX. IN E-ZONE

CLEARING LIMIT

2%

M

IN

.

NO

TE

S:

1.

US

E F

ULL B

EN

CH

C

UT

W

HE

RE

VE

R P

OS

SIB

LE

.

2.

MA

IN

TA

IN

O

UT

SLO

PE

S

O W

AT

ER

R

UN

S A

CR

OS

S IN

ST

EA

D O

F D

OW

N T

RA

IL.

3.

SE

LE

CT

T

RA

IL A

LIG

NM

EN

T T

O P

RO

VID

E R

OLLIN

G G

RA

DE

O

F C

RE

ST

S A

ND

D

IP

S

TH

AT

M

IN

IM

IZ

E W

AT

ER

F

LO

WS

O

N T

HE

T

RA

IL.

4.

RE

TA

IN

LA

RG

E, S

TA

BLE

R

OU

ND

R

OC

KS

A

T S

UR

FA

CE

O

F T

RA

ILB

ED

.

5.

RE

MO

VE

S

HA

RP

, P

OIN

TE

D O

R LO

OS

E S

TO

NE

S.

6.

LO

NG

IT

UD

IN

AL S

LO

PE

(R

UN

NIN

G G

RA

DE

) S

HO

ULD

B

E LE

SS

T

HA

N H

ALF

T

HE

SLO

PE

O

F T

HE

H

ILLS

ID

E (

1

2

R

ULE

).

7.

2%

M

IN

C

RO

SS

S

LO

PE

=

10m

m V

: 500m

m H

5%

M

AX

C

RO

SS

S

LO

PE

=

10m

m V

: 200m

m H

8.

ALLO

W N

AT

IV

E H

ER

BA

CE

OU

S P

LA

NT

S T

O R

EV

EG

ET

AT

E A

LL B

UT

T

RA

ILB

ED

,

SE

ED

O

R M

ULC

H A

S N

EE

DE

D.

RO

UN

D O

FF

A

ND

C

OM

PA

CT

"C

RIT

IC

AL P

OIN

T" W

HE

RE

B

AC

K

SLO

PE

M

EE

TS

E

XIS

TIN

G G

RA

DE

TO

M

IN

IM

IZ

E E

RO

SIO

N O

F C

UT

SLO

PE

AD

JU

ST

B

AC

K S

LO

PE

DE

PE

ND

IN

G O

N S

OIL T

YP

E IN

MA

XIM

UM

C

UT

T

AB

LE

SLO

PE

2-5%

T

O D

RA

IN

, M

OIS

TE

N

AN

D C

OM

PA

CT

W

ELL

BR

OA

DC

AS

T E

XC

ES

S S

OIL

DO

WN

HILL F

RO

M C

UT

T

O

AV

OID

C

RE

AT

IN

G B

ER

M A

T

ED

GE

O

F T

RA

IL, T

O 150m

m

(6") D

EP

TH

LO

OS

E G

RA

VE

LLY

SO

IL O

R H

UM

US

BA

LA

NC

ED

SE

CT

IO

N

3

4

B

EN

CH

FU

LL B

EN

CH

5

0

%

S

I

D

E

S

L

O

P

E

3

0

-

5

0

%

S

ID

E

S

L

O

P

E

1

0

-

3

0

%

S

ID

E

S

L

O

P

E

10%

S

ID

E S

LO

PE

OR

GA

NIC

M

AT

TE

R - D

EP

TH

VA

RIE

S - R

EM

OV

E A

ND

E

ST

AB

LIS

H

TR

AILB

ED

O

N M

IN

ER

AL S

OIL

Class H Hiking & Single

Track Mtn. Bike Trail

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-48

July 2013

45 D

EG

. E

DG

E O

F A

SP

HA

LT

FIN

IS

H G

RA

DE

A

T LA

WN

HO

LD

12m

m B

ELO

W T

OP

O

F

AS

PH

ALT

P

AT

H

OP

EN

G

RA

DE

D A

SP

HA

LT

PA

VIN

G

150m

m D

EP

TH

C

OM

PA

CT

ED

CR

US

HE

D R

OC

K A

GG

RE

GA

TE

A

S

SP

EC

IF

IE

D C

OM

PA

CT

ED

T

O 95%

M

PD

610

1830 M

IN

. O

NE

-W

AY

3050 M

IN

. - 3660 T

WO

-W

AY

SU

BG

RA

DE

C

OM

PA

CT

ED

T

O 95%

MP

D. S

LO

PE

2%

M

IN

. F

OR

P

OS

IT

IV

E

DR

AIN

AG

E

NO

TE

S:

1.

WH

ER

E V

EH

IC

ULA

R T

RA

FF

IC

IS

N

OT

A

NT

IC

IP

AT

ED

SU

BB

AS

E T

O B

E P

RO

OF

R

OLLE

D W

IT

H V

IB

RA

TO

RY

D

RU

M

RO

LLE

R A

ND

A

NY

S

OF

T A

RE

AS

O

VE

R E

XC

AV

AT

ED

A

ND

RE

PLA

CE

D W

IT

H A

PP

RO

VE

D S

UB

BA

SE

M

AT

ER

AL.

610

150

MIN.

50

2%

M

AX

.

Porous Asphalt Trail

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-49a

July 2013

2500

2000

100

250

100

EXISTING FINISHED GRADE

REMOVE ORGANIC MATERIAL

TO ENSURE THAT SUBGRADE

PREPARATION CONFORMS TO

LEVELS AND COMPACTION

REQUIRED TO ALLOW FOR

INSTALLATION OF GRANULAR

BASENOTE:

1. SLOPE TRAIL IN SAME DIRECTION AS LANDFORM

2% CROSS SLOPE TO DRAIN

150

150MM DEPTH 32mm MINUS

CRUSHED ROCK GRANULAR

BASE COMPACTED TO 95% MPD

100mm DEPTH 13mm MINUS

CRUSHER CHIPS COMPACTED

TO 95 MPD

PROOF ROLL SUBGRADE WITH

VIBRATORY DRUM ROLLER,

EXCAVATE AND REPLACE ANY

SOFT SPOTS WITH APPROVED FILL

MATERIAL. SLOPE TO DRAIN (2%

MIN.)

Pathway - 2.5m

Crushed Gravel Trail

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-49b

July 2013

SU

RF

AC

IN

G M

AT

ER

IA

L

(W

OO

D C

HIP

S A

S

SP

EC

IF

IE

D)

NO

TE

S:

1.

SLO

PE

T

RA

IL IN

S

AM

E D

IR

EC

TIO

N A

S LA

ND

FO

RM

.

2%

M

AX

.

1830

2440

100 100

32m

m (

11

4

") C

RU

SH

ED

RO

CK

C

OM

PA

CT

ED

T

O

95%

M

PD

EX

IS

TIN

G F

IN

IS

HE

D

GR

AD

E

EN

GIN

EE

RIN

G F

AB

RIC

2300m

m W

ID

E

PR

OO

F R

OLL S

UB

GR

AD

E

WIT

H V

IB

RA

TO

RY

D

RU

M

RO

LLE

R, E

XC

AV

AT

E A

ND

RE

PLA

CE

A

NY

S

OF

T

SP

OT

S W

IT

H A

PP

RO

VE

D

FILL M

AT

ER

IA

L. S

LO

PE

TO

D

RA

IN

(2%

M

IN

.)

Wood Fibre Trail

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-50

July 2013

100

100 100

300

VARIES

VA

RIE

S

SLOPED GRADE ABOVE

EQ

EQ

SLOPED GRADE ABOVE

COMPACTED GRANULAR FILL

TRAIL SURFACE AT 2%

SLOPE FOR ADEQUATE

DRAINAGE

300

TYP

VARIES DEPENDING

ON GRADE

1.2m

MA

X.

Plan

Front Elevation Section

COMPACTED GRANULAR FILL

TRAIL SURFACE AT 2% SLOPE

FOR ADEQUATE DRAINAGE

50mm x 153mm (2" X 6") CROSS

MEMBER (ON FLAT) C/W 20mm

(

3

4

") DIA. REBAR

153mm x 153mm (6" x 6")

ROUGH CUT LUMBER

RETAINING WALL. HEIGHT TO

BE DETERMINED BY GRADE

PROVIDE NOTCH AT BOTTOM

OF TOP 153mm x 153mm (6" x

6") CROSS MEMBER TO

ACCOMMODATE 50mm x

153mm (2" x 6") CROSS

MEMBER (ON FLAT)

20mm (

3

4

") DIA. REBAR.

LENGTH TO BE DETERMINED

BY GRADE, 1.2m MAX

SLOPED GRADE BELOW

NOTE:

1. ALL WOOD TO BE ROUGH CUT UNTREATED FIR OR CEDAR.

2. USE 13mm (0.5") MINUS CRUSHER CHIPS COMPACTED TO 95% MPD.

COMPACTED GRANULAR

FILL TRAIL SURFACE

AT 2% SLOPE FOR

ADEQUATE DRAINAGE

153mm x 153mm (6" x 6")

ROUGH CUT LUMBER

NOTCHED TO ACCOMMODATE

50mm x 153mm (2" x 6") CROSS

MEMBER (ON FLAT)

153mm x 153mm (6" x 6")

NAILER PLATE AT RETAINING

WALL JOINTS

SLOPED GRADE BELOW

50mm x 153mm (2" x 6") CROSS

MEMBER (ON FLAT) C/W 20mm

(

3

4

") DIA. REBAR. LENGTH TO

BE DETERMINED BY GRADE

153mm x 153mm (6" x 6")

ROUGH CUT LUMBER

NOTCHED TO ACCOMMODATE

50mm x 153mm (2" x 6") CROSS

MEMBER (ON FLAT)

153mm X 153mm (6" X 6") ROUGH

CUT LUMBER RETAINING WALL.

HEIGHT TO BE DETERMINED BY

GRADE

20mm (

3

4

") DIA. REBAR,

EXTENDS 400mm MIN. INTO

EXISTING GRADE

RETAINED SOIL

2000 MAX. O.C.

Retaining Wall and

Trail

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-51

July 2013

NOTES:

1. RISE AND RUN OF STEPS SHOULD BE ADJUSTED TO FIT SLOPE OF HILLSIDE WHILE

HOLDING STEP HEIGHT (RISER) CONSTANT IN EACH SERIES OF STEPS.

2. STEEPER SLOPES REQUIRE SHORTER TREADS AND TALLER RISERS: CALCULATE

DIMENSIONS WHERE R=RISER AND T=TREAD WITH 2R+T=26 OR 27.

3. USE 50mm x 203mm (2" x 8") AND 102mm x 203mm (4" x 8") LUMBER FOR STEEPER STAIR

(191mm OR 7.5").

4. USE ALL 100mm (4") x MATERIAL FOR BIGGER SERIES OF STEPS IF POSSIBLE.

5. ALL WOOD TO BE ROUGH CUT UNTREATED FIR OR CEDAR.

1980

610150

EQ EQ EQ EQ

610 610

915

100

100

750

50mm x 152mm (2" x 6")

ROUGH CUT LUMBER

610150 610 610

760760

1980

19mm (

3

4

") DIA. REBAR

(4) LAG BOLTS (BOTH ENDS)

152mm x 152mm (6" x 6")

ROUGH CUT LUMBER

BACKFILL WITH CRUSHED 13mm

(

1

2

") MINUS GRAVEL, COMPACTED

(4) LAG BOLTS (BOTH ENDS). IF

DRILLING FROM SIDE IS

CONSTRAINED, USE LAG BOLTS FROM

FRONT INTO WIDER SIDE BOARDS

COMPACTED SUB-GRADE

Plan

Section

50mm x 152mm (2" x 6")

ROUGH CUT LUMBER

152mm x 152mm (6" x 6")

ROUGH CUT LUMBER

19mm (

3

4

") DIA. REBAR

APPROX 150mm FROM ENDS,

EXTEND 400mm INTO

SUB-GRADE

2% MAX

TRAIL

TRAIL

Wood Frame

Staircase

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-52

July 2013

EDGERS AS

DETAILED

FINISHED GRADE

POLYMERIC SAND TO

BE BRUSHED INTO

JOINTS

2% SLOPE

INTERLOCKING STONE

PAVERS

COMPACTED 19mm

CRUSHED GRANULAR

BASE TO 95% S.P.D.

COMPACTED SUBGRADE

TO 95% S.P.D. (NO

ORGANIC MATERIAL)

FILTER FABRIC

SAND

60

25

150

SIDEWALK WIDTH VARIES

NOTE:

1. CONCRETE PAVERS TO BE INSTALLED AS

PER MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS.

Concrete Paving

Stones

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-53

July 2013

HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED STEEL

PIN WITH A 38mm ROUND HEAD

20mm DIA. x 1050mm LONG

BACKFILL WITH LOAM AND SEED,

3:1 (MAX) SLOPE FROM TOP OF

PLASTIC TIMBERS TO GRADE

SOFT FALL MATERIAL DEPTHS AS

PER PLAYGROUND

MANUFACTURER

SPECIFICATIONS.

150mm x 150mm

PLASTIC TIMBERS (2)

UNDISTURBED SUBGRADE, SLOPED

TO DRAIN

GRADE

NOTE:

1. PIN 1500mm O.C. AND 300mm FROM

BOTH SIDES OF EVERY JOINT

75

BLOCKING - MIN. 150mm x 150mm x

300mm SPACED EVERY 1200mm

EXTEND PIN MIN. 400mm INTO

UNDISTURBED SUBGRADE

Playground Edge Restraint -

Plastic Lumber Above Ground

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-54

July 2013

HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED STEEL

PIN WITH A 38mm ROUND HEAD

20mm DIA. x 1050mm LONG

SOFT FALL MATERIAL AS PER

PLAYGROUND MANUFACTURER

SPECIFICATIONS

150mm x 150mm PLASTIC TIMBERS

OR EASED EDGE 140mm x 140mm

UNDISTURBED SUBGRADE,

SLOPED TO DRAIN

NOTE:

1. PIN 1500mm O.C. AND 300mm FROM

BOTH SIDES OF EVERY JOINT

75

FINISHED GRADE

150mm COMPACTED TOPSOIL

EXTEND PIN MIN. 400mm INTO



Plastic Lumber Recessed

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-55

July 2013

10mm REBAR

SOFT FALL MATERIAL AS PER

PLAYGROUND MANUFACTURER

SPECIFICATIONS


150mm COMPACTED TOPSOIL

40

180

50

135

275

R

1

1

5

R

1

5

NOTE:

1. CONTRACTION JOINTS SHALL BE CUT AT EVERY 1.5 METRES BY MEANS OF A MARKING

TOOL OR OTHER APPROVED METHOD. JOINTS SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 30mm IN

DEPTH AND 6mm IN WIDTH. THE EDGES OF THE JOINT SHALL BE ROUNDED OFF WITH

AN EDGER HAVING A RADIUS OF 6mm.

CIP CONCRETE, WOOD TROWEL

FINISH


Concrete

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-56

July 2013

FILTER FABRIC

(CONTINUOUS)

NOTES:

1. ALL VOID SPACES TO BE FILLED WITH CLEAR CRUSHED AGGREGATE AND CONSOLIDATED TO

PREVENT MIGRATION OF FILL MATERIALS.

2. ALL ROCKS TO BE STRUCTURALLY SOUND, FREE OF ANY SPALLING, CRACKS, CREVICES OR

SPLINTERS. MUD STONE IS NOT ACCEPTABLE.

3. ALL ROCKS TO BE BURIED

1

3

DEPTH INTO GROUND. PLACE ROCKS TO FACILITATE SLOPE

STABILITY.

4. WALL SHALL CONFORM TO ALL CURRENT APPLICABLE LEGISLATION.

5. FILTER FABRIC TO BE AMOCO 4535 NON-WOVEN OR EQUIVALENT. (UNIT WEIGHT 139 g/m2)

150mm OF 20mm DIAMETER CLEAR

CRUSH AGGREGATE (CONTINUOUS)

C/W 100mm DIA. PERFORATED

WEEPING TILE (AS NECESSARY), AND

DEPENDANT UPON SURCHARGE

BEHIND AND ABOVE WALL

SWALE (AS NECESSARY TO

DRAIN)

AVERAGE SIZE SANDSTONE

RETAINING ROCK: 750mm ht. x

500mm w. x 1000mm l.

WALL BATTER SHALL NOT

EXCEED 1:1 WITHOUT SLOPE

STABILITY REPORT FROM

GEOTECHNICAL CONSULTANT

3

3

%

M

A

X

IM

U

M

S

L

O

P

E

FINISHED GRADE

950 M

AX

.

475 T

YP

.

150

600

4

5

Retaining Wall -

Drystack Stone

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-57

July 2013

HE

IG

HT

V

AR

IE

S

C.I.P. CONCRETE WALL - HEIGHT VARIES

300

MIN

.

200 200 600

200

RADIUS EDGE (18mm TYP.) ON ALL EXPOSED

CORNERS

15M REBAR @ 300 O.C. BOTH WAYS, MIN.

50mm COVER

FINISHED GRADE

100mm PERF. PVC PIPE, SLOPED TO DRAIN

CONCRETE FOOTING

15M REBAR @ 300 O.C., 50mm MIN. COVER

19mm (

3

4

") MINUS COMPACTED CRUSHED

GRANULAR BASE AND BACKFILL, 150mm MIN.

DEPTH

COMPACTED SUBGRADE

FINISHED GRADE

NOTES:

1. SIZE OF FOOTING WILL VARY DEPENDING ON HEIGHT OF

WALL.

2. ANY WALL ABOVE 600mm (2') REQUIRES REVIEW FROM A

STRUCTURAL ENGINEER.

3. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR WALL FINISH AND

CONCRETE SPECIFICATIONS.

Retaining Walls -

Concrete

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-58

July 2013

3 ALLAN BLOCK BATTER FROM VERTICAL

100

HE

IG

HT

V

AR

IE

S

(F

LU

SH

T

O F

IN

IS

HE

D G

RA

DE

)

RE

FE

R T

O G

RA

DIN

G P

LA

N

NOTES:

1. RETAINING WALL SYSTEM TO BE ALLAN BLOCK, COLOUR- SANDSTONE, AS

MANUFACTURED BY CCI INDUSTRIES (OR APPROVED EQUAL) :

PHONE: 800-556-9733

WEB: www.cci-industries.com

2. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS.

WELL-GRADED GRANULAR WALL ROCK 5mm TO

38mm LESS THAN 10% FINES

FINISHED GRADE

GROWING MEDIUM (250mm)

ALLAN BLOCK CAPSTONE (AB CAPS)

RETAINED SOIL

100mm PERFORATED TOE DRAIN PIPE VENTED TO

DAYLIGHT OR DRAIN

FINISHED GRADE

Retaining Wall - Unit

Block

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-59

July 2013

2438 2438

2438

Eq. Eq. Eq. Eq.

4X10 LUMBER FRAME FASTENED TO

6X6 POST WITH 4 x LAG BOLTS AT

EACH CORNER

2x4 x 2' LONG SHARPENED

STAKE PER SIDE FASTENED TO

FRAME WITH 4 x 2" SCREWS

2X2 LUMBER DIVIDER SET ON TOP

OF SOIL BETWEEN EACH PLOT

Plan

NOTE:

1. ALL WOOD TO BE NOMINAL SIZE UNTREATED FIR OR CEDAR.

2. ALL FASTENERS TO BE HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED.

3. GROWING MEDIUM TO BE ACCORDING TO BC LANDSCAPE

STANDARDS LATEST EDITION.

50

720

670

4X10 LUMBER FRAME

FASTENED TO 6X6 POST

WITH 4 LAG BOLTS AT

EACH CORNER

2X2 LUMBER DIVIDER SET

ON TOP OF SOIL BETWEEN

EACH PLOT

MINIMUM 450mm DEPTH OF GROWING

MEDIUM ON SCARIFIED SUBGRADE

ACCESSIBLE SURFACE

ADJACENT TO BEDS

Section

Accessible Wood Garden Plot

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-60

July 2013

2X8 LUMBER FRAME FASTENED

WITH HDG ANGLE BRACKET AND 4 x

1" DECK SCREWS AT EACH CORNER

2438 2438

2438

Eq. Eq. Eq. Eq.


STAKE PER SIDE FASTENED TO

FRAME WITH 4 1

1

2

" SCREWS

2X2 LUMBER DIVIDER SET ON TOP

OF SOIL BETWEEN EACH PLOT

Plan

NOTE:

1. ALL WOOD TO BE NOMINAL SIZE UNTREATED FIR OR CEDAR.

2. ALL FASTENERS TO BE HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED.

3. SIZE OF BEDS AND ALLOTMENT PLOTS MAY VARY

4. GROWING MEDIUM TO BE ACCORDING TO BC LANDSCAPE

STANDARDS LATEST EDITION.


STAKE PER SIDE FASTENED

TO FRAME WITH 4 1

1

2

" SCREWS

450

100

MINIMUM 100 mm DEPTH WOOD

CHIP PATHWAY OVER

COMPACTED SUBGRADE

2X2 LUMBER DIVIDER SET

ON TOP OF SOIL

BETWEEN EACH PLOT

MINIMUM 450mm DEPTH OF

GROWING MEDIUM ON

SCARIFIED SUBGRADE

50

2X8 LUMBER

FRAME

Section

Raised Garden Plot

DETAIL

TITLE :

DETAIL No. :

STANDARD DETAILS




L-61

July 2013

Irrigation Point ofConnection - 1-2"

DETAILTITLE :

DETAIL No. :

September 2012

STANDARD DETAILSGREATER VERNON PARKS, RECREATION & CULTURE


SS-I-01

F

POINT OF CONNECTION; 1-2" SERVICE LINE FROM CURBSTOP

BLOW-OUT VALVE, PER PLANSISOLATION VALVE, PER PLANS

DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY, PER PLANS

WATER METER, PER PLANS

CONCRETE VAULT; KONKAST #1102 W/ ALUMINUM LID; EXCEL #3974-2 LD

MASTER VALVE W/ UNIONS, PER PLANS

BLOW-OUT VALVE, PER PLANSISOLATION VALVE, PER PLANS

FLOW SENSOR, PER PLANS

V

MAIN LINE TO IRRIGATION COMPONENTS

DRAIN VALVE, PER PLANS

BM

PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE, PER PLANS

ADJUSTABLE GALV. STEEL PIPE STANDS (TYP. OF 3)

NOTE:

1. MAINTAIN STRAIGHT UNINTERRUPTED FLOW FOR A MIN. OF 10X THE DIA. OF THE PIPE UPSTREAM OF THE FLOW SENSOR & 5X THE DIA. OF THE PIPE DOWNSTREAM OF THE FLOW SENSOR.

2. ALL PIPING IN THE VAULT TO BE SCH. 80 PVC. EXTEND 300mm BEYOND VAULT AT EACH END.

3. VAULT TO BE OFFSET FROM PAVING A MINIMUM OF 300mm.

Irrigation Point ofConnection - 2-1/2-4"

DETAILTITLE :

DETAIL No. :

September 2012



SS-I-02

F

NOTE:

1. MAINTAIN STRAIGHT UNINTERRUPTED FLOW FOR A MIN. OF 10X THE DIA. OF THE PIPE UPSTREAM OF THE FLOW SENSOR & 5X THE DIA. OF THE PIPE DOWNSTREAM OF THE FLOW SENSOR.

2. ALL PIPING IN THE VAULT TO BE SCH. 80 PVC. EXTEND 300mm BEYOND VAULT AT EACH END.

3. VAULT TO BE OFFSET FROM PAVING A MINIMUM OF 300mm.

POINT OF CONNECTION; 1-2" SERVICELINE FROM CURBSTOP

BLOW-OUT ASSEMBLY, PER PLANS

ISOLATION VALVE, PER PLANS

DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY, PER PLANS

WATER METER, PER PLANS


BLOW-OUT ASSEMBLY, PER PLANS

ISOLATION VALVE, PER PLANS

FLOW SENSOR, PER PLANS

V

MAIN LINE TO IRRIGATION COMPONENTS

DRAIN VALVE, PER PLANS

M B

MASTER VALVE W/ UNIONS, PER PLANS

PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE, PER PLANS



ADJUSTABLE GALV. STEEL PIPE STANDS (TYP. OF 6)

Irrigation Vault -Large

DETAILTITLE :

DETAIL No. :

September 2012



SS-I-03

189299

1

1892

762

300

100


DRAIN ROCK

SECTION

PLAN

Irrigation Vault -Small

DETAILTITLE :

DETAIL No. :

September 2012



SS-I-04

FINISH GRADE

CONCRETE VAULT; #1031 KON KAST CONCRETE VAULT W/ ALUMINUM LID; EXCEL #4840-1DRAIN ROCK

100

300

1219

SECTION

PLAN

1016

1219

Controller PedestalDETAILTITLE :

DETAIL No. :

September 2012



SS-I-05

CONTROLLER CABINET; KELOWNA STEEL FABRICATORS MODEL # KSF-21

NOTES:

1. CONTROLLER CABINET TO BE FINISHED W/ (1) COAT OF ZINC CHROMATE PRIMER BY GENERAL PAINT OR TREMCLAD, AND (2) COATS OF EXTERIOR ALKYD #CW033W BY GENERAL PAINT.

(1) 50mm DIA. ELECTRICAL CONDUIT W/ SWEEP ELLS FOR POWER SUPPLY

ELECTRICALMETER

IRRIGATIONCONTROLLER

(2) MIN. 50mm DIA. ELECTRICAL CONDUIT W/ SWEEP ELLS FOR IRRIGATION WIRING

150mm DEPTH C.I.P.CONC. SLAB, NATURAL,

BROOM FINISH

6M 150mm GRID WIREMESH REINFORCING

GRANULAR BASECOMPACTED TO 95%

M.P.D.

6mm PLYWOOD BACK PLATE INSIDE CABINET

EXTEND CONDUIT 300mm BEYOND EDGE OF CONC. SLAB

876

600

558

1016 406

1422

600

MIN

.

150

150450

SECTION ELEVATION

Pipe TrenchDETAILTITLE :

DETAIL No. :

September 2012



SS-I-06

NOTE:

1. CLEAR TRENCH BED OF ALL ROCKS & DEBRIS PRIOR TO SAND BEDDING.

2. TRENCHES SHALL BE AT LEAST 300mm AWAY FROM HARD SURFACES TO AVOID UNDERMINING SUCH SURFACE OR ITS EDGE RETENTION.

4. ALL MAIN LINE, LATERAL LINES & WIRE BUNDLES SHALL BE SAND BEDDED, EXCEPT WHEN PIPE IS WITHIN GROWING MEDIUM FOR PLANTING BEDS. TAMP BY HAND TO ENSURE EQUAL COMPACTION TO THE ADJACENT GROWING MEDIUM.

450

MIN

.10

0 M

IN.

TO T

OP

OF

PIP

E(A

LL S

IDE

SO

F P

IPE

)

FINISH GRADE

LATERAL LINE, PER PLANS

BEDDING SAND

MAIN LINE, PER PLANS

WIRE BUNDLE, DEPTH AS PER FEDERAL CODES

Thrust BlocksDETAILTITLE :

DETAIL No. :

September 2012



SS-I-07

90° ELL - PLAN TEE - PLAN

45° ELL - PLAN SECTION

300

300

300

300

300

300

300

300

CONCRETETHRUST BLOCK,

20 MPa (TYP.)

Remote ControlValve

DETAILTITLE :

DETAIL No. :

September 2012



SS-I-08

VALVE BOX & COVERFINISH GRADE

CONTROL WIRES W/ 300mm SERVICE COIL & WATERPROOF WIRE SPLICE CONNECTORS

REMOTE CONTROL VALVE, CENTRED IN VALVE BOX

BRICK SUPPORTS, (4) MIN.PEA GRAVEL, 50mm MIN. DEPTH

PVC MAIN LINE, PER PLANSPVC TEE OR ELBOW

SCH. 80 PVC PIPE & ELBOW TO THE REMOTE CONTROL VALVE

PVC LATERAL LINE

SCHEDULE 80 PVC UNION ON BOTH SIDES OF VALVE

NOTES:

1. VALVE BOX SHALL BE CARSON INDUSTRIES, OR NDS 12" STANDARD. USE EXTENSIONS AS REQUIRED.

2. ALL VALVE BOXES SHALL INCLUDE A BOLT DOWN LOCK KIT.

Drip Zone Valve KitDETAILTITLE :

DETAIL No. :

September 2012



SS-I-09



DRIP ZONE KIT INCLUDING VALVE, FILTER, PRESSURE REGULATOR & FITTINGS


PVC MAIN LINE, PER PLANSPVC TEE OR ELBOW

SCH. 80 PVC PIPE & ELBOW TO THE REMOTE CONTROL VALVE

PVC LATERAL LINE

SCHEDULE 80 PVC UNION

NOTES:

1. VALVE BOX SHALL BE CARSON INDUSTRIES, OR NDS 18" JUMBO. USE EXTENSIONS AS REQUIRED.


Wire Splice BoxDETAILTITLE :

DETAIL No. :

September 2012



SS-I-10




NOTES:

1. VALVE BOX SHALL BE CARSON INDUSTRIES, OR NDS 12" STANDARD. USE EXTENSIONS AS REQUIRED. COVER TO BE GREY IN COLOUR.


Isolation ValveDETAILTITLE :

DETAIL No. :

September 2012



SS-I-11


GATE VALVE

BRICK SUPPORTS, (4) MIN.

PEA GRAVEL; 50mm MIN. DEPTH

MAIN LINE, PER PLANS

NOTES:

1. VALVE BOX SHALL BE CARSON INDUSTRIES, OR NDS 10" ROUND. USE EXTENSIONS AS REQUIRED. 2. ALL VALVE BOXES SHALL INCLUDE A BOLT DOWN LOCK KIT.

CUT OUT SLOT IN 8" PVC PIPE TO ALLOW FOR GATE VALVE W/ 25mm CLEARANCE AT TOP.

8" DIA. PVC PIPE

Quick Coupler ValveDETAILTITLE :

DETAIL No. :

September 2012



SS-I-12

NOTES:


FINISH GRADEVALVE BOX & COVER

QUICK COUPLER VALVE

BRICK SUPPORT, (4) MIN.

PEA GRAVEL; 50mm MIN. DEPTH. FILL TO TOP OF ANCHOR

MAIN LINE, PER PLANSPVC TEE OR ELBOW

PVC TRIPLE SWING JOINT ASSEMBLY, NOT TO EXCEED 45 DEG. VERTICALLY

QUICK COUPLER ANCHOR

Sprayhead / RotorDETAILTITLE :

DETAIL No. :

September 2012



SS-I-13

FINISH GRADE

SPRAYHEAD / ROTOR

TRIPLE SWING JOINT ASSEMBLY W/ SCHEDULE 40 ELBOWS & THREADED SCHEDULE 80 NIPPLE. SWING JOINT NOT TO EXCEED 45 DEG. VERTICAL

PVC TEE


NOTE:

1. SPRAYHEAD / ROTOR TO BE SET 50mm AWAY FROM PAVING, CURBS & HEADERBOARD & INSTALLED FLUSH W/ FINISH GRADE.

Drip Line AssemblyDETAILTITLE :

DETAIL No. :

September 2012



SS-I-14

FLUSH VALVE PLUMBED TO FLUSH MANIFOLD AT LOW POINT

PVC FLUSH MANIFOLD

PVC LATERAL LINE FROM REMOTE CONTROL VALVE

AIR VACUUM RELIEF VALVE PLUMBED TO BLANK POLY TUBING AT EACH HIGH POINT

AREA PERIMETER; LATERALS TO BE INSTALLED 2-4" FROM EDGE.

DRIP LINE, PER PLANS

TYPICAL CENTRE FEED LAYOUT

FLUSH VALVE PLUMBED TO FLUSH MANIFOLD AT LOW POINT

PVC SUPPLY MANIFOLD


AIR VACUUM RELIEF VALVE PLUMBED TO BLANK POLY TUBING AT EACH HIGH POINT

AREA PERIMETER; LATERALS TO BE INSTALLED 2-4" FROM EDGE.


TYPICAL END FEED LAYOUT

PVC FLUSH MANIFOLD

PVC FLUSH MANIFOLD

DR

IP L

INE

DE

PTH

,P

ER

PLA

NS

PVC SUPPLY MANIFOLD, DEPTH TO MATCH LATERAL LINES



ADAPTERPOLYETHYLENE RISER

ELBOW FITTING

FINISH GRADE

SECTION

NOTES:

1. INSTALL STAPLES ALONG DRIP LINE AT 1.8m SPACING AND AT ALL FITTINGS.

2. REFER PLANS FOR EMITTER AND LATERAL SPACING.

Root WateringSystem

DETAILTITLE :

DETAIL No. :

September 2012



SS-I-15

NOTE:

1. INSTALL (2) ROOT WATERING SYSTEM TUBES FOR TREES W/ CALIPERS LARGER THAN 50mm.

PLAN VIEW

ROOT WATERING SYSTEM W/ FILTER SOCK, PER PLANS

SECTION VIEW

FINISH GRADEPIPE TEE, C/W 12.5mm FIPT OUTLET

LATERAL LINE, PER PLANS12.5mm SWING JOINT ASSEMBLYGROWING MEDIUM

ROOT WATERING SYSTEM W/ FILTER SOCK, PER PLANSTREE ROOT BALLTREE PITLATERAL LINE, PER PLANSPIPE TEE, C/W 12.5mm FIPT OUTLET

12.5mm DISTRIBUTION TUBE

Drip RingDETAILTITLE :

DETAIL No. :

September 2012



SS-I-16

TREE TRUNK

LATERAL LINE OR DISTRIBUTION TUBE FROM REMOTE CONTROL VALVE

R 750R 450

NOTE:

1. INSTALL (4) STAPLES ALONG TUBING EVENLY SPACED & AT ALL FITTINGS.

DRIPLINE; PER PLANS W/ (16) EMITTERS TO EACH TREE.

GROWING MEDIUM

OUTLINE OF ROOTBALL

DRIPLINE; PER PLANS W/ (16) EMITTERS TO EACH TREE.

FINISH GRADE

200

PLAN VIEW

SECTION VIEW

Point Source DripEmitters

DETAILTITLE :

DETAIL No. :

September 2012



SS-I-17

NOTE:

1. TUBING STAKES TO BE SET 600mm MIN. DISTANCE FROM PAVING.

SECTION

PLAN

DISTRIBUTION TUBE, PER PLANS

1/4" VINYL DISTRIBUTION TUBING

1/4" BARB TRANSFER FITTING

1/4" TUBING STAKE

POINT SOURCE DRIP EMITTER, PER PLANS

WOOD MULCH, DEPTH PER PLANS

GROWING MEDIUM

FINISH GRADE

DISTRIBUTION TUBE, PER PLANS

1/4" VINYL DISTRIBUTION TUBING

1/4" BARB TRANSFER FITTING

POINT SOURCE DRIP EMITTER, PER PLANS

SHRUB ROOT BALL

Flush ValveDETAILTITLE :

DETAIL No. :

September 2012



SS-I-18

NOTES:


FINISH GRADE

VALVE BOX & COVER

MANUAL FLUSH VALVE; SCHEDULE 40 PVC BALL VALVE

BRICK SUPPORT, (4) MIN.PEA GRAVEL; 50mm MIN. DEPTH

450mm LENGTH FLEXIBLE HOSE INSIDE VALVE BOX

TRIPLE SWING JOINT ASSEMBLY W/ SCHEDULE 40 ELBOWS & THREADED SCHEDULE 80 NIPPLE. SWING JOINT NOT TO EXCEED 45 DEG. VERTICAL

PVC TEE


Air Relief ValveDETAILTITLE :

DETAIL No. :

September 2012



SS-I-19

FINISH GRADE

VALVE BOX & COVER

AIR VACUUM / RELIEF VALVE & TEE, PER PLANS

BRICK SUPPORT, (4) MIN.

PEA GRAVEL; 150mm MIN. DEPTH


NOTES:


Date post:	06-Oct-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	0 times
Download:	0 times